Gemini™ Select

38APS025-065,38APD025-130
Commercial Air-Cooled Condensing Units
with ComfortLink Version 6.X Controls
50/60 Hz

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting
CONTENTS Page
• C.TYP = 8 (DUAL TSTAT)
Page • C.TYP = 9 (VAV SETPOINT)
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,3 • CAPACITY CONTROL ALGORITHMS
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Field Configurable Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 • ALARM ROUTING
CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 • COMPRESSOR STAGING
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 • DEADBAND MULTIPLIER
Display Module Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 • DEMAND LIMIT
• SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY • DIGITAL COMPRESSOR
• ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE • HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL
Changing the Display Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Changing the Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 • LOW AMBIENT LOCKOUT
Configuration and Service Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 • MAINTENANCE REMINDER
Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .22 • MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL
ComfortLink Control Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 • MINUTES OFF TIME
• CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION • RAMP LOADING
• MAIN BASE BOARD (MBB) • TEMPERATURE RESET
• AUX BOARD Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
• COMPRESSOR EXPANSION MODULE (CXB) SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136-160
• ENERGY MANAGEMENT MODULE (EMM) Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
• CURRENT SENSOR BOARD (CSB) • ENABLING AND DISABLING COMPRESSORS
• ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH • COMPRESSOR MOTOR PROTECTION
• EMERGENCY ON/OFF SWITCH • MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION
• FAN STATUS SWITCH (FS1, FS2) • COMPRESSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK
• HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS) • COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
• PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS • CRANKCASE HEATER MOUNTING
• THERMISTORS • CRANKCASE HEATER WIRING
• THERMOSTAT INPUT • OIL CHARGE
Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 • COMPRESSOR AND OIL EQUALIZER LINE SIGHT
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 GLASSES
• ALARM RELAY Control Module Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
• LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVES • LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
PRE-START-UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 • CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Condenser Fan Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Evacuation and Dehydration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 • CONDENSER FAN MOTOR PROTECTION
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-59 Condenser Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Preliminary Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 • METAL (VALUE SOUND) FANS
Adjust Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 • AEROACOUSTIC™ (LOW SOUND) FANS
Check Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adjust Oil Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-136 • REPLACING SWITCH
Time, Day, and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Moisture/Liquid Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
• TIME/DATE BROADCAST Motormaster® V Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
• DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME • TROUBLESHOOTING
Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Pressure Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
• ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL • TROUBLESHOOTING
• OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE • REPLACING TRANSDUCER
• CCN CONTROL Temperature Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
• C.TYP = 1 (VAV) • TROUBLESHOOTING
• C.TYP = 3 (TSTAT MULTI) • REPLACING THERMISTORS
• C.TYP = 4 (TSTAT 2STG)
• C.TYP = 5 (SPT MULTI)
• C.TYP = 7 (PCT CAP)

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53380010-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38AP-2T Rev. A Pg 1 9-19 Replaces: 38AP-1T
 CONTENTS (cont)
WARNING
Page
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.
Recommended Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE
• CONDENSER FAN BLADES (American National Standards Institute/American Society
• CONDENSER FAN MOTOR BEARINGS of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
• DOOR HINGES 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can
Maintenance and Cleaning displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of
Navigator™ Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause
Refrigeration Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can
• LEAK TESTING be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount
• CHARGING of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and
Ground Fault Interrupter-Convenience Outlet skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.
(GFI-CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-175
Alarms and Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 WARNING
• RESETTING ALARMS
• ALARM HISTORY DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing
• ALARM AND ALERT DETAILS this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is
APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 176-194 no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195-209 refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required
APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that
OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210-218 may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.
DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219-224
APPENDIX E — CONTROL METHODS WITH
INPUTS FOR CONTROL MODE WARNING
COMPARISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 226
INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228 DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System
START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 38AP SPLIT SYSTEM contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.
CONDENSING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1 to CL-14 To remove a component, wear protective gloves and gog-
gles and proceed as follows:
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS a. Shut off electrical power to unit.
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from sys-
hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and tem using both high-pressure and low pressure
equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical ports.
rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen
mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment. and the work area should be well ventilated. Refrig-
When working on this equipment, observe precautions in erant in contact with an open flame produces toxic
the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the gases.
equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter
all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use and remove component from unit. Use a pan to
care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a
handling all electrical components. gage for how much oil to add to the system.
e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when
WARNING necessary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch
flame.
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during installation and Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal
service. There may be more than one disconnect switch. injury and death.
Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore
power until work is completed. CAUTION
DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been
exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes
and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to
air any longer than the actual time required to service the
equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with
dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely
repairs cannot be completed. Failure to follow these proce-
dures may result in damage to the equipment.

2
 Table 1 — Unit Sizes
CAUTION
NOMINAL NOMINAL NOMINAL NOMINAL
Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher UNIT SIZE CAPACITY CAPACITY CAPACITY CAPACITY
pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 ser- TONS kW TONS kW
(60 Hz) (60 Hz) (50 Hz) (50 Hz)
vice equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equip-
38APS025 24.0 84.3 20.0 70.3
ment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron
refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may 38APD025 24.0 84.3 20.0 70.3
result. 38APS027 26.6 93.4 22.2 78.1
38APD027 26.6 93.4 22.2 78.1
38APS030 31.1 109.2 26.0 91.4
CAUTION 38APD030 31.1 109.2 26.0 91.4
38APS040 39.8 139.8 32.8 115.3
Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss 38APD040 39.2 137.7 32.6 114.6
of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.
38APS050 48.1 168.9 39.5 138.9
38APD050 50.0 175.6 41.6 146.3
CAUTION 38APD060 58.3 204.7 48.0 168.8
38APS065 59.6 209.6 49.4 173.7
This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control 38APD070 67.3 236.4 58.5 205.7
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out com- 38APD080 78.0 273.9 64.5 226.8
ponents, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recom- 38APD090 87.4 306.9 71.9 252.8
mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control 38APD100 96.0 337.2 79.8 280.6
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic
38APD115 110.4 388.3 90.8 319.3
modules or electrical components.
38APD130 125.1 442.3 103.7 364.6
Be aware of electrostatic discharge (static electricity) when
handling or making contact with circuit boards or module Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-
connections. Always touch a chassis (grounded) part to ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the
dissipate body electrostatic charge before working inside local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)
control center. will be used in this manual.
Use extreme care when handling tools near boards and Point names will be written with the mode name first, then
when connecting or disconnecting terminal plugs. Circuit any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an
boards can easily be damaged. Always hold boards by the arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold
edges and avoid touching components and connections. and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,
This equipment uses, and can radiate, radio frequency which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,
energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the would be written as Configuration OPT2LLCS.
instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio This path name will show the user how to navigate through
communications. It has been tested and found to comply the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the
International Standard in North America EN61000-2/3
which are designed to provide reasonable protection and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name rep-
against such interference when operated in a commercial resents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential menu structure.
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be
at his own expense, will be required to take whatever mea- shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the
sures may be required to correct the interference. value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will
Always store and transport replacement or defective boards be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,
in anti-static shipping bag. ConfigurationOPT2LLCS = 2 (Circuit A leads).
Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously
GENERAL will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or
This publication contains controls, start-up, service, opera- value across the display. The expanded description is shown in
tion, and troubleshooting information for the Gemini™ Select the local display tables but will not be shown with the path
38AP condensing units with ComfortLink controls. The 38AP names in text.
air-cooled condensing units are intended for commercial com-
fort-cooling applications. Multiple scroll compressors are The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also
staged to provide capacity control. The units are shipped with a referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the
nitrogen holding charge and utilize Puron® refrigerant unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN
(R-410A) as the operating refrigerant. See Table 1 for unit size tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.
information.
CONTROLS
General — The 38AP air-cooled condensing unit contains
the ComfortLink electronic control system that controls and
monitors all operations of the unit.
The control system is composed of several components as
described in this manual. See Fig. 1-4 for typical control box
component arrangements. See Fig. 5-15 for typical power and
control wiring. Table 2 lists the drawings by unit size.

3
 Table 2 — Component, Power, and Control Drawings
UNIT DESCRIPTION LOCATION
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APS025 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 11, page 15
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APD025 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APS027 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 11, page 15
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APD027 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APS030 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 11, page 15
Component Arrangement Fig. 1, page 5
38APD030 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 5, page 9
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 6
38APS040 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 6, page 10
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 11, page 15
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 6
38APD040 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 7, page 11
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 6
38APS050 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 6, page 10
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 11, page 15
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 6
38APD050 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 7, page 11
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 6
38APD060 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 7, page 11
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 12, page 16
Component Arrangement Fig. 3, page 7
38APS065 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 8, page 12
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 13, page 17
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD070 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 9, page 13
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD080 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 9, page 13
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD090 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 9, page 13
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD100 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 9, page 13
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD115 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 10, page 14
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18
Component Arrangement Fig. 4, page 8
38APD130 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 10, page 14
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 14, page 18

4
5
LEGEND
AUX — Auxiliary
C — Contactor
CCB — Circuit Breaker
CCHR — Crankcase Heater Relay
CSB — Current Sensor Board
EMM — Energy Management Module
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground
FB — Fuse Block
FC — Fan Contactor
LON — Local Operating Network
MBB — Main Base Board
SW — Switch
TB — Terminal Block
TRAN — Transformer
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Fig. 1 — Component Arrangement — Unit Sizes 38APD,APS025-030

 LON

6
a38-7406

LEGEND
AUX — Auxiliary
C — Contactor
CB — Circuit Breaker
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker
CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay
CSB — Current Sensor Board
EMM — Energy Management Module
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground
FC — Fan Contactor
FCB — Fan Circuit Breaker
LON — Local Operating Network
MBB — Main Base Board
MM — Motormaster® Controller
SW — Switch
TB — Terminal Block
TRAN — Transformer
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Fig. 2 — Component Arrangement — Unit Sizes 38APD040-060, 38APS040-050

7
a38-7408

LEGEND
AUX — Auxiliary
C — Contactor
CB — Circuit Breaker
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker
CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay
CSB — Current Sensor Board
EMM — Energy Management Module
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground
FC — Fan Contactor
FCB — Fan Circuit Breaker
LON — Local Operating Network
MBB — Main Base Board
SW — Switch
TB — Terminal Block
TRAN — Transformer
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Fig. 3 — Component Arrangement — Unit Size 38APS065

 90,100

8
UNIT ONLY

a38-7407

LEGEND
AUX — Auxiliary
C — Contactor
CB — Circuit Breaker
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker
CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay
CSB — Current Sensor Board
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board
EMM — Energy Management Module
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground
FB — Fuse Block
FC — Fan Contactor
LON — Local Operating Network
MBB — Main Base Board
MM — Motormaster® Controller
SW — Switch
TB — Terminal Block
TRAN — Transformer
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Fig. 4 — Component Arrangement — Unit Sizes 38APD070-130

 NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.
a38-7409

Fig. 5 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APD,APS025-030 (Typical)

9
NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
a38-7410
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

Fig. 6 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APS040,050 (Typical)

10
 a38-7411
NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

Fig. 7 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APD040-060 (Typical)

11
 16

16

17

a38-7414

NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to

unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

Fig. 8 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APS065 (Typical)

12
NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

a38-7412

Fig. 9 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APD070-100 (Typical)

13
NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

a39-7413

Fig. 10 — Power Wiring Schematic — 38APD115,130 (Typical)

14
 NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

a38-7417

Fig. 11 — Control Wiring Schematic — 38APS025-050 (Typical)

15
 NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

a38-7415

Fig. 12 — Control Wiring Schematic — 38APD025-060 (Typical)

16
 NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to
unit wiring diagram label for specific unit.

a38-7418

Fig. 13 — Control Wiring Schematic — 38APS065 (Typical)

17
 a38-7416

NOTE: Typical drawing shown. Refer to unit wiring

diagram label for specific unit.
Fig. 14 — Control Wiring Schematic — 38APD070-130 (Typical)

18
 Legend and Notes for Fig. 5-14

LEGEND NOTES:
ACCSY — Accessory 1. Factory wiring is in accordance with UL (Underwriters Labora-
ALM — Alarm tories) 1995 standards. Any field modifications or additions
AMPS — Amperes must be in compliance with all applicable codes.
AUX — Auxiliary 2. Use 75 C minimum wire for field power supply.
C — Contactor 3. All field interlock contacts must have a minimum rating of
CB — Circuit Breaker 2 amps at 24-vac sealed. See field interlock wiring diagrams in
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker the section Capacity Control, page 64.
CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay 4. Compressor and fan motors are thermally protected. Three-
CH — Crankcase Heater phase motors protected against single-phase conditions.
COMP — Compressor 5. Terminals 13 and 14 of LVT are for field connection of remote
CSB — Current Sensor Board on-off. The contact must be rated for dry circuit application
CXB — Compressor Expansion Module capable of handling a 5-vdc, 1 mA to 20 mA load.
DGS — Digital Scroll 6. For 500 series unit operation at 208-3-60 line voltage, TRAN1
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer primary connections must be moved to terminals H3 and H4.
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor 7. For High SCCR or 575-3-60-v units, fan circuit breaker FCB1
DUS — Digital Unloaded Solenoid and FCB2 are replaced with fuse blocks FB1 and FB2.
EMM — Energy Management Module 8. For units with low ambient Motormaster® V factory-installed
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground option or field-installed accessory:
FB — Fuse Block 38APD,APS025-030: Fan contactor FC1 is replaced with fan
FC — Fan Contactor relay FR1
FCB — Fan Circuit Breaker 38APS040-050: Fan contactor FC1 is replaced with fan relay
FIOP — Factory-Installed Option FR1
FR — Fan Relay 38APD040-060: Fan contactor FC1 is replaced with fan relay
FS — Fan Status FR1
FU — Fuse 38APD070-100: Fan contactor FC1 is replaced with fan relay
GND — Ground FR1
HPS — High Pressure Switch 38APD070,090,100: Fan contactor FC2 is replaced with fan
LLSV — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve relay FR2
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal 38APD080: Fan contactor FC4 is replaced with fan relay FR2
MBB — Main Base Board 38APD115-130: Fan contactor FC5 is replaced with fan relay
MLV — Minimum Load Valve FR1; fan contactor FC2 is replaced with fan relay FR2
MM — Motormaster 38APS-065: Fan contactor FC1 is replaced with fan relay FR1
MP — Modular Motor Protector 9. MP-A1 not used in the following units:
NEC — National Electrical Code 38APD,APS025: All units
OAT — Outdoor Air Thermistor 38APD,APS027-030: 400-v, 460-v units without digital scroll
OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor 38APS040,050 400-v, 460-v units without digital scroll
OPT — Option 38APD040,050: All units
PL — Plug 38APD 060: 400-v, 460-v units without digital scroll
RAT — Return Air Temperature 38APD070-100: 400-v, 460-v units without digital scroll
RGT — Return Gas Temperature 38APD115-130: 400-v, 460-v units without digital scroll
RLY — Relay 10. MP-A2 not used in the following units:
SAT — Supply Air Temperature 38APD,APS025: All units
SEN — Sensor Terminal Block 38APD,APS027,030: 400-v, 460-v units
SET — Set Point Terminal Block 38APS040,050 400-v, 460-v units
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer 38APD040,050: All units
SW — Switch 38APD 060: 400-v, 460-v units
TB — Terminal Block 38APD070-100: 400-v, 460-v
TEMP — Temperature 38APD115-130: 400-v, 460-v units
TRAN — Transformer 11. MP-B1 not used in the following units:
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter 38APD,APS025: All units
Y — Cool Stage 38APD,APS027,030: 400-v, 460-v units
38APD40: All units
38APD050,060: 400-v, 460-v units
38APD 070: All units
38APD080-100: 400-v, 460-v
12. MP-B2 not used in the following units:
38APD,APS025-030: All units
38APD40: All units
38APD050,060: 400-v, 460-v units
38APD070: All units
38APD080-100: 400-v, 460-v
13. MP-A3 not used in the following units:
38APD,APS025-030: All units
38APS040,050 400-v, 460-v units
38APD090,100: 400-v, 460-v
38APD115-130: 400-v, 460-v units
14. MP-B3 not used in the following units:
38APD,APS025-030: All units
38APD070: All units
38APD080-100: 400-v, 460-v
15. Jumper plug required when modular motor protector is not
used.
16. High SCCR units with Motormaster controls only
17. For 380,400-v units, yellow CCH wire will connect to white neu-
tral wire instead of terminal 22 of fuse blocks.

19
 a38-7122

LEGEND b. Incoming wire size range for terminal block with MCA from 175.1 amps to
EQUIP GND — Equipment Ground 420 amps is 2 AWG to 600 kcmil.
NEC — National Electrical Code c. Incoming wire size range for non-fused disconnect with MCA up to
100 amps is 14 AWG to 1/0.
NOTES: d. Incoming wire size range for non-fused disconnect with MCA from
1. Factory wiring is in accordance with UL 1995 standards. Field modifications 100.1 amp to 200 amps is 6 AWG to 350 kcmil.
or additions must be in compliance with all applicable codes. e. Incoming wire size range for non-fused disconnect with MCA from
2. All units or modules have single point primary power connection. Main 200.1 amp to 450 amps is 3/0 to 500 kcmil.
power must be supplied from a field or factory-supplied disconnect. 4. Refer to certified dimensional drawings for exact locations of the main power
3. Wiring for main field supply must be rated 75 C. Use copper conductors only. and control power entrance locations.
a. Incoming wire size range for terminal block with MCA (minimum circuit
amps) up to 175 amps is 14 AWG (American Wire Gage) to 2/0.

Fig. 15 — Field Power Wiring

20
Display Module Usage attached to the back of the display hold the display module to
SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — This device is the any sheet metal panel to allow hands-free operation. The dis-
keypad interface used for accessing unit information, reading play module has a NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers
sensor values, and testing the unit. See Fig. 16. The scrolling Association) 4x housing suitable for use in outdoor environ-
marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED ments, and features a backlight and contrast adjustment for
(light-emitting diode) display. Eleven mode LEDs are located
on the display as well as an Alarm Status LED. See Appendix easy viewing in bright sunlight or night conditions. The display
A—Display Tables on page 176 for further details. module also has raised surface buttons with positive tactile
response.
MODE The Navigator display has up and down arrow keys, an
Run Status ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These keys are used to
Service Test
Temperature navigate through the different levels of the display structure.
Press the ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is dis-
Pressures
Setpoints
Inputs
Outputs
Alarm Status
played to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by
Configuration
Time Clock
ESCAPE ENTER LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 17.
Operating Modes
Alarms

Com
Fig. 16 — Scrolling Marquee Display for tL
ink
RAT
The scrolling marquee display module provides the user in- RET
U
TEM RN AIR
64.3
°F
terface to the ComfortLink control system. The display has up
PER
ATUR
E

and down arrow keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key.

These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of MOD
E

the display structure. See Appendix A—Display Tables on

Run Alarm
Statu Statu
s s
Serv
ice Te
st
Temp
eratu

page 176. Press the ESCAPE key until the display is blank to
res
Pres
sure
s
Setpo
ints
Inputs

move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the Outpu
Confi
Time
ts
gura
tion

left side of the display.

Cloc
k ESC
Oper
ating
Mode
Alarms s

Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously ENT

ER

will scroll a clear language text description across the display

indicating the full meaning of each display acronym. Clear lan-
guage descriptions will be displayed in the language of choice
(see page 22). Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys
when the display is blank (Mode LED level) will return the
scrolling marquee display to its default menu of rotating dis-
Fig. 17 — Accessory Navigator Display Module
play items, found under Run StatusVIEW. In addition, the
password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again be- Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-
fore changes can be made to password protected items. After a rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the
period of time with no key activity, the scrolling marquee will
ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the Nav-
display its default menu of rotating display items found under igator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning
Run StatusVIEW. of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Press
When a specific item is located, the display will flash show- the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode. Press-
ing the operator, the item, the item value and then the item units ing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys when the display says
(if any). Press the ENTER key to stop the display at the item “Select Menu Item” (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator
value. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items
flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state of an in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-
item and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be
ESCAPE key and the item, value, or units display will re- made to password protected items. After a period of time with
sume. Repeat the process as required for other items. no key activity, the Navigator will display its default menu of ro-
NOTE: If a value has been forced, the lower right “.” will be tating display items found under Run StatusVIEW.
flashing. When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the
ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE — left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the
The Navigator module (available only as a field-installed display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the
accessory) provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink display. Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the val-
control system. The display is a hand-held module with a ue will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change
4-line by 40-character backlit LCD (liquid crystal diode) the value, and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key.
screen. Four keys control the display menus, which provide
clear language descriptions of all menu items, operating Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in
modes, configuration points, and alarm diagnostics. A coiled the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press
extension cord capable of extending to 12 ft (5.6 m) allows the ENTER so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
display to be moved around the condensing unit. Magnets change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept

21
it. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configura-
structure. Repeat the process as required for other items. tionDISPLANG) variable is changed, all appropriate dis-
play expansions will immediately change to the new language.
Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring
adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of Language Selection.
the Navigator module, press the ESCAPE key until the dis-
Changing the Units of Measure — The factory de-
play reads “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys, move fault unit of measure is English (for example, °F, ^F, psi). The
to the Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to display can be changed to metric units (for example, °C, ^C,
this mode. The display will read: kPa).
> TEST OFF REQUIRED CONFIGURATIONS — Table 4 shows the re-
METR OFF quired configurations for Metric Display.
LANG ENGLISH Table 4 — METR (Metric Display)
PAS.E ENBL Required Configurations
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up SUB- ITEM
ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ENTER MODE DESCRIPTION
will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view DISP METR OFF/ON Metric Display Default: OFF
OFF=English
screen. Pressing ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously ON=Metric
allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or NOTE: When the Metric Display (Configura-
down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will tionDISPMETR) variable is changed, all appropriate dis-
change with the adjustment. Press ENTER to accept the play expansions will immediately change to the new units of
change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as measure. No power-off or control reset is required when recon-
it is plugged in to the LEN (Local Equipment Network) bus. figuring Metric Display.
Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the Configuration and Service Password — Items in
display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory the Configuration and Service Test modes are password pro-
tected. The words PASS and WORD will flash on the scrolling
default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the marquee. Press ENTER for the digits 1111 to be displayed.
Navigator module, press the ESCAPE key until the display On the Navigator, press Enter Password and 1111 will be dis-
reads “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the played. The default password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to
Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to this change each number if required and press ENTER to accept
mode. The display will read: the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.
CHANGING SERVICE PASSWORD — The password can
> TEST OFF only be changed through CCN operator interface software such
METR OFF as ComfortWORKS®, ComfortVIEW™, and Service Tool.
LANG ENGLISH Caution should be exercised when changing the password.
PAS.E ENBL Once changed, the only way to determine the password is
through one of these devices. To view or change the password,
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up use the CCN Variable PASSWORD found in Service Configu-
or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ration/Display.
ENTER will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the
view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultane- Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —
The 38AP units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The
ously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable
up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. See
ENTER to accept the change. The Navigator module will Table 5. The system elements are connected to the communi-
keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus. cation bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of
each system element communication connector must be wired
NOTE: If a value has been forced, a flashing “f” will be dis- to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it.
played next to the value. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of
Changing the Display Language — The factory each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be
default language is English. Several other languages are avail- made at LVT. See Fig. 18 and consult the CCN Contractor’s
able, including Spanish, French, and Portugese. Manual for further information.
REQUIRED CONFIGURATIONS — Table 3 shows the re- Table 5 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring
quired configurations for Language Selection. PART NO.
MANUFACTURER
Table 3 — LANG (Language Selection) REGULAR WIRING PLENUM WIRING
Alpha 1895 —
Required Configurations
American A21451 A48301
SUB- ITEM Belden 8205 884421
MODE ITEM DISPLAY DESCRIPTION COMMENT Columbia D6451 —
DISP LANG X Language Default: 0 Manhattan M13402 M64430
Selection Range: 0 to 3 Quabik 6130 —
0=English
1=Espanol
2=Francais
3=Portugese

22
 Fig. 18 — CCN Wiring Diagram

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri- ComfortLink Control Boards
can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual CONTROL BOARD COMMUNICATION
conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,
Teflon*, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil ComfortLink control boards are communicating controls on
shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, the Local Equipment Network (LEN). Several light-emitting
or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –4 F diodes (LEDs) indicate status of the board communications.
to 140 F (–20 C to 60 C) is required. Wire manufactured by Red LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be
Alpha (2413 or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs. During ini-
Columbia (02525) meets these requirements. tial power-up the LED will signal a 1/2-second blink 3 times,
It is important when connecting to a CCN communication followed by a pause. This indicates that the processor is boot-
bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network ing. If this pattern repeats, it is an indication that the control
to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used board is in a continuous reboot loop and the board should be re-
for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white placed. When operating correctly, the red status LEDs should
for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain- be blinking in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the
ing different colored wires. red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct power
is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the main control
At each system element, the shields of its communication is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload cur-
bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is rent software. If the problem still persists, replace the control
entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield board. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of
must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu- once per second or faster indicates that the control board
nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, should be replaced.
the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning
suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the Green LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local
building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking
the network: whenever power is on. All other boards, except the scrolling
marquee and Navigator, have a LEN LED which should be
1. Turn off power to the control box. blinking whenever power is on and the device is communicat-
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white ing. If a particular board is installed but not required, it will not
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri- be communicating. An AUX1 board without the digital com-
ate colors for different colored cables.) pressor or Motormaster options enabled is an example. Check
3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug, LEN connections for potential communication errors at the
the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the board J3 and/or J4 connectors. Communication between mod-
(–) terminal. ules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run
4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is in parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the
MBB provides both power and communication directly to the
only intended for temporary connection (for example, a
laptop computer running Service Tool). marquee display only.
Yellow LED — The Main Base Board has one yellow LED.
IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some The Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) LED will blink during
routines from running and may prevent the unit from start- times of network communication.
ing. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If MAIN BASE BOARD (MBB) — See Fig. 19. The MBB is
conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the
cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of major portion of operating software and controls the operation
the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output
bus. channel information received from its inputs and from all other
modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and
suction pressure transducers, current sensor boards (CSB) and
*Registered trademark of Dupont. thermistors. The MBB also receives the discrete inputs from

23
the thermostat contacts and other status switches. See Table 6. Addressing — The board address is set by the DIP switch S1
The MBB also controls several outputs. Information is trans- as follows:
mitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or
LEN. The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) bus is also sup- SWITCH NUMBER/POSITION
ported. Connections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the LVT (low voltage terminal) terminal strip. OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
The Instance Jumper must be on “1.”
AUX BOARD (AUX) — This control board is used with COMPRESSOR EXPANSION MODULE (CXB) — The
both the digital compressor and low ambient head pressure CXB is used only on unit sizes 070-130 to provide additional
control factory-installed option or field-installed accessory. inputs and outputs for fans and compressors when the unit has
For the digital compressor option, it provides the additional in- more than 4 compressors. Additionally, if required refrigerant
put for the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) as well as control for the second solenoid per circuit is provided from the
the output for the digital compressor unloader solenoid. For the CXB, a field-supplied 24-volt transformer to power the sole-
load ambient head pressure control option/accessory it pro- noids is required. See Fig. 21.
vides the analog signal to the head pressure control device for
fan speed determination. See Fig. 20. Addressing — The board address is set by the DIP switch S1
as follows:
SWITCH NUMBER/POSITION
1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON

RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED - YELLOW LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER

CEPL130346-01

K11 K10 K9

K8 K7 K6 K5
J1 J2 STATUS

2 1
J3 LEN J10
J4

K4 K3 K2 K1
CCN

J5

J6

J7 J8 J9

Fig. 19 — Main Base Board

24
 LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH
SERIAL NUMBER

STATUS SIO (LEN)

D7

D5
ON

Q5
D8
S1

Y1
2

D6
J1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8

J9
L2
L5
24 VAC

U1

+
1
Q1
100K 100K

D3

2
G
Q60
100K

L3

–
Q12

3
U2
32GB500 442 EE
CEPL130567-03

+
1
U21
Q11
U9
U8

Q10

2
G
U5

U6

U7

U10

–
3
U4

JP2

CH14
J8

CH13
C61

J7
CH13
J4 J5 D12 JP1
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8
J2 J3

J6

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

Fig. 20 — AUX Board

J1 J2

CEBD430350-09-RA SST-A

LEN
(J4)
LEN
(J3) J6

STATUS
LEN

4 3 2 1 S1

DIP SWITCH S1
LEN LED STATUS
Fig. 21 — Compressor Expansion Board (CXB)

25
ENERGY MANAGEMENT MODULE (EMM) — The
EMM module (Fig. 22) is a factory-installed option or field-in- Inputs — Several inputs are used for status signals and safe-
stalled accessory that provides inputs for various energy man- ties. See Table 6.
agement or unit control functions as listed below:
CURRENT SENSING BOARD (CSB) — The CSB is used
• 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset Input* to monitor the status of each compressor by measuring current
• 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set point Input* and providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB)
• 4 to 20 mA Requested Cooling Capacity Input* or compressor expansion module (CXB). Table 7 lists CSB in-
• 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit* put connections.
• Single or Two-Step Demand Limit Inputs†
• Discrete thermostat inputs Y3 and Y4 for Dual Thermo- ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH — The
stat Control† Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is a 3-position switch used
to control the unit. When switched to the Enable position, the
unit is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off posi-
*A field supplied 4 to 20 mA signal generator is required to tion to shut the unit down. Move the switch to the Remote Con-
use these options with the EMM. trol position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to
†Single or Two-Step Demand Limit cannot be used in con- start the unit. The contacts must be capable of handling a
junction with Dual Thermostat Control, C.TYP=8. 24 vac, 50 mA load. In the Enable and Remote Control (dry
contacts closed) positions, the unit is allowed to operate and re-
spond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and
CAUTION set point data. See Fig. 23.
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac- EMERGENCY ON/OFF SWITCH — The Emergency On/
turer’s control systems due to power supply differences, Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the
full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. The two unit off immediately. Power to the MBB, CXB, AUX, EMM,
different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink and scrolling marquee display is interrupted when this switch is
controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off. See
device should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal gener- Fig. 23.
ating device is used. FAN STATUS SWITCH (FS1, FS2) — A proof-of-fan oper-
ation is recommended and needs to be field-installed in the in-
Addressing — The board address is set by the DIP switch S1 door unit. Several different types of switches can be utilized,
as follows: such as a differential pressure switch located across the indoor
fan or auxiliary contacts on an indoor fan contactor. The con-
SWITCH NUMBER/POSITION
tacts must be rated for dry circuit application capable of han-
1 2 3 4 dling a 24-vac load up to 50 mA. See Fig. 24.
ON ON ON ON

CEBD430351-0396-01C
PWR

J1 J2

CEPL130351-01
J4 J3 LEN

STATUS

J5

J7
J6

GREEN LED - ADDRESS

RED LED - STATUS LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) DIP SWITCH

Fig. 22 — EMM Board

26
 Table 6 — Switch Inputs
INPUT DESIGNATION FACTORY OR FIELD CONNECTION POINT
CURRENT SENSING BOARD A1 CSB-A1 Factory
CURRENT SENSING BOARD A2 CSB-A2 Factory
CURRENT SENSING BOARD A3 CSB-A3 Factory
See Table 7
CURRENT SENSING BOARD B1 CSB-B1 Factory
CURRENT SENSING BOARD B2 CSB-B2 Factory
CURRENT SENSING BOARD B3 CSB-B3 Factory
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1 Field LV-3,-4
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2 Field LV-5,-6
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER A DPTA Factory MBB-J8
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER B DPTB Factory MBB-J8
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR DTT Factory See Table 9 on page 29
MBB — J1
EMERGENCY ON/OFF SWITCH SW2 Factory AUX — J1
UPC — 24VAC
FAN STATUS 1 FS1 Field LVT-16,-18
FAN STATUS 2 FS2 Field LVT-17,-18
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH A HPS-A Factory MBB-J6
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH B HPS-B Factory MBB-J6
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR OAT Factory See Table 9 on page 29
REMOTE ON-OFF SWITCH Field LVT-13,-14
REMOTE-OFF-ENABLE SWITCH SW1 Factory MBB-J7
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR RAT Field See Table 9 on page 29
RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR RGT Factory See Table 9 on page 29
SPACE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR SPT Field See Table 9 on page 29
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER A SPTA Factory MBB-J7
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER B SPTB Factory MBB-J7
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR SAT Field See Table 9 on page 29
THERMOSTAT Y1 Y1 Field LVT-12,-18
THERMOSTAT Y2 Y2 Field LVT-15,-18
THERMOSTAT Y3 Y3 Field LVT-3,-4
THERMOSTAT Y4 Y4 Field LVT-5,-6

Table 7 — Current Sensing Board (CSB) Input Connections

38AP CURRENT SENSING BOARD CONNECTION
UNIT
CSB-A1 CSB-A2 CSB-A3 CSB-B1 CSB-B2 CSB-B3
38APD025 MBB-J9 — — MBB-J9 — —
38APS025 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — — — —
38APD027 MBB-J9 — — MBB-J9 — —
38APS027 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — — — —
38APD030 MBB-J9 — — MBB-J9 — —
38APS030 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — — — —
38APD040 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 —
38APS040 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — — —
38APD050 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 —
38APS050 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — — —
38APD060 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 —
38APS065 — — — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 MBB-J9
38APD070 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5
38APD080 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 — MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5
38APD090 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5
38APD100 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5
38APD115 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5
38APD130 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5 MBB-J9 MBB-J9 CXB-J5

27
 SCROLLING MARQUEE
DISPLAY

CB1 CB2 CB3

REMOTE
CONTROL OFF

SW1 OFF SW2

ENABLE ON
LEGEND
CB — Circuit Breaker
SW — Switch ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE EMERGENCY
CONTACT SWITCH ON-OFF SWITCH

Fig. 23 — Scrolling Marquee, Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS) — Each circuit is pro- Return Air Temperature (RAT) — A return air temperature
tected with a high pressure switch to prevent excessive con- sensor (Part No. 33ZCSENSAT) is required for certain control
densing pressure. See the section Sensor Locations on page 32 types discussed in the section Capacity Control, beginning on
for locations. The high pressure switch, P/N HK02ZZ001, page 64. The sensor is field-installed in the indoor unit and
opens at 650 ± 10 psig (4482 ± 69 kPa) and closes at 500 ± 15 wired to the low voltage terminal (LVT) of the unit to measure
psig (3447 ± 103 kPa). the air temperature entering the evaporator coil. Sensor wiring
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is should not be in conduit with other control voltages, or errone-
equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. The ous or erratic readings may result. The sensor should be
suction pressure transducers have a yellow body with a pres- located directly in front of the evaporator coil after an outside
sure range of –6.7 to 420 psig (–46 to 2896 kPa) while the dis- air intake. See Fig. 24.
charge transducers have a red body with a pressure range of The RAT sensor consists of a thermistor encased within a
14.5 to 667 psig (100 to 4599 kPa). These inputs connect to the stainless steel probe. See Fig. 25. The sensor probe is 6 in.
MBB (main base board) and are used to monitor the status of nominal length with 114 in. (2.9 m) of unshielded, 2-conductor,
the unit and to ensure the unit operates within the compressor 18 AWG twisted-pair cables. The sensor temperature range is
envelope. The transducers are used to protect the compressor –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) with a nominal resistance of
from operating at too low or too high of a pressure condition. In 10,000 ohms at 77 F (25 C). The sensor has an accuracy of
some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The ±0.36 F ( ±0.2 C). Refer to the 38AP Installation Instructions
MBB will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as for information on wiring.
needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operating In lieu of wiring a sensor to the 38AP controls, the MAT/
pressures. Table 8 summarizes pressure transducer characteris- RAT sensor reading can be broadcast to the unit. It is recom-
tics. mended that the broadcast frequency be at least once every 30
Table 8 — Pressure Transducer Identification seconds. If a broadcast is not received for 3 minutes a thermis-
tor failure alert will be generated. The broadcast should write to
CARRIER BODY
PRESSURE the CCN point, RETURN_T. Even though the MAT/RAT tem-
TRANSDUCER PART NUMBER COLOR RANGE, perature is being broadcast, a thermistor type Configuration
psi (kPa) OPT1RAT.T (RAT Thermistor Type) must be set to 0
Discharge HK05ZZ001 Red
14.5 to 667 (5,000 ) or 1 (10,000 ).
(100 to 4599)
–6.7 to 420
Suction HK05SZ003 Yellow (–46 to 2896)
THERMISTORS — The electronic control uses 3 to 7 therm-
istors to sense temperatures for controlling unit operation. See
Table 9. These sensors are outlined in the following sections.
Three different thermistor curves are utilized depending on the
thermistor and the configuration of the input. The three differ-
ent types are 5,000 at 77 F (25 C); 10,000 at 77 F (25 C);
and 86,000  at 77 F (25 C).

28
 Table 9 — Thermistors
WIRING DIAGRAM FIELD CONTROLLER REFERENCE
THERMISTOR COMMENTS
DESIGNATION CONNECTION CONNECTION VOLTAGE
Discharge
DTT Temperature Factory AUX-J6 CH11 5.0 vdc Digital compressor units only
Thermistor
Outside Air
OAT Temperature Factory MBB-J8-7, 8 4.0 vdc

RAT Return Air LVT-19, -20 MBB-J8-11, 12 4.0 vdc

Temperature
Return Gas
RGTA Factory MBB-J8-1, 2 4.0 vdc Not used on 38APS065
Thermistor, Circuit A
Return Gas
RGTB Thermistor, Circuit B Factory MBB-J8-3, 4 4.0 vdc 38APD and 38APS065 only

SAT Supply Air LVT-11, -19 MBB-J8-12, 13 4.0 vdc

Temperature
Space Temperature
T55 LVT-21, -22 MBB-J8-9, -6 4.0 vdc
Thermistor
Space Temperature
Thermistor LVT-21, -22 MBB-J8-9, -6 4.0 vdc
T56
Space Temperature LVT-22, -23 MBB-J8-6, -5 4.0 vdc
Offset

RETURN
a38-7133 AIR

FS2
OR
MAT/RAT FS1* SAT

OUTSIDE DUCT
AIR SUPPLY

FAN

EVAPORATOR
LEGEND
COIL
FS1 — Fan Status Switch (24-v)
MAT — Mixed Air Temperature Sensor
RAT — Return Air Temperature Sensor
SAT — Supply Air Temperature Sensor
*FS1 or FS2 can be pressure differential switch (shown), motor current detection, or sail
switch.

Fig. 24 — Mixed Air Temperature (MAT)/Return Air Temperature (RAT), Supply Air Temperature (SAT)
and Fan Status Switch Sensor Layout

29
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) — A supply air temperature In lieu of wiring a sensor to the 38AP controls, the SAT sen-
sensor is required for certain control types discussed in the sec- sor reading can be broadcast to the unit. It is recommended
tion Capacity Control, beginning on page 64. The sensor is that the broadcast frequency be at least once every 30 seconds.
field-installed in the indoor unit and wired to the low voltage If a broadcast is not received for 3 minutes a thermistor failure
terminal (LVT) of the unit to measure the air temperature leav- alert will be generated. The broadcast should write to the CCN
ing the evaporator coil. Sensor wiring should not be in conduit point, SUPPLY_T. Even though the SAT temperature is being
with other control voltages, or erroneous or erratic readings broadcast, a thermistor type ConfigurationOPT1SAT.T
may result. (SAT Thermistor Type) must be set to 0 (5,000 ) or 1
The sensor must be mounted in the discharge of the unit, (10,000 ).
downstream of the cooling coil and before any heating coil or
heat exchanger if reheat is utilized. See Fig. 24. Be sure the 3.90
probe tip does not come in ontact with any of the unit
surfaces.
The SAT sensor (Part No. 33ZCSENSAT) consists of a
thermistor encased within a stainless steel probe. See Fig. 25.
3.00
The SAT sensor probe is 6 in. (150 mm) nominal length with
114 in. (2.9 m) of unshielded, 2-conductor 18 AWG twisted- .175 DIA
x .600
pair cables. Wiring to the device must be field-supplied.
Shielded 2-conductor, 18 AWG twisted-pair cabled is required. .08
The sensor temperature range is –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) .39
and is a Type II thermistor with a nominal resistance of 10,000
ohms at 77 F (25 C). The sensor has an accuracy of ±0.36 °F FOAM GASKET
(±0.2 °C).
As an alternative to a single thermistor, an averaging sensor
(Part No. HH79NZ041) can be utilized to provide the supply .40'' O.D.

air temperature to the 38AP controls. See Fig. 26. This sensor
consists of 9 individual sensors wired within a 24 ft (7.3 m) .250 ±.01 Dia
flexible copper tube. Wiring to the device must be field sup-
plied. Shielded 2-conductor, 18 AWG twisted-pair cabled is re- 5.5 ±.5

quired. The sensor temperature range is –40 to 245 F (–40 to

118 C) and is a Type II thermistor with a nominal resistance of PLENUM RATED CABLE
114'' ±6
NOTE: All dimensions
shown in inches.
10,000 ohms at 77 F (25 C). The sensor has an accuracy of
±0.36 °F (± 0.2 °C). Fig. 25 — 33ZCSENSAT Sensor

SIDE VIEW
END VIEW
FOAM PAD

0.5 (12.7) CONDUIT AVERAGING COPPER

KNOCKOUT (X10) HANDLE TUBING
1.58 (40.08) TYPICAL

SHRINK
TUBING
COVER TOP VIEW, NO COVER
2.33 2.13
(59.08) (54.10) 1.98
(50.26)

4.00
(101.60) 0.19 (4.76)

4.20
(106.67) 0.75 (19.05)
0.38 (9.53)
0.18
(4.69)
0.43
(10.99)

3.08 (78.23)
3.88 (98.60)

Fig. 26 — HH79NZ041 Averaging Sensor

30
Return Gas Temperature (RGT) — These sensors are factory
installed in a friction fit well located in the suction line of each
circuit. The sensor is a 5,000  at 77 F (25 C) thermistor con-
nected to the main base board. These thermistors are used in
the suction superheat calculations. The thermistor must be in-
sulated with cork tape insulation to reduce the effects of ambi-
ent temperature on the sensor. 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED(+)
Outdoor-air Temperature Sensor (OAT) — This sensor is WHT(GND)
BLK(-)
CCN COM
factory installed on a bracket which is inserted through the
base pan of the unit on unit sizes 025-060 (see the section Sen- SEN

sor Locations on page 32) or mounted to the back of the con- TIMED OVERRIDE
SW1

trol box on the unit sizes 065-130. This sensor is a 5,000  BUTTON (SW1)
BRN (GND)
thermistor at 77 F (25 C) connected to the main base board. BLU (SPT)
SENSOR WIRING

Outside Air Temperature can be forced to a value at the

scrolling marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, ac-
cess the parameter TemperaturesUNITOAT. Press
ENTER to view the current value. Press ENTER again and
use the up and down arrow keys to display the desired value;
then press ENTER to accept the value. On the scrolling mar-
quee, the “.” in the lower right corner will flash. On the Navi-
gator device, a flashing “f” will be displayed next to the value.
To clear the forced value, press ENTER followed by the up Fig. 27 — Space Temperature Sensor
and down arrow keys simultaneously. The value will revert to Typical Wiring (33ZCT55SPT)
the actual reading and the flashing “.” or “f” will be removed.
Discharge Temperature Thermistor (DTT) — This sensor is
only used on units with a digital compressor. The sensor is
mounted on the discharge line close to the discharge of the dig-
ital compressor. The thermistor must be insulated with cork
tape insulation to reduce the effects of ambient temperature on
the sensor. It attaches to the discharge line using a spring clip 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED(+)
WHT(GND)
and protects the system from high discharge gas temperature BLK(-)
CCN COM

when the digital compressor is used. This sensor is an

86,000  at 77 F (25 C) thermistor connected to the AUX
SEN SET

SW1
TIMED OVERRIDE BLK
board (see Table 9). BUTTON (SW1) (T56)
BRN (GND) SENSOR WIRING
Space Temperature Sensor (T55, T56) — Space temperature BLU (SPT)

sensors are used to measure the interior temperature of a build-

ing. JUMPER
TERMINALS
AS SHOWN
Space Temperature can be forced to a value at the scrolling
marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, access the
parameter TemperaturesUNITSPT. Press ENTER to
view the current value. Press ENTER again and use the up
and down arrow keys to display the desired value; then press Cool Warm

ENTER to accept the value. On the scrolling marquee, the “.” Fig. 28 — Space Temperature Sensor
in the lower right corner will flash. On the Navigator device, a Typical Wiring (33ZCT56SPT)
flashing “f” will be displayed next to the value. To clear the
forced value, press ENTER followed by the up and down ar-
row keys simultaneously. The value will revert to the actual
reading and the flashing “.” or “f” will be removed.
The following three types of SPT sensors are available:
• Space temperature sensor (33ZCT55SPT) with timed LVT
override button (see Fig. 27) 22
• Space temperature sensor (33ZCT56SPT) with timed 23
override button and set point adjustment (see Fig. 28) 21
• Space temperature sensor (33ZCT59SPT) with occu-
pancy override button, space temperature offset, and
LCD (liquid crystal display) display (see Fig. 29)
All of the above sensors are 10,000  at 77 F (25 C), Type II
thermistors and are connected to the low voltage terminal
(LVT). The sensor should be mounted approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m) from the floor in an area representing the average tem-
perature in the space. Allow at least 4 ft (1.2 m) between the
sensor and any corner. Mount the sensor at least 2 ft (0.6 m)
from an open doorway.

a38-7420

Fig. 29 — Space Temperature Sensor

Typical Wiring (33ZCT59SPT)

31
 To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 30): N

1. Use a 20 gage wire to connect the sensor to the controller. SPT

The wire is suitable for distances of up to 500 ft (152 m).
Use a three-conductor shielded cable for the sensor and SENSOR
set point adjustment connections. The standard CCN
communication cable may be used. If the set point LVT
adjustment (slidebar) is not required, then an unshielded, SEN SEN
18 or 20 gage, two-conductor, twisted pair cable may be 21
used. Connect one wire of the twisted pair to one SEN 22
terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN ter-
minal located under the cover of the space temperature SET 23
sensor.
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 21 and
22 on LVT located in the unit control box. Sensor wiring
should not be in conduit wth other control voltages, or er- Fig. 30 — Typical SPT Wiring
roneous or erratic readings may result. T-55 SPACE
SENSOR
3. Connect the T56 set point adjustment between the SET
terminal and LVT terminal 23.
Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space using 6

the RJ11 connector provided with the space sensor, if desired. CCN+ 5
To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN (Fig. 31):
TO CCN CCN GND 4
COMM 1
IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector BUS (PLUG)
AT UNIT
3
wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus CCN- 2
wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table for accept-
able wiring. 1

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color Fig. 31 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring to
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.) Optimal Space Sensor RJ11 Connector
2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the THERMOSTAT INPUT — A two-stage thermostat can be
space temperature sensor terminal block. used for constant volume applications to provide Y1 and Y2
3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of cooling inputs. A thermostat can also be used in a variable air
the space temperature sensor. volume application to determine supply air set point with Y1
4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the and Y2 cooling inputs. For dual circuit machines, two separate
space temperature sensor. systems can be controlled independently from two 2-stage
thermostats. Y1 and Y2 cooling inputs control circuit A. Y3
5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to and Y4 cooling inputs control circuit B. Thermostat connec-
the remainder of the CCN communication bus. tions depend on the machine control type which is discussed
In lieu of a single sensor providing space temperature, an aver- later in this book.
aging sensor array of either 4 or 9 sensors may be employed to
provide a space temperature as shown in Fig. 32. With this Sensor Locations — See Fig. 33-49.
control scheme, only T55 space temperature sensors (P/N
33ZCT55SPT) can be used. Total sensor wiring must not
exceed 1,000 ft (305 m). Do not use T56 space temperature
sensors (P/N 33ZCT56SPT) for space temperature averaging
because the 5-degree offset function will not work in a multi-
ple sensor application.
NOTE: The Timed Override feature from a space temperature
sensor requires a single space temperature sensor connected to
the unit. This feature does not function when used with aver-
aging space temperature sensor arrays.

32
 RED RED
BLK BLK

J6
RED RED RED
6
BLK BLK BLK
7

SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SENSOR 4

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 4 SENSOR APPLICATION
J6
RED RED RED
6
BLK BLK BLK
7

SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3

BLK

RED

RED RED
BLK BLK

SENSOR 4 SENSOR 5 SENSOR 6

RED
BLK

RED RED
BLK BLK
LEGEND
Factory Wiring
Field Wiring SENSOR 7 SENSOR 8 SENSOR 9

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 9 SENSOR APPLICATION

Fig. 32 — Space Temperature Averaging

DTT

SPT-A
(YEL)
DPT-A
HPS-A
(RED)
RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK INSULATION
TAPE

OAT
LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
OAT — Outside Air Temperature Thermistor
OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 33 — 38APS025, 027, 030 Sensor Locations

33
 DTT

DPT-A
(RED)
HPS-B

HPS-A

DPT-B
(RED)

RGT-B—INSULATE
WITH CORK INSULATION
TAPE

SPT-B
LEGEND (YEL)
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor SPT-A
HPS — High Pressure Switch (YEL) OAT
OAT — Outside Air Temperature Thermistor
OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor RGT-A—INSULATE
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer WITH CORK INSULATION
TAPE

Fig. 34 — 38APD025, 027, 030 Sensor Locations

SPT-A
(YEL)

DTT

RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE
DPT-A
(RED)

HPSA

OAT

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
OAT — Outside Air Temperature Thermistor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 35 — 38APS040, 050 Sensor Locations

34
 RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE

RGT-B—INSULATE SPT-A DTT

WITH CORK (YEL)
INSULATION
HPS-A
TAPE

DPT-A
SPT-B
(RED)
(YEL)
HPS-B

DPT-B
(RED)

OAT

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
OAT — Outside Air Temperature Thermistor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 36 — 38APD040, 050, 060 Sensor Locations

RGT-B—INSULATE
WITH CORK SPT-B
INSULATION (YEL)
TAPE

DPT-B
(RED)

HPS-B

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
NOTE: For OAT location, see Fig. 44.

Fig. 37 — 38APS065 Sensor Locations

35
 RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE

SPT-A
(YEL)

DPT-A
(RED)
HPS-A

DTT
LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 38 — 38APD070,080 Sensor Locations, Circuit A

RGT-B—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE

SPT-B
(YEL)

DPT-B
(RED)

HPS-B
LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
NOTE: For OAT location, see Fig. 44.

Fig. 39 — 38APD070 Sensor Locations, Circuit B

36
 RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE

SPT-A
(YEL)

HPS-A

DPT-A
(RED)

DTT

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 40 — 38APD090, 100 Sensor Locations Circuit A

RGT-B—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE

SPT-B
(YEL)

DPT-B
(RED)

HPS-B

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
NOTE: For OAT location, see Fig. 44.

Fig. 41 — 38APD080, 090, 100 Sensor Locations Circuit B

37
 RGT-A—INSULATE
WITH CORK
INSULATION
TAPE SPT-A
(YEL)

HPS-A

DPT-A
(RED)

DTT

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 42 — 38APD115, 130 Sensor Locations Circuit A

RGT-B—INSULATE SPT-B
WITH CORK (YEL)
INSULATION
TAPE

DPT-B
(RED)

HPS-B

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
NOTE: For OAT location, see Fig. 44.

Fig. 43 — 38APD115, 130 Sensor Locations Circuit B

38
 CONTROL BOX INTERIOR
(NOT TO SCALE)

TO A1 a38-7346
HPS-A
DIG. COMP. SPT-B
DPT-A
- DUS DPT-B
SPT-A
- DTT
OAT (ATTACHED TO
LEGEND OUTSIDE BACK OF CONTROL BOX)
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
DUS — Digital Unloaded Solenoid
HPS — High Pressure Switch
OAT — Outside Air Temperature Thermistor
OFM — Outside Fan Motor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
Fig. 44 — 38APS065, 38APD070-130 OAT Location (38APD080-100 Shown)

TO COMPRESSOR TO CONTROL BOX

CONTROL RAIL
BOX
WRAP ENTIRE
SENSOR DTT THERMISTOR
WATER TIGHT HARNESS MOUNTING
RAIL BRACKET
WIRE TIE (2)

DISCHARGE
TUBE

0.5 in.
DETAIL OAT (13 mm)

DETAIL DTT
NOTE: SECURE OAT WITH TWO TIES. INSERT
Fig. 45 — Discharge Temperature Thermistor ASSEMBLY INTO BASE HOLE AND SECURE
(DTT) Mounting WITH SCREW.
Fig. 46 — Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT)
Thermistor Mounting, 38AP025-060

THIS SIDE
INSIDE BOX

TO CONTROL
BOX
SECURE OAT PROBE
TO OUTSIDE BACK OF
CONTROL BOX WITH TWO
PUSH-IN WIRE TIES DETAIL OAT
AS SHOWN.

Fig. 47 — Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Thermistor Mounting, 38APS065, 38APD070-130

39
 Two conditions will open the liquid line solenoid valves.
Each circuit operates independently. The primary liquid line
solenoid valve (LLSV-A or LLSV-B) is energized any time a
compressor is operating in the circuit. The circuit’s primary liq-
uid line solenoid is opened for approximately 20 seconds be-
LOOP WIRE HARNESS AND fore a lead circuit compressor is started. The primary liquid line
SECURE WITH WIRE TIE TO solenoid valve is de-energized 5 seconds after the circuit stops.
FORM STRAIN RELIEF.
If the circuit has an additional liquid line solenoid valve
(LLSV-A2 or LLSV-B2), it will be energized with the start of
the second compressor in the circuit. The second liquid line so-
lenoid in the circuit will be de-energized when the circuit re-
turns to a single compressor running.
As part of the refrigerant management routine, the primary
liquid line solenoid valve, LLSV-A or LLSV-B, is opened
Fig. 48 — High Pressure Switch (HPS), Suction when the circuit is OFF and the Outdoor Air Temperature
Pressure Transducer (SPT), and Discharge (OAT) is less than the circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature
Pressure Transducer (DPT) Mounting (SST). The primary liquid line solenoid will close if the circuit
is OFF and the OAT is greater than the SST plus 2° F (1.1° C).
If equipped, the second liquid line solenoid in the circuit will
INSTALL NUT AND SEAL
ON THERMISTOR. APPLY
not operate as part of this refrigerant management routine.
THERMAL CONDUCTIVE LOOP WIRE HARNESS AND
GREASE TO THERMISTOR SECURE WITH WIRE TIE PRE-START-UP
AND WELL. INSERT TO FORM STRAIN RELIEF.
THERMISTOR INTO WELL.
INSULATE WITH
IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,
CORK TAPE review Start-Up Checklist at the back of this publication.
INSULATION. The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit and provides a
record of unit condition, application requirements, system
information, and operation at initial start-up.

Do not attempt to start the air-conditioning system until the

following checks have been completed.
System Check
Fig. 49 — Return Gas Thermistor (RGT) Mounting 1. Check all system components for proper operation, in-
cluding the air-handling equipment. Consult manufactur-
Outputs — In addition to the capacity staging outputs of er’s instructions. If the unit has field-installed accessories,
the compressor or digital compressor (if equipped) and the out- be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Re-
door fan staging for head pressure control, several external and fer to unit wiring diagrams.
optional outputs are used for status signals and unit refrigerant
control. 2. Open liquid line and suction line service valves.
ALARM RELAY — The 38AP ComfortLink units have a re- 3. Check tightness of all electrical connections.
mote alarm relay feature that allows for remote annunciation of 4. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glasses. An
a unit alarm. For Alert and Alarm definitions, see the Alarms acceptable oil level in the compressor is from 1/8 to 3/8 of
and Alerts section on page 162. A field-installed relay, ALMR, sight glass. Adjust the oil level as required. No oil should
must be installed and connected between LVT-1 and LVT-2. be removed unless the crankcase heater has been ener-
For alarm relay specifications see the appropriate machine con- gized for at least 24 hours. See the Oil Charge section on
trol type wiring diagrams. page 147 for Carrier-approved oils.
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVES — The 38AP units 5. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.
have the ability to control a number of liquid line solenoids de- 6. Crankcase heaters must be firmly attached to compres-
pending on the unit size. See Table 10. sors, and must be on for 24 hours prior to start-up.
Table 10 — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve 7. Fan motors are 3-phase. Check rotation of fans during
Connections first start-up check. See Condenser Fans section on
page 150 for proper rotation direction.
LIQUID LINE
UNIT CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE COMMENTS Evacuation and Dehydration — For evacuation
CONNECTIONS and dehydration procedures, refer to the unit installation in-
A A1 LVT-25, 2 structions.
38APD025-060
B B1 LVT-24, 2
A1 LVT-25, 2
A Separate
A2 CXB-J6-5, 6 Power Supply
Required
38APD070-130
B1 LVT-24, 2
B Separate
B2 CXB-J6-7, 6 Power Supply
Required
A1 LVT-25, 2
38APS025-050 A
A2 LVT-24, 2
B1 LVT-25, 2
38APS065 B
B2 LVT-24, 2

40
 START-UP Table 11 — Preliminary Puron Refrigerant (R-410A)
Charge, lb (kg)
IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up, 38AP UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B
review Start-Up Checklist at the back of this publication. 38APS025 24 (10.9) —
The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit and provides a 38APD025 12 (5.6) 12 (5.6)
record of unit condition, application requirements, system 38APS027 26 (11.6) —
information, and operation at initial start-up. 38APD027 13 (6.0) 13 (6.0)
38APS030 29 (12.9) —
38APD030 14 (6.5) 14 (6.5)
CAUTION 38APS040 39 (17.7) —
38APD040 21 (9.5) 17 (7.8)
Crankcase heaters on all units are wired into the control cir- 38APS050 48 (21.5) —
cuit, so they are always operable as long as the main power 38APD050 22 (9.9) 26 (11.6)
supply disconnect is on (closed), even if any safety device 38APD060 27 (12.1) 29 (12.9)
is open. Compressor heaters must be on for 24 hours prior 38APS065 — 55 (25.0)
to the start-up of any compressor. Equipment damage 38APD070 29 (12.9) 33 (15.1)
could result if heaters are not energized for at least 24 hours 38APD080 29 (12.9) 46 (20.7)
prior to compressor start-up. 38APD090 39 (17.7) 46 (20.7)
38APD100 46 (20.7) 46 (20.7)
Compressor crankcase heaters must be on for 24 hours be-
38APD115 46 (20.7) 55 (25.0)
fore start-up. To energize the crankcase heaters, close the field
38APD130 46 (20.7) 71 (32.3)
disconnect and turn on the fan circuit breakers. Leave the com-
pressor circuit breakers off/open. The crankcase heaters are NOTES:
1. Preliminary charge is based on 25 ft (7.6 m) of interconnecting liquid line
now energized. piping between indoor and outdoor units.
2. For liquid line piping longer than 25 ft (7.6 m), use the following
Preliminary Charge — Refer to GTAC II (General information:
Training Air Conditioning), Module 5, Charging, Recovery, 1/ in. (12.7 mm) liquid line — 0.6 lb per 10 linear ft (0.27 kg per 3 m)
2
5/ in. (15.9 mm) liquid line — 1.0 lb per 10 linear ft (0.45 kg per 3 m)
Recycling, and Reclamation for charging procedures. Using 8
7/ in. (22.2 mm) liquid line — 2.0 lb per 10 linear ft (0.91 kg per 3 m)
8
the liquid charging method and charging by weight procedure, 11/8 in. (28.6 mm) liquid line — 3.5 lb per 10 linear ft (1.59 kg per 3 m)
13/8 in. (34.9 mm) liquid line — 5.1 lb per 10 linear ft (2.32 kg per 3 m)
charge each circuit with the amount of Puron® refrigerant
(R-410A) listed in Table 11. This table is based on 25 ft (7.6 m)
of liquid line and does not include the indoor coil refrigerant
charge which must be added to the preliminary charge amount. IMPORTANT: For proper charging, units equipped
For liquid lines longer than 25 ft (7.6 m), additional charge is with a digital compressor must have the digital com-
required and can be found in the notes section of the table. pressor operation disabled to maintain stable operation.
To disable digital compressor operation, set Configura-
Adjust Refrigerant Charge tion UNIT A1.TY (Compressor A1 Digital?) to
NO. Be sure to re-enable the digital operation after
CAUTION charging operation is complete.
Never charge liquid into the low pressure side of system. Due to the compact design of microchannel heat exchang-
Do not overcharge. During charging or removal of refriger- ers, refrigerant charge is reduced significantly. As a result,
ant, be sure indoor fan system is operating. Failure to com- charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate
ply could result in personal injury or equipment damage. measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small
increments. Using cooling charging charts provided, add or
CAUTION remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As
conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove
Charging procedures for MCHX (microchannel heat charge in 1/4 lb. (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure
exchanger) units require very accurate measurement tech- that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using
niques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using charging charts. If the unit is equipped with a digital compres-
cooling charging charts provided, add or remove refriger- sor, disable the digital operation while charging the machine to
ant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get maintain stable operation. To disable the digital compressor
close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in operation, set ConfigurationUNITA1.TY (Compressor
1/ lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all A1 Digital?) to NO. Be sure to re-enable the digital operation
4
fans are on and all compressors are running when using after charging operation is complete. If charging at low out-
charging charts (Fig. 50-76). Failure to comply may result door ambient, the condenser coil can be partially blocked in
in equipment damage. order to increase head pressure.
NOTE: Do not use recycled refrigerant as it may contain
contaminants.

41
 With all fans operating and all compressors on the circuit
being serviced operating at full capacity, adjust the refrigerant CAUTION
charge in accordance with the unit charging charts in Fig. 50-
76. It is recommended that the full load superheat be between
Never charge liquid into the low pressure side of system.
15 and 20 F (8.3 and 11.1 C), measured entering the compres-
sors downstream of the accumulator. To use the Charging Do not overcharge. During charging or removal of refriger-
Chart, measure refrigerant pressure at the liquid line service ant, be sure indoor fan system is operating. Failure to com-
ply could result in personal injury or equipment damage.
valve, making sure a Schrader depressor is used. Also, measure
liquid line temperature as close to the liquid service valve as If the sight glass is cloudy, check refrigerant charge again.
possible. Compare the readings to those measured with the See Fig. 77 and Fig. 78 for proper locations of filter driers, so-
curve for the appropriate Saturated Suction Temperature, lenoid valves, sight glasses and TXVs. Ensure all fans and
available on the scrolling marquee display, Tempera- compressors on the circuit being serviced are operating. Also
turesCIR.ASST.A or Temperatures CIR.B SST.B. ensure maximum allowable liquid lift has not been exceeded. If
Add or remove charge until the pressure and temperature con- the sight glass is cloudy, a restriction could exist in the liquid
ditions of the charging chart curve are met. If liquid pressure line. Check for a plugged filter drier or partially open solenoid
and temperature point fall above curve, add charge. If liquid valve. Replace or repair, as needed.
pressure and temperature point fall below curve, reduce the After full load charging is complete, check the circuit super-
charge until the conditions match the curve.
heat entering the compressors downstream of the accumulator
NOTE: Indoor-air cfm must be within normal operating range at part load conditions to ensure that superheat is greater than
of unit. 5° F (2.8° C). If superheat is less than 5° F (2.8° C), further
Trim refrigerant charge into compressor low-side service field action to increase the superheat is required to prevent nui-
port located on the suction service valve using the liquid con- sance alarms and potential compressor failures.
nection of the refrigerant cylinder and a liquid charging adapter Once charging is complete, if the digital compressor was
to vaporize the refrigerant before it enters the system. disabled, re-enable the digital operation.

Circuit A or B
130
50 SST
40 SST
QUID TEMPERATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

QUID TEMPERATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80
LIQUID

LIQUID

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

a38-7169 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 50 — Charging Chart — 38APD025, 50/60 Hz

42
 Single Circuit
130
50 SST
40 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE
30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7170 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 51 — Charging Chart — 38APS025, 50/60 Hz

Circuit A or B
130
50 SST
40 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7171

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 52 — Charging Chart — 38APD027, 50/60 Hz

43
 Single Circuit
130
50 SST
40 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7172

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 53 — Charging Chart — 38APS027, 50/60 Hz
Circuit A or B
130
50 SST
40 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7173 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 54 — Charging Chart — 38APD030, 50/60 Hz

44
 Single Circuit
130
50 SST
40 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

a38-7174
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 55 — Charging Chart — 38APS030, 50/60 Hz
Circuit A
130
50 SST

40 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7175
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 56 — Charging Chart — 38APD040 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

45
 Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7176 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 57 — Charging Chart — 38APD040 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

Single Circuit
130.0
50 SST
40 SST
RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

30 SST
RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120.0

ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110.0

40
100.0

90.0
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80.0

20 70.0

60.0
200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0 550.0 600.0
a38-7177 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 58 — Charging Chart — 38APS040, 50/60 Hz

46
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120

ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
a38-7178 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 59 — Charging Chart — 38APD050 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
a38-7179 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 60 — Charging Chart — 38APD050 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

47
 Single Circuit
130
50 SST
40 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 30 SST

ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7180
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 61 — Charging Chart — 38APS050, 50/60 Hz

Circuit A
130.0
50 SST

40 SST
RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120.0
30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110.0

40
100.0

90.0
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80.0

20 70.0

60.0
200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0 550.0 600.0
a38-7181 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 62 — Charging Chart — 38APD060 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

48
 Circuit B
130.0
50 SST
40 SST

RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

RATURE AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120.0 30 SST

ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110.0

40
100.0

90.0
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE
80.0

20 70.0

60.0
200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0 550.0 600.0
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7182

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 63 — Charging Chart — 38APD060 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz
Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7190

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 64 — Charging Chart — 38APS065 — Single Circuit, 50/60 Hz

49
 Circuit A
130

50 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120 40 SST
30 SST
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE
110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7183
LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 65 — Charging Chart — 38APD070 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz
Circuit B
130
50 SST

40 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
30 SST

ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80
REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

a38-7184
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 66 — Charging Chart — 38APD070 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

50
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
a38-7185 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 67 — Charging Chart — 38APD080 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz
Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
a38-7186 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LEGEND
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 68 — Charging Chart — 38APD080 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

51
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

a38-7187 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 69 — Charging Chart — 38APD090 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7188 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb(0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 70 — Charging Chart — 38APD090 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

52
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7189
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 71 — Charging Chart — 38APD100 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7190 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 72 — Charging Chart — 38APD100 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

53
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7189 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.
Fig. 73 — Charging Chart — 38APD115 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7190 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 74 — Charging Chart — 38APD115 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

54
 Circuit A
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)
a38-7189
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
LEGEND
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 75 — Charging Chart — 38APD130 — Circuit A, 50/60 Hz

Circuit B
130
50 SST
40 SST
30 SST
E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG C)

E AT LIQUID VALVE (DEG F)

50 120
ADD CHARGE IF ABOVE CURVE

110

40
100

90
LIQUID TEMPERATURE

LIQUID TEMPERATURE

30

80 REDUCE CHARGE IF BELOW CURVE

20 70

60
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
a38-7190 LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (PSIG)

LEGEND 1500 4000

2000 2500 3000 3500
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
LIQUID PRESSURE AT LIQUID VALVE (kPag)
NOTE: Charging procedures for MCHX units require very accurate measurement techniques. Charge should be added in small increments. Using cooling
charging charts provided, add or remove refrigerant until conditions of the chart are met. As conditions get close to the point on the chart, add or remove charge in
1/4 lb (0.11 kg) increments until complete. Ensure that all fans are on and all compressors are running when using charging charts.

Fig. 76 — Charging Chart — 38APD130 — Circuit B, 50/60 Hz

55
 a38-7117 †

LEGEND
LLS — Liquid Line Solenoid
TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve
*Field-supplied.
†Field-supplied when required. Must be controlled by 38AP unit control.
Fig. 77 — Required Location of Solenoid Valves and Recommended Filter Drier and
Sight Glass Locations for 38APD025-130 Dual-Circuit Units

a38-7118

SECTION 1

LIQUID
LINE
SECTION 2

SOLENOID VALVE†

SECTION 1

LIQUID
LINE
SECTION 2
SOLENOID VALVE†

*Field-supplied.
†Field-supplied when required. Must be controlled by 38AP unit control.
Fig. 78 — Required Location of Solenoid Valves and Recommended Filter Drier and
Sight Glass Locations for 38APS025-050,065 Single-Circuit Units

56
Check Compressor Oil Level — After adjusting the Adjust Oil Charge — Although the compressors are
refrigerant charge, allow each circuit to run fully loaded for factory charged with oil, additional oil is likely required to
20 minutes. Stop the compressors and check the oil level. Oil maintain the oil level in the compressor. Tables 12-15 indicate
level should be 1/8 to 3/8 up on the sight glass. the likely amount required based on the liquid line size and
system piping length. Additional lubricant estimate is based on
IMPORTANT: Oil level should only be checked when the using recommended pipe sizes. Values listed are estimates
compressors are off. only. See Adding Oil section on page 147 for Carrier-approved
oils. After operating the compressor for a period of time, the
Add oil only if necessary to bring the oil into view in the oil level should be between 1/8 and 3/8 of the oil sight glass.
sight glass. If oil is added, run the circuit for an additional The compressor oil level should be checked with the compres-
10 minutes, then stop and check oil level. If the level remains sor off to avoid the sump turbulence when the compressor is
low, check the piping system for proper design for oil return; running. Oil must be added if the oil level does not meet the
also, check the system for leaks. If checking the oil level with requirements.
unit running in part load, let unit run one hour, then run at full
load for 10 minutes. If oil does not return to acceptable sight
glass levels, check for correct suction piping and line sizing.
Table 12 — 38AP 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (English)
ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (FLUID OUNCES) ESTIMATE FOR PIPING LENGTH AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT
UP to 25 ft 25 to 50 ft 50 to 75 ft 75 to 100 ft 100 to 125 ft 125 to 150 ft 150 to 175 ft 175 to 200 ft
A 0 0 0 7 8 8 9 10
38APD025
B 0 0 0 7 8 8 9 10
38APS025 Single 10 12 17 19 22 24 26 29
A 0 0 6 7 8 9 9 10
38APD027
B 0 0 6 7 8 9 9 10
38APS027 Single 11 16 18 20 23 25 27 29
A 0 0 7 7 8 9 16 17
38APD030
B 0 0 7 7 8 9 16 17
38APS030 Single 12 17 19 21 24 26 28 44
A 9 11 12 18 20 23 25 27
38APD040
B 0 9 10 12 19 21 23 26
38APS040 Single 23 30 33 37 40 57 63 69
A 9 11 16 19 21 23 25 28
38APD050
B 11 16 18 20 23 25 27 29
38APS050 Single 29 35 39 51 57 63 68 74
A 11 16 18 21 23 25 28 30
38APD060
B 12 17 19 21 24 26 28 44
38APS065 Single 33 44 50 56 61 67 73 102
A 12 17 19 21 24 26 28 44
38APD070
B 20 26 30 33 36 40 59 65
A 12 17 19 21 24 26 28 44
38APD080
B 28 34 38 50 56 62 67 73
A 23 30 33 37 40 57 63 69
38APD090
B 28 34 38 50 56 62 67 73
A 29 35 39 51 57 63 68 74
38APD100
B 28 34 38 50 56 62 67 73
A 28 34 38 50 56 62 67 73
38APD115
B 33 44 50 56 61 67 73 102
A 28 34 38 50 56 62 67 73
38APD130
B 43 54 60 65 71 94 103 112

57
 Table 13 — 38AP 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (SI)
ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (mL) ESTIMATE FOR PIPING LENGTH AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT
UP to 7.5 m 7.5 to 15 m 15 to 22.5 m 22.5 to 30 m 30 to 37.5 m 37.5 to 45 m 45 to 52.5 m 52.5 to 60 m
A 0 0 0 200 223 246 270 293
38APD025
B 0 0 0 200 223 246 270 293
38APS025 Single 298 364 501 569 637 704 772 840
A 0 0 185 209 232 255 278 302
38APD027
B 0 0 185 209 232 255 278 302
38APS027 Single 323 459 526 594 661 729 797 864
A 0 0 194 217 241 264 463 511
38APD030
B 0 0 194 217 241 264 463 511
38APS030 Single 361 496 563 631 699 766 834 1283
A 261 326 359 532 599 667 735 802
38APD040
B 0 277 309 342 550 617 685 752
38APS040 Single 693 886 983 1079 1176 1681 1846 2011
A 274 339 476 544 612 679 747 815
38APD050
B 323 459 526 594 661 729 797 864
38APS050 Single 852 1046 1142 1511 1676 1841 2006 2170
A 336 471 539 606 674 742 809 877
38APD060
B 361 496 563 631 699 766 834 1283
38APS065 Single 977 1306 1471 1636 1801 1965 2130 2984
A 361 496 563 631 699 766 834 1283
38APD070
B 586 779 876 973 1069 1166 1739 1904
A 361 496 563 631 699 766 834 1283
38APD080
B 817 1010 1107 1476 1641 1805 1970 2135
A 693 886 983 1079 1176 1681 1846 2011
38APD090
B 817 1010 1107 1476 1641 1805 1970 2135
A 852 1046 1142 1511 1676 1841 2006 2170
38APD100
B 817 1010 1107 1476 1641 1805 1970 2135
A 817 1010 1107 1476 1641 1805 1970 2135
38APD115
B 977 1306 1471 1636 1801 1965 2130 2984
A 817 1010 1107 1476 1641 1805 1970 2135
38APD130
B 1261 1590 1755 1920 2085 2767 3017 3268

Table 14 — 38AP 50 Hz Additional Lubricant (English)

ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (FLUID OUNCES) ESTIMATE FOR PIPING LENGTH AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT
UP to 25 ft 25 to 50 ft 50 to 75 ft 75 to 100 ft 100 to 125 ft 125 to 150 ft 150 to 175 ft 175 to 200 ft
A 0 0 0 7 8 8 9 10
38APD025
B 0 0 0 7 8 8 9 10
38APS025 Single 10 12 13 15 22 24 26 29
A 0 0 6 7 8 9 9 10
38APD027
B 0 0 6 7 8 9 9 10
38APS027 Single 11 13 14 20 23 25 27 29
A 0 0 7 7 8 9 10 11
38APD030
B 0 0 7 7 8 9 10 11
38APS030 Single 12 14 19 21 24 26 28 31
A 9 11 12 13 14 16 25 27
38APD040
B 0 9 10 12 13 14 23 26
38APS040 Single 23 30 33 37 40 43 47 50
A 9 11 13 14 21 23 25 28
38APD050
B 11 13 14 20 23 25 27 29
38APS050 Single 29 35 39 42 45 63 68 74
A 11 14 15 21 23 25 28 30
38APD060
B 12 14 19 21 24 26 28 31
38APS065 Single 33 40 43 56 61 67 73 102
A 12 14 19 21 24 26 28 31
38APD070
B 20 26 30 33 36 40 43 46
A 12 14 19 21 24 26 28 31
38APD080
B 28 34 38 41 56 62 67 73
A 23 30 33 37 40 43 47 50
38APD090
B 28 34 38 41 44 62 67 73
A 29 35 39 42 45 63 68 74
38APD100
B 28 34 38 41 44 62 67 73
A 28 34 38 41 44 62 67 73
38APD115
B 33 40 43 56 61 67 73 78
A 28 34 38 41 44 62 67 73
38APD130
B 43 54 60 65 71 77 82 112

58
 Table 15 — 38AP 50 Hz Additional Lubricant (SI)
ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (mL) ESTIMATE FOR PIPING LENGTH AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT
UP to 7.5 m 7.5 to 15 m 15 to 22.5 m 22.5 to 30 m 30 to 37.5 m 37.5 to 45 m 45 to 52.5 m 52.5 to 60 m
A 0 0 0 200 223 246 270 293
38APD025
B 0 0 0 200 223 246 270 293
38APS025 Single 298 364 396 429 637 704 772 840
A 0 0 185 209 232 255 278 302
38APD027
B 0 0 185 209 232 255 278 302
38APS027 Single 323 388 421 594 661 729 797 864
A 0 0 194 217 241 264 287 311
38APD030
B 0 0 194 217 241 264 287 311
38APS030 Single 361 426 563 631 699 766 834 902
A 261 326 359 391 424 457 735 802
38APD040
B 0 277 309 342 374 407 685 752
38APS040 Single 693 886 983 1079 1176 1272 1369 1466
A 274 339 371 404 612 679 747 815
38APD050
B 323 388 421 594 661 729 797 864
38APS050 Single 852 1046 1142 1239 1336 1841 2006 2170
A 336 401 433 606 674 742 809 877
38APD060
B 361 426 563 631 699 766 834 902
38APS065 Single 977 1170 1267 1636 1801 1965 2130 2984
A 361 426 563 631 699 766 834 902
38APD070
B 586 779 876 973 1069 1166 1262 1359
A 361 426 563 631 699 766 834 902
38APD080
B 817 1010 1107 1203 1641 1805 1970 2135
A 693 886 983 1079 1176 1272 1369 1466
38APD090
B 817 1010 1107 1203 1300 1805 1970 2135
A 852 1046 1142 1239 1336 1841 2006 2170
38APD100
B 817 1010 1107 1203 1300 1805 1970 2135
A 817 1010 1107 1203 1300 1805 1970 2135
38APD115
B 977 1170 1267 1636 1801 1965 2130 2295
A 817 1010 1107 1203 1300 1805 1970 2135
38APD130
B 1261 1590 1755 1920 2085 2249 2414 3268

OPERATION TIME/DATE BROADCAST — The 38AP unit controls have

the ability to broadcast the time and date on the network. If the
Time, Day, and Date — Many features of the 38AP CCN Time/Date Broadcast configuration Configura-
controls require that the time, day and date be properly set. tionBCSTT.D.BC=ON, the control will send the time and
This is especially helpful when troubleshooting alarms, as they date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this device is on a
are reported with a time and date stamp. ComfortLink controls CCN network, it is important to make sure that only one
also have the ability to automatically adjust for daylight sav- device on the bus has this configuration set to ON. If more
ings time, when configured. The unit time and date is set at the than one time broadcaster is present, problems with the time
factory based in the Eastern Time Zone. will occur. If the unit is installed on a network, another unit
To set the time, Time ClockTIMEHH.MM (Hour and must be configured to be Broadcast Acknowledger, Configu-
Minute) is the item. The time clock is programmed in a 24- rationBCSTBC.AK. Only one unit can be the Broadcast
hour format, 00.00 to 23.59. See Table 16. Acknowledger. See Table 18 for required configurations.
To set the month, Time ClockDATEMNTH (Month) DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME — The 38AP controls have
is the item. This item follows the standard convention, 1=Janu- the ability to automatically adjust the time for daylight savings
ary, 2=February, etc. time. To utilize this feature, several items must be configured,
To set the day of the month, Time ClockDATEDOM including a start date and time to add as well as an end date.
(Day of Month) is the item. All items are found in the Daylight Saving Time sub-mode,
Time ClockDST and the Broadcast sub-mode, Configura-
To set the day of the week, Time ClockDATEDAY tionBCST. See Table 19 for required configurations.
(Day of Week) is the item. This item uses the following con-
vention: 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, etc. This set- NOTE: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform day-
ting is important if using the internal schedule. light savings time adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone,
the user may want to set ConfigurationBCSTT.D.BC to
To set the year, Time ClockDATEYEAR (Year of Cen- ON to accomplish the daylight savings function. To disable the
tury) is the item. This item follows the convention of a 4-digit daylight savings time feature, set T.D.BC to OFF.
year, such as 2014.
Table 17 lists the required configurations for these settings.

59
 Table 16 — Time Required Configuration
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
24-hour format
TIME HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Table 17 — Day and Date Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Range: 1-12
MNTH XX Month of Year (1=January, 2=February, etc.)
DOM XX Day of Month Range: 1-31
DATE
Range: 1-7
DAY X Day of Week (1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)
YEAR XXXX Year of Century
Table 18 — Broadcast Required Configurations
CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: Off
T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast Must be set to ON to enable automatic
Daylight Savings Time correction.*
BCST Default: Off
BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er One unit on the network must be set to
ON. The broadcast unit cannot be the
acknowledger.
*Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings
time adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone, the user may want
to set this to ON to accomplish the daylight savings function.
Table 19 — Daylight Savings Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Daylight Savings Start Month
STR.M XX Month Default: 4 (April)
Range: 1 to 12
(1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Daylight Savings Start Week
STR.W X Week Default: 1
Range: 1 to 5
Daylight Savings Start Day
Default: 7 (Sunday)
STR.D X Day Range: 1 to 7
(1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)
Default: 60
MIN.A XX Minutes to Add Range: 0 to 99
DST
Daylight Savings Stop Month
Default: 10 (October)
STP.M XX Month Range: 1 to 12
(1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Daylight Savings Stop Week
STP.W X Week Default: 5
Range: 1 to 5
Daylight Savings Stop Day
Default: 7 (Sunday)
STP.D X Day
Range: 1 to 7
(1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)
Default: 60
MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract
Range: 0 to 99
CONFIGURATION MODE
Default: Off
BCST T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast Must be set to ON to enable automatic
Daylight Savings Time correction.

Control Methods — This term refers to how the Enable or Remote Control position with external contacts
machine is started and stopped. Several control methods are closed will place the unit in an occupied state.
available to enable and disable the unit. Machine On/Off con- Under normal operation, the Control Mode (Run Sta-
trol is determined by the configuration of the Control Method, tusVIEWSTAT ) will be 1 (Off Local) when the switch is
ConfigurationOPT2CTRL. in the Off position or in the Remote Control position with ex-
ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL — With the control ternal contacts open, and will be 5 (On Local) when in the En-
method set to Enable-Off-Remote Contact, CTRL=0 (Switch) , able position or Remote Control position with external contacts
simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch to the closed. If the machine is ON, the Control Type Configura-
tionOPT2C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi) is used, and the space

60
temperature is satisfied, the Control Mode 9 (SPT Satisfied) automatically adjust the time for daylight savings time. See the
will be displayed. section Daylight Savings Time on page 59.
OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE — With the control method set If holidays are to be used, they must be configured. Thirty
to Occupancy, CTRL=2 (Occupancy), the Main Base Board holidays are provided as part of the local schedules, HD.01
will use the operating schedules as defined under the Time through HD.30. Each holiday requires a Holiday Month, Time
Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. If Time ClockHOL.LHD.xxMON (Holiday Start Month)
ClockSCH.N (Schedule Number) is set to 0, the unit will where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; the Holiday Start Day
remain in an occupied mode continuously. of Month, Time ClockHOL.LHD.xxDAY (Start Day)
In either case, and whether operating under a Local Sched- where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; and the Holiday Dura-
ule or under a CCN Schedule, under normal operation, Run tion, Time ClockHOL.LHD.xxLEN (Duration [Days])
StatusVIEWSTAT (Control Mode) will be 1 (Off Local) where “xx” is a number from 1 to 99. Holidays that do not oc-
when the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is Off or in Re- cur on fixed dates will require annual programming.
mote Control with the external contacts open. The control In the example shown in Table 20, the following holidays
mode will be 3 (Off Time) when the Enable/Off/Remote Con- are to be programmed: January 1 for one day, July 4 for one
trol switch is in Enable or Remote Control with external con- day, December 24 for two days.
tacts closed and the time of day is during an unoccupied period. Eight separate time periods, Period 1 through 8, are avail-
Similarly, the control mode will be 7 (On Time) when the time able as part of the local schedule. Each period has Monday
of day is during an occupied period. If the machine is ON, the through Sunday and a Holiday day flag, and occupied and un-
Control Type ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi) occupied times. For example, an occupied time from 6:00 AM
is used, and the space temperature is satisfied, Control Mode 9 to 8:00 PM is desired from Monday through Friday. For Satur-
(SPT Satisfied) will be displayed. day an occupied period from 6:00 AM to 12:00 Noon is de-
Local Schedule — Local Schedules are defined by schedule sired. On Sunday and holidays the unit is to remain unoccu-
numbers from 1 to 64. All of these schedules are identical. pied. This schedule is shown graphically in Fig. 79.
The schedule number (Time ClockSCH.N) must be set to a To program this schedule, Time ClockSCH.N (Schedule
number greater than 0 for local schedule. For unit operation, Number) must change from 0 to a number between 1 and 64.
the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the Enable In this example, the Schedule Number will be 1. Two of the
or Remote Control position with external contacts closed. eight time periods are required to create this schedule. See Ta-
For this option to function properly, the correct time, day ble 21.
and date must be set. See the section Time, Day, and Date on
page 59. The time clock is programmed in a 24-hour format,
00.00 to 23.59. If configured, the 38AP controls can
Table 20 — Holiday Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE SUB- ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SUBMODE
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0 to 12
(0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Example = 1
Default: 0
Range: 0-31
HD.01 DAY XX Start Day (0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN XX Duration (Days)
(0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0-12
(0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Example = 7
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 31
HOL.L HD.02 DAY XX Start Day (0=Not Used)
Example = 4
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN XX Duration (Days)
(0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0 to 12
(0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Example = 12
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 31
HD.03 DAY XX Start Day (0=Not Used)
Example = 24
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN XX Duration (Days)
(0=Not Used)
Example = 2

61
 Table 21 — Occupancy Schedule Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE SUB- ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SUBMODE
Default: 0
SCH.N XX Schedule Number XX Range: 0 to 99
Example = 1
Default: 00.00
OCC.1 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Example = 06.00
Default: 00.00
UNC.1 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00-23.59
Example = 20.00
Default: NO
MON.1 YES/NO Monday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday in Period Example = YES
WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday in Period Default: NO
PER.1 Example = YES
Default: NO
THU.1 YES/NO Thursday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
FRI.1 YES/NO Friday in Period Example = YES
SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday in Period
Example = NO
Default: NO
HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday in Period Example = NO
SCH.L
Default: 00.00
OCC.2 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00-23.59
Example = 06.00
Default: 00.00
UNC.2 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00-23.59
Example = 12.00
Default: NO
MON.2 YES/NO Monday in Period Example = NO
TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
PER.2 WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday in Period
Example = NO
Default: NO
THU.2 YES/NO Thursday in Period Example = NO
FRI.2 YES/NO Friday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday in Period Example = NO
HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO

62
 MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY HOLIDAY
12:00 AM

3:00 AM

6:00 AM

9:00 AM

12:00 PM

3:00 PM

6:00 PM

9:00 PM

12:00 AM

LEGEND
— Occupied

Fig. 79 — Example Schedule

CCN Global Schedule — Schedule Numbers, Time Clock Modes MODEMD06, Timed Override in Effect will be
SCH.N from 65 to 99 indicate operation under a CCN Global active. Override expires after each initiation.
Schedule. For unit operation based on a CCN Global Schedule, Timed Override from Scrolling Marquee/Navigator Device —
the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the Enable A timed override period can be initiated with the unit’s inter-
or Remote Control position with external contacts closed. face device. To initiate an override period from the unit’s inter-
In the example in Table 22, the CCN Global Schedule the face device, the number of hours requested must be set in Time
unit is to follow is 65. To set up the unit to follow this schedule, Clock OVROVR.T (Timed Override Hours). See
Time ClockSCH.N must be modified. Table 23.
Any unit can be the Global Schedule Broadcaster. When Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will re-
using a Global Broadcast Schedule, the schedule broadcaster sume an occupied period for the duration of the time pro-
must have the Global Schedule Broadcast, Configuration grammed. The number of hours in the override time period will
BCSTG.S.BC=ON and all other devices on the network be displayed in OVR.T and will count down as the time period
should have their Global Schedule Broadcast flag set to progresses. This value cannot be changed until the override pe-
ConfigurationBCSTG.S.BC=OFF. There can be only riod has expired or is cancelled. The override time period can
one broadcaster of a specific schedule. The unit set to be the be cancelled by changing the OVR.T value to 0. This can be
schedule broadcaster must have a schedule number from 65 to done at the unit’s interface device or through CCN communi-
99, and the Local Schedule configured as described above. It cations by writing to the point OVR_EXT.
will broadcast the internal time schedule once every 2 minutes.
Table 23 — Timed Override Required
Table 22 — CCN Global Schedule Required Configuration
Configuration
TIME CLOCK MODE
TIME CLOCK MODE ITEM
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
ITEM DESCRIPTION
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Timed Override Default: 0
OVR OVR.T X Hours Range: 0 to 4
Schedule Default: 0
SCH.N XX Range: 0 to 99
Number XX Example = 65 Timed Override from Space Temperature Sensor with Override
Button — A timed override period can be initiated using a
Timed Override — There are several ways to override the space temperature sensor with an override button from the
occupancy schedule to keep the unit in an occupied period. space.
Schedule overrides can be initiated at the unit’s interface with
NOTE: This feature requires a single space temperature sensor
either the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ device, from a connected to the unit. It does not function when used with
space temperature sensor equipped with a timed override but- averaging space temperature sensor arrays.
ton (see unit Installation Instructions for selection and wiring
information), or through CCN communications. Initiation of To configure this feature, Time ClockOVROVR.L
an override period can only be accomplished if the unit is in an (Override Time Limit) must be set to a non-zero value. This
unoccupied period. If Timed Override is in effect, Operating determines the maximum number of hours the override period
can extend an occupied period when the override button is

63
pushed. This item has a range of 0 to 4 hours and should be set Units controlled via communications by a separate third-
to the limit desired for the override period. See Table 24. party building automation system through a translator or UPC
Pressing the override button on the Space Temperature Sen- Open Controller must be set to CCN Control, CTRL=3. If the
sor will initiate an override period. The override button must unit is to be monitored only via communications, CTRL=3
be pressed for 2 to 4 seconds for the control to acknowledge the (CCN Control) is not required.
call. The control will ignore a momentary press of the override Emergency Stop — A controls feature exists to shut down the
button. However, if the override button is held for longer than 4 machine in the event of an emergency. Writing to the CCN
seconds, a Space Temperature Thermistor Failure alarm will be Point EMSTOP, the command “EMSTOP” will force the
generated. The number of hours in the override time period machine to stop all mechanical cooling immediately and shut
will be displayed in Time ClockOVROVR.T (Timed down. While this feature is enabled, the Control Mode Run
Override Hours) and will count down as the time period pro- StatusVIEWSTAT=4 (Emergency) will be displayed.
gresses. See Table 23. For the machine to operate normally, the EMSTOP point value
Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will re- should be “ENABLE.”
sume an occupied period for the duration of the time pro- Capacity Control — When mechanical cooling is
grammed. The number of hours in the override time period will required, the Main Base Board (MBB) can control the unit
be displayed in OVR.T and will count down as the time period capacity by staging compressors and controlling the digital
progresses. This value cannot be changed until the override pe- scroll compressor operation. The control also checks on vari-
riod has expired or is cancelled. The override time period can ous other operation parameters in the unit to make sure that
be cancelled by changing the OVR.T value to 0. This can be safeties are not exceeded and the compressors are reliably
done at the unit’s interface device or through CCN communi- operated.
cations by writing to the point OVR_EXT.
The ComfortLink control system offers two basic control
Table 24 — Space Temperature Override Required approaches to mechanical cooling: constant volume operation
Configuration for 2 stages of cooling, or variable air volume (VAV) operation
for multiple stages of cooling. In addition to these methods of
TIME CLOCK MODE control, the ComfortLink control offers the ability to run multi-
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY
ITEM
COMMENT ple stages of cooling from a space temperature sensor, thermo-
DESCRIPTION stat, return air temperature, or directly from a 4 to 20 mA sig-
OVR OVR.L X
Override Time Default: 0 nal. The Control Type (ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP) de-
LImit Range: 0 to 4
termines the selection of the type of cooling control as well as
Timed Override from CCN — A timed override period can be the method for selecting a cooling capacity input.
initiated through CCN communications by writing to the point C.TYP = 1 (VAV) — This configuration is the standard VAV
OVR_EXT. This point has a range of 0 to 4 hours and should operation. With this control type, the MBB capacity control
be set for the desired amount of time. routine stages compressor capacity to attempt to meet the cur-
The number of hours in the override time period will be dis- rent Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT).
played in Time ClockOVROVR.T (Timed Override Recommended Applications — This control scheme is rec-
Hours) and will count down as the time period progresses. See ommended for VAV applications with a single 38AP unit
Table 23. matched with a single air handler. It can be used for 38AP
Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will re- units with or without digital compressors; however, better tem-
sume an occupied period for the duration of the time pro- perature control will be achieved with the digital compressor
grammed. The number of hours in the override time period will option. Minimum Load Control is supported by this control
be displayed in OVR.T and will count down as the time period scheme. Minimum Load Control and digital compressor oper-
progresses. This value cannot be changed until the override pe- ation are not supported simultaneously.
riod has expired or is cancelled. The override time period can Hardware Requirements
be cancelled by changing the OVR.T value to 0. This can be
done at the unit’s interface device or through CCN communi- • supply air sensor
cations by writing to the point OVR_EXT. • return air sensor or mixed air sensor
CCN CONTROL — With the control method set to CCN In lieu of wiring sensors to the 38AP unit, both values can be
Control, CTRL=3 (CCN), an external CCN device controls the communicated via CCN to the 38AP. For information on
On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device forces the point broadcasting values, see the Thermistors section on page 28.
CHIL_S_S between Start/Stop to control the unit. The Return Air Thermistor (ConfigurationOPT1RAT.T)
and Supply Air Thermistor (ConfigurationOPT1SAT.T)
Under normal operation, Run StatusVIEWSTAT must be configured for either 0 (5,000 ) or 1 (10,000 ) type
(Control Mode) will be 1 (Off Local) when the Enable/Off/Re- sensors whether they are hard-wired or their values are com-
mote Control switch is in the Off position or in the Remote municated to the controller.
Control position with the remote external contacts open. With
the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch in the Enable position Required Configurations — Table 25 shows configurations
or in Remote Control position with the remote external con- required for proper operation.
tacts closed, the Control Mode will be 2 (Off CCN) when the Recommended Settings — CSP.1 should be set to the design
CHIL_S_S variable is “Stop.” Similarly, the control mode will supply air temperature (SAT).
be 6 (On CCN) when the CHIL_S_S variable is “Start.” If the Wiring — See Fig. 80.
machine is ON, Control Type ConfigurationOPT2
C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi) is used, and the space temperature is sat-
isfied, the Control Mode 9 (SPT Satisfied) will be displayed.

64
 38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1
3

4
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2
4-20 mA
DEMAND SIGNAL – 5
LIMIT GENERATOR
SIGNAL + 6

7
4-20 mA
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL – 8
RESET GENERATOR
SIGNAL 9
+ SAT (REQUIRED)
11

REMOTE ON/OFF
13

14

FS1
16

18

19
MAT/RAT (REQUIRED)
20 LLSV-B (38APD)
LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
24
LLSV-A
or LLSV-B (065)
25

FIELD-SUPPLIED
LEGEND (38APD070-130 ONLY)
TRANSFORMER
ALM R — Alarm Relay
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board (REQUIRED)
FS1 — Fan Status Switch
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage 24 VAC
(38APS040,050, 38APD070-130 only) SECONDARY
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage
(38APS065, 38APD only)
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage
(38APS065, 38APD070-130 only)
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal
MAT/RAT — Mixed Air Thermistor/Return Air Thermistor
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor CXB-J6
Factory Wiring LLSV-A2
Field Wiring RED 5 PNK
NOTES:
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes. 6
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay LLSV-B2
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV) 7 ORN
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not
to exceed 75 VA.
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC.
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must
be installed.
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required for Demand Limit functions, 4 to
20 mA, Demand Limit Step 1 and 2, or 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset.
8. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.

Fig. 80 — C.TYP=1 (VAV) Wiring

65
 Table 25 — C.TYP=1 (VAV) Required Configuration
CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
OPT1
Default: 0
Range: 0-2
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 4
OPT2 C.TYP X Machine Control Type Range: 1 to 9
Set Item to 1 (VAV)
SETPOINTS MODE
Range: 40.0 to 80.0 °F (4.4 to 26.7 °C)
COOL CSP.1 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 1
Default: 60.0 °F (15.6 °C)
LEGEND
RAT — Return Air Thermistor
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor
VAV — Variable Air Volume
Sequence of Operation — The MBB uses Cooling Setpoint 1 38APD Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
(SetpointsCOOLCSP.1) as the basis for the Active Set Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must
Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP). The Control Point (Run be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead circuit
StatusVIEWCTPT) is the Active Set Point (SETP) or is determined (see Lead/Lag Determination on page 112). The
Cooling Set Point 1 (CSP.1) adjusted for any temperature reset lead compressor will be determined and started (see Circuit
that is applied. See Temperature Reset on page 129 for addi- Compressor Staging on page 112). If the lead compressor is a
tional information. digital compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start
For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method fully loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between
(Configuration OPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the loaded and unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the
machine to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for addition- unit’s supply air temperature meets the Control Point (CTPT)
al information. as described in Supply Air Temperature Control on page 110.
If additional capacity requires the lag circuit to start, the lag
On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine circuit’s lead compressor will be determined and started.
will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configuration During operation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to
OPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off Time on maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on
page 128 for additional information. Liquid Line Solenoid page 117.
Valve operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid Valves
on page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors. For As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
specific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
Active on page 135. mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run Sta- initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
tusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Run Sta- started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
tusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 (Off Time) will turn off the compressor if needed.
or 4 (Off Emrgcy). SPT.M=3 (Cool On) exists when Control
Mode, STAT=5 (On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On Time). In As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status Switch opens, In- chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
putsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF, Control Mode (STAT) will Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
change to 8 (IDFS Not On); the unit will alarm and switch to 4 Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
(Off Emrgcy). Table 26 shows the space temperature control capacity.
mode response for C.TYP=1. 38APS Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must
Table 26 — Space Temperature Control Mode be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead com-
Response for C.TYP=1 (VAV) pressor will be determined and started. See Circuit Compressor
INDOOR Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a digital com-
FAN SPACE TEMPERATURE pressor and is enabled, the compressor will start fully loaded
CONTROL MODE
STAT
STATUS CONTROL MODE for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded and
CIR A SPT.M unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the unit’s capacity
ID.F.A
meets the Control Point (CTPT) as described in Supply Air
1 (Off Local) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) Temperature Control on page 110. During operation, the con-
2 (Off CCN) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) trols will stage the condenser fans to maintain head pressure.
3 (Off Time) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
5 (On Local) On 3 (Cool On) for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
6 (On CCN) On 3 (Cool On) circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
7 (On Time) On 3 (Cool On) routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
8 (IDFS Not On) Off 3 (Cool On) Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
9 (SPT Satisfied) Not Applicable and will turn off the compressor if needed.

66
 As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma- Required Configurations — Table 27 lists the configurations
chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the required for proper operation.
Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Recommended Settings — With this Control Type, CSP.2
Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of should be set to the design Supply Air Temperature. CSP.1
capacity. will depend on the application. The difference between the
C.TYP = 3 (TSTAT MULTI) — This configuration will default values for CSP.1 and CSP.2 is 5° F (2.8° C). In most
allow the MBB to monitor the thermostat inputs to make a cases, the default differential is acceptable, but the application
determination of supply air temperature. Unlike traditional may require a smaller or larger difference. For example, a face
2-stage thermostat control, the unit is allowed to perform VAV split coil may a larger differential. CSP.1 should be set to a
style operation using multiple stages of cooling capacity to value that allows the unit to operate without rapid cycling.
attempt to meet the current Control Point (Run Sta- CSP.1 should be greater than CSP.2 to allow the unit to
tusVIEWCTPT). produce a lower supply air temperature when Y2 is made, if
Recommended Applications — This control scheme is rec- the unit has the available capacity.
ommended for constant volume or 100% outdoor air applica- Wiring— See Fig. 81.
tions. It can be used with or without digital compressors. This Sequence of Operation — The MBB monitors the thermostat
control method is recommended for 38APD,APS025-030 units inputs to make a determination of Active Set Point (Run Sta-
with digital scroll option and 38APD,APS040-130 units with tusVIEWSETP). The control will vary the Active Set
two-stage thermostat control. Minimum Load Control is sup- Point based on Y1 and Y2 inputs. When Y1 is closed Cooling
ported by this control scheme. Minimum Load Control and Setpoint 1 (SetpointsCOOLCSP.1) will be used and when
digital compressor operation are not supported simultaneously. Y2 is closed Cooling Setpoint 2 (SetpointsCOOLCSP.2)
Hardware Requirements will be used as the basis for the Active Set Point, SETP. Ther-
• supply air sensor mostat inputs can be monitored at the unit’s interface device,
• return air sensor or mixed air sensor Y1Thermostat Input (InputsGEN.IY.1) and Y2 Thermo-
• 2-stage thermostat stat Input (InputsGEN.IY.2). With this type of control,
the MBB capacity control routine stages compressor capacity
This control scheme requires a supply air sensor and a return to attempt to meet the current Control Point (Run Sta-
air sensor or mixed air sensor. In lieu of wiring sensors to the tusVIEWCTPT). The Control Point (Run Sta-
38AP unit, both values can be communicated via CCN to the tusVIEWCTPT) is the Active Set Point (SETP) adjusted
38AP. For information on broadcasting values, see the section for any temperature reset that is applied. See Temperature
Thermistors on page 28. ConfigurationOPT1RAT.T Reset on page 129 for additional information.
(RAT Thermistor Type) and ConfigurationOPT1SAT.T
(SAT Thermistor Type) must be configured for either 0 (5 k) For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method (Con-
or 1 (10 k) type sensors whether they are hard wired or their figurationOPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the ma-
values are communicated to the controller. chine to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for additional
information.

Table 27 — C.TYP=3 (Tstat Multi) Required Configuration

CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Must be set for appropriate value:
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
OPT1
Default: 0
Range: 0-2
Must be set for appropriate value:
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 4
OPT2 C.TYP X Machine Control Type Range: 1 to 9
Set Item to 3 (Tstat Multi)
SETPOINTS MODE
Range: 40.0 to 80.0 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
Default: 60.0 F (15.6 C)
CSP.1 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 1
Set for desired Supply Air Temperature
with Y1 input.
COOL Range: 40.0 to 80.0 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
Default: 55.0 F (12.8 C)
CSP.2 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 2 Set for desired Supply Air Temperature
with Y2 input. Should be lower than
CSP.1

67
 38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1
DEMAND
LIMIT SIGNAL 3

4-20 mA
SIGNAL – DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2
4
GENERATOR
5
+
6
TEMPERATURE
RESET SIGNAL 7

4-20 mA
SIGNAL – 8
AHU GENERATOR
THERMOSTAT 9
(REQUIRED)
+
SAT (REQUIRED)

R 11

Y1 12
REMOTE ON/OFF
Y2 13

W1 14

W2 15
FS1
G 16

C
18
X
19
MAT/RAT (REQUIRED)
20 LLSV-B (38APD)
LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
24
LLSV-A
LEGEND or LLSV-B (065)
AHU — Air-Handling Unit 25
ALM R — Alarm Relay
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board
FS1 — Fan Status Switch
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage
FIELD-SUPPLIED
(38APS040,050, 38APD070-130 only) (38APD070-130 ONLY)
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage TRANSFORMER
(38APS065, 38APD only) (REQUIRED)
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage
(38APS065, 38APD070-130 only)
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal
MAT/RAT — Mixed Air Thermistor/Return Air Thermistor 24 VAC
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor SECONDARY
Factory Wiring
Field Wiring
NOTES:
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes.
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay CXB-J6
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV) LLSV-A2
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. RED 5 PNK
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field supplied control transformer is required, not
to exceed 75 VA. 6
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC. LLSV-B2
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must 7 ORN
be installed.
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required for Demand Limit functions, 4 to
20 mA, Demand Limit Step 1 and 2, or 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset.
8. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.

Fig. 81 — C.TYP=3 (Tstat Multi) Wiring

68
 On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configuration chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
OPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off Time on Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
page 128 for additional information. Liquid line solenoid valve Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid Valves on capacity.
page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors. For spe- 38APS Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
cific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must
Active on page 135. be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead com-
In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run Sta- pressor will be determined and started. See Circuit Compressor
tusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Control Mode Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a digital com-
Run StatusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 pressor and is enabled, the compressor will start fully loaded
(Off Time), 4 (Off Emrgcy), or 9 (SPT Satisfied). When the for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded and un-
Control Mode STAT=5 (On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On loaded. Compressors will be staged until the unit’s capacity
Time), SPT.M=1 (Lo Cool) if Y1 is closed, Inputs meets the Control Point (CTPT) as described in Supply Air
GEN.IY.1=ON or SPT.M=2 (High Cool) if Y2 is closed, Temperature Control on page 110. During operation, the con-
InputsGEN.IY.2=ON. If Y1 and Y2 are both open, trols will stage the condenser fans to maintain head pressure.
Y.1=OFF and Y.2=OFF, STAT=9 (SPT Satisfied) and See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
SPT.M=0 (Off Cool) will be displayed. In this Control Type, if As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
the Indoor Fan Status Switch opens (InputsGEN.I for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
ID.F.A=OFF), Control Mode (STAT) will change to 8 (IDFS circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
Not On) as long as there is no call for cooling, Y.1=OFF and routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
Y.2=OFF. If there is a call for cooling, Y.1=ON or Y.2=ON the Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
unit will alarm and STAT switch to 4 (Off Emrgcy). Table 28 and will turn off the compressor if needed.
shows the space temperature control mode response for
C.TYP=3. As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
Table 28 — Space Temperature Control Mode Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
Response for C.TYP=3 Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
capacity.
SPACE
INDOOR TEMPER- C.TYP = 4 (TSTAT 2 STG) — This configuration allows
Y1 Y2 FAN the MBB to monitor the thermostat inputs to make capacity
CONTROL STATUS STATUS STATUS ATURE
MODE STAT
Y.1 Y.2 CIR A
CONTROL stage decisions. If Y1 input is closed, no more than 50% of the
MODE circuit capacity will be energized. If Y2 is closed, 100% of the
ID.F.A
SPT.M
circuit capacity will be energized for that circuit and air han-
1 (Off Local) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
dler. Y1 closure is not required for 100% capacity.
2 (Off CCN) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
3 (Off Time) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
Recommended Applications — This control type is recom-
mended for constant volume, non-digital compressor applica-
4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
tions with units with less than 3 stages of compression. It is not
On Off On 1 (Lo Cool) recommended for units with more than two stages of capacity.
5 (On Local)
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
This control scheme cannot be used with:
On Off On 1 (Lo Cool)
6 (On CCN)
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool) • Units with digital compressors. Digital operation is not
On Off On 1 (Lo Cool)
supported with this control scheme.
7 (On Time) • Minimum Load Control is not supported with this con-
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
trol scheme.
8
(IDFS Not On)
Off or On Off or On Off 0 (Cool Off) Hardware Requirements
9
Off Off On 0 (Cool Off) • 2-stage thermostat
(SPT Satisfied)
Required Configurations — Table 29 lists the configurations
38APD — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status Cir A, required for proper operation.
(InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must be Wiring — See Fig. 82.
closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead circuit is
determined. See Lead/Lag Determination on page 112. The
lead compressor will be determined and started. See Circuit Table 29 — C.TYP=4 (Tstat 2 Stg) Required
Compressor Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a Configuration
digital compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start ful-
ly loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between load- CONFIGURATION MODE
ed and unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the unit’s SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY
ITEM
COMMENT
capacity meets the Control Point (CTPT) as described in Sup- DESCRIPTION
ply Air Temperature Control on page 110. If additional capaci- Default: 4
ty requires the lag circuit to start, the lag circuit’s lead compres- OPT2 C.TYP X
Machine Con- Range: 1 to 9
trol Type Set item to 4
sor will be determined and started. During operation, the con- (Tstat 2 Stg)
trols will stage the condenser fans to maintain head pressure.
See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
will turn off the compressor if needed.

69
 38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1
3

AHU 4
THERMOSTAT DEMAND DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2
LIMIT SIGNAL
(REQUIRED) 5
4-20 mA
R SIGNAL – 6
GENERATOR
Y1 + 7

Y2 8

W1
12
W2 REMOTE ON/OFF
13
G
14
C
15
X FS1
16

18 LLSV-B (38APD)
LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
LEGEND 24
AHU — Air-Handling Unit
ALM R — Alarm Relay LLSV-A
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board or LLSV-B (065)
FS1 — Fan Status Switch 25
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage
(38APS040,050, 38APD070-130 only)
— Liquid
Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage
LLSV-B
(38APS065, 38APD only)
LLSV-B2 — (38APS065,Solenoid,
Liquid Line Circuit B, Second Stage FIELD-SUPPLIED
38APD070-130 only) (38APD070-130 ONLY)
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal TRANSFORMER
Factory Wiring (REQUIRED)
Field Wiring
NOTES: 24 VAC
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes.
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay SECONDARY
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV)
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not
to exceed 75 VA. CXB-J6
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC. LLSV-A2
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must
be installed. RED 5 PNK
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required for Demand Limit functions, 4 to
20 mA, Demand Limit Step 1 and 2, or 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset.
8. This control scheme is valid for 38APD,APS025, 027 and 030. It is not recom- 6
mended for units with more than 2 compressors, 38APD040-130 and 38APS040- LLSV-B2
065. 7 ORN
9. This control scheme does not support digital compressor operation.
10. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.

Fig. 82 — C.TYP=4 (Tstat 2 Stg) Wiring

70
Sequence of Operation — The MBB monitors the thermostat intervals until the unit’s capacity is as close as possible to 50%
inputs to make a determination of capacity stage. When Y1 without exceeding it. If additional capacity requires the lag cir-
closes, no more than 50% of the unit’s capacity will be ener- cuit to start, the lag circuit’s lead compressor will be deter-
gized. When Y2 closes, the remaining capacity will be ener- mined. The lag circuit solenoid valve will be energized. When
gized. Thermostat inputs can be monitored at the unit’s inter- the Y2 contact is closed, the remaining capacity will be started,
face device: Y1 Thermostat Input (InputsGEN.IY.1) and staging compressors at 60-second intervals. During operation,
Y2 Thermostat Input (InputsGEN.IY.2). the controls will stage the condenser fans to maintain head
For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method, (Con- pressure. See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
figurationOPT2CTRL), and inputs must allow the ma- As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
chine to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for additional tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
information. mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configura- initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
tionOPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
Time on page 128 for additional information. Liquid line sole- will turn off the compressor if needed.
noid valve operation is described in Liquid Line Solenoid As the capacity requirement begins to decrease and the Y2
Valves on page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compres- contact opens, the machine controls will reduce the unit’s ca-
sors. For specific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - pacity by removing compressors. The first compressor will
Time Guard Active on page 135. turn off between 30 and 60 seconds following the loss of the
In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run Sta- Y2 signal. The remaining compressors will turn off in 90-sec-
tusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Run Sta- ond intervals until the unit is as close as possible to 50% capac-
tusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 (Off ity without exceeding it. Finally, as the Y1 contact opens, the
Time), or 4 (Off Emrgcy). When the Control Mode STAT=5 remaining capacity is removed immediately.
(On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On Time), SPT.M=1 (Lo Cool) 38APS Units — On a call for cooling, Y1 closure, Indoor Fan
if Y1 is closed, InputsGEN.IY.1=ON, SPT.M=2 (High Status Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The
Cool) if Y2 is closed, InputsGEN.IY.2=ON, or SPT.M=0 switch must be closed before the capacity routine will start.
(Off Cool) if Y1 and Y2 are both open, Y.1=OFF and The solenoid is opened 30 seconds after the Y1 closure. The
Y.2=OFF. With this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status lead compressor will be determined and is started 20 seconds
Switch opens (InputsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF), STAT will later. See Circuit Compressor Staging on page 112. Compres-
change to 8 (IDFS Not On), the unit will remain with SPT.M=0 sors will be staged at 70-second intervals until the unit’s capac-
(Off Cool) if Y1 and Y2 are both open, Y.1=OFF and ity is as close as possible to 50% without exceeding it. When
Y.2=OFF. If Y1 or Y2 close, Y.1=ON or Y.2=ON, the unit the Y2 contact is closed, the remaining capacity will be started,
Control Mode will change from STAT=8 (IDFS Not On), to 4 staging compressors at 70-second intervals. During operation,
(Off Emrgcy) as an alarm is generated. Table 30 shows the the controls will stage the condenser fans to maintain head
space temperature control mode response for C.TYP=4. pressure. See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
Table 30 — Space Temperature Control Mode As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
Response for C.TYP=4 for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
INDOOR SPACE routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
Y1 Y2 FAN
TEMPER- Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
CONTROL ATURE and will turn off the compressor if needed.
STATUS STATUS STATUS
MODE STAT Y.1 Y.2 CIR A CONTROL
ID.F.A
MODE As the capacity requirement begins to decrease and the Y2
SPT.M contact opens, the machine controls will reduce the unit’s ca-
1 (Off Local) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool) pacity by removing compressors. The first compressor will
2 (Off CCN) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool) turn off between 30 and 60 seconds following the loss of the
3 (Off Time) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool) Y2 signal. The remaining compressors will turn off in 90-sec-
4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool) ond intervals until the unit is as close as possible to 50% capac-
Off Off Off or On 0 (Off Cool) ity without exceeding it. Finally, as the Y1 contact opens, the
5 (On Local) On Off On 1 (Lo Cool) remaining capacity is removed immediately.
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool) C.TYP = 5 (SPT MULTI) — This configuration will allow
Off Off Off or On 0 (Off Cool) the MBB to monitor the space temperature sensor and compare
6 (On CCN) On Off On 1 (Lo Cool) it to the Space Temperature Set Point (SetpointsCOOL
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
SPS.P) to make a capacity determination. The unit is allowed
to use multiple stages of cooling control and perform VAV-
Off Off On 0 (Off Cool)
style operation in an attempt to meet the current Control Point
7 (On Time) On Off Off or On 1 (Lo Cool) (Run StatusVIEWCTPT).
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
The Control Point is the Active Set Point (Run Status
8
(IDFS Not On) Off or On Off or On Off 0 (Cool Off) VIEWSETP), either Cooling Setpoint 1 (Setpoints
9
COOLCSP.1) or Cooling Set Point 2 (Setpoints
(SPT Satisfied)
Not Applicable COOLCSP.2) depending on the difference between the
Space Temperature (Run StatusVIEWSPT) and SPS.P,
38APD Units — On a call for cooling, Y1 closure, Indoor Fan adjusted for any temperature reset that is applied. See Tempera-
Status Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The ture Reset on page 129 for information on Temperature Reset.
switch must be closed before the capacity routine will start. Additionally, with an appropriate space temperature sensor,
The lead circuit is determined. See Lead/Lag Determination a space temperature offset can be applied to the space tempera-
on page 112. The lead compressor will be determined and start-
ture as sensed in the conditioned space. This offset adjusts the
ed. See Circuit Compressor Staging on page 112. The solenoid actual space temperature reading being sent to the 38AP con-
corresponding to the lead compressor circuit is opened 30 sec- trols, thereby changing the system’s response.
onds after the Y1 closure. The lead compressor is started 20
seconds later. Compressors will be staged at 70-second

71
Recommended Applications — This control scheme is rec- If a T56 or T59 space temperature offset sensor is in-
ommended for constant volume applications and is compatible stalled, it is possible to configure the range of the slider by ad-
with both standard and digital compressor operation. Minimum justing this range configuration, Space Temperature Offset
Load Control is supported by this control scheme; however, Range (ConfigurationOPT1SP.O.R). The range for this
Minimum Load Control and digital compressor operation can- item is 1 to 10° F (0.6 to 5.6° C); the factory default is 5° F
not be supported simultaneously. (2.8° C). With the slider in the neutral position, no offset
Hardware Requirements is applied.
• space temperature sensor Required Configurations — Table 31 lists the configurations
• return/mixed air sensor required for proper operation.
• supply air sensor Recommended Settings — With this Control Type, CSP.2
This control scheme requires a supply air sensor and a re- should be set to the design Supply Air Temperature. CSP.1 will
turn air sensor or mixed air sensor. In lieu of wiring sensors to depend on the application. The difference between the default
the 38AP unit, both values can be communicated via CCN to values for CSP.1 and CSP.2 is 5° F (2.8° C). In most cases, the
the 38AP unit. For information on broadcasting values, see default differential is acceptable, but the application may
Thermistors on page 28. The Supply Air Thermistor (Configu- require a smaller or larger difference. For example, a face split
rationOPT1SAT.T) and Return Air Thermistor (Configu- coil may require a larger differential. CSP.1 should be set to a
rationOPT1RAT.T) must be configured for either 0 (5 value that allows the unit to operate without rapid cycling.
k) or 1 (10 k) type sensors, whether they are hard wired or CSP.1 should be greater than CSP.2 to allow the unit to pro-
their values are communicated to the controller. duce a lower supply air temperature when a call for High Cool
is made, if the unit has the available capacity.
A space temperature sensor must be installed (T55, T56 or
T59) and enabled (ConfigurationOPT1SPT.S). If a T56 Space Temperature Cool Set Point (SPS.P) should be the
or T59 sensor with space temperature offset is installed with desired room temperature.
the space temperature offset slider, it must be enabled Wiring — See Fig. 83.
(ConfigurationOPT1SP.O.S) to affect the unit control.

Table 31 — C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi) Required Configuration

CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: DSBL
Set to ENBL. Cannot be enabled until
SPT.S ENBL/DSBL Space Temp Sensor
C.TYP=5. If C.TYP=5, this item is auto-
matically enabled.
Default: DSBL
SPT.O.S ENBL/DSB Space Temp Offset Set to ENBL if T56 Thermostat is
Enable installed and temperature offset is to be
used.

SPT.O.R* XX ΔF (ΔC)
Space Temp Offset Range: 1 to 10 ΔF (0.6 to 5.6 ΔC)
Range Default: 5 ΔF (2.8 ΔC)
OPT1 Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Must be set for appropriate value:
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type 0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Must be set for appropriate value:
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type 0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 4
OPT2 C.TYP X Machine Control Type Range: 1 to 9
Set Item to 5 (SPT Multi)
SETPOINTS MODE
CSP.1 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 1 Default: 60.0 F (15.6 C)
Range: 40.0 to 80.0 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
Default: 55.0 F (12.8 C)
CSP.2 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 2
Range: 40.0 to 80.0 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
Default: 78.0 F (25.6 C)
SPS.P XX.X Space T Cool Setpoint Range: 65.0 to 80.0 F (18.3 to 26.7 C)
COOL
L.C.ON X Lo Cool On Setpoint Default: 1 F (0.6 C)
–1 to 2 F (–0.6 to 1.1 C)
Default: 3 F (1.7 C)
H.C.ON Hi Cool On Setpoint
0.5 to 20 F (0.3 to 11.1 C)
Default: 0.5 F (0.3 C)
L.C.OF Lo Cool Off Setpoint 0.5 to 2 F (0.3 to 1.1 C)
*If equipped.

72
 38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1
DEMAND 3
LIMIT SIGNAL

4-20 mA 4
SIGNAL – DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2
GENERATOR 5
+
6
TEMPERATURE
RESET SIGNAL 7

4-20 mA
SIGNAL – 8
GENERATOR
9
+
SAT (REQUIRED)
11

REMOTE ON/OFF
13

14

FS1
16

18

19
MAT/RAT (REQUIRED)
20
SPT (REQUIRED)
21

22
SA
LLSV-B (38APD)
23 LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
LEGEND 24
ALM R — Alarm Relay LLSV-A
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board or LLSV-B (065)
FS1 — Fan Status Switch 25
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage
(38APS040,050, 38APD070-130 only)
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage
(38APS065, 38APD only)
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage FIELD-SUPPLIED
(38APD070-130 ONLY)
(38APS065, 38APD070-130 only) TRANSFORMER
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal (REQUIRED)
MAT/RAT — Mixed Air Thermistor/Return Air Thermistor
SA — Set Point Adjustment
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor 24 VAC
SPT — Space Temperature Thermistor
Factory Wiring SECONDARY
Field Wiring
NOTES:
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes.
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay CXB-J6
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. LLSV-A2
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV)
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. RED 5 PNK
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not 6
to exceed 75 VA. LLSV-B2
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC.
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must 7 ORN
be installed.
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required for Demand Limit functions, 4 to
20 mA, Demand Limit Step 1 and 2, or 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset.
8. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.

Fig. 83 — C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi) Wiring

73
Sequence of Operation — The MBB monitors the space tem- which time the Control Point will change to CSP.1. CSP.1 will
perature input together with the unit configurations to make a remain the Control Point until the Space Temperature falls be-
determination of Control Point Run StatusVIEWCTPT. low SPS.P + L.C.ON – L.C.OF. Space Temperature Control
The control will call for a low cool set point, Setpoints Mode, SPT.M will indicate 0 (Cool Off).
COOLCSP.1 (Cooling Setpoint 1) or high cool set point The following example illustrates this control scheme.
SetpointsCOOLCSP.2 (Cooling Setpoint 2) depending on Given:
the difference between the Space Temperature (Run Status
VIEWSPT) and the space temperature set point (Set- SPS.P = 72 F,
pointsCOOLSPS.P). CSP.1 should be greater than CSP.2. L.C.ON = 1,
CSP.1 or CSP.2 will be used as the basis for the Active Set H.C.ON = 3,
Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) based on the configura- L.C.OF = 2 F,
tion settings, Low Cool On Set Point (Setpoints
COOLL.C.ON), High Cool On Set Point (Set- CSP.1 = 60 F,
pointsCOOLH.C.ON), and Low Cool Off Set Point (Set- CSP.2 = 55 F
pointsCOOLL.C.OF) to determine the control point. If Space Temperature equals 73 F (SPS.P + L.C.ON [Low
If the Space Temperature rises above the SPS.P + L.C.ON, Cool On]) cooling will begin and the Control Point equals 60 F
the system will start with CSP.1 as the Control Point. Space (CSP.1). As long as Space Temperature does not exceed the
Temperature Control Mode (Run StatusVIEWSPT.M) High Cool On setting (SPS.P + L.C.ON + H.C.ON), CSP.1
will indicate 1 (Lo Cool). As long as the Space Temperature will remain the Control Point until the Space Temperature falls
does not rise above SPS.P + L.C.ON + H.C.ON, the unit will below 71 F (SPS.P + L.C.ON – L.C.OF [Low Cool Off])
continue to supply conditioned air with CSP.1 as the Control when mechanical cooling will cease.
Point until the Space Temperature falls below SPS.P + L.C.ON If space temperature rises above 76 F (SPS.P + L.C.ON +
– L.C.OF. If the Space Temperature falls below SPS.P + H.C.ON [High Cool On]), control point set point changes to
L.C.ON – L.C.OF, mechanical cooling will cease. Space Tem- 55 F (CSP.2). CSP.2 will remain the Control Point until the
perature Control Mode, SPT.M will indicate 0 (Cool Off). If Space Temperature falls below 72 F (SPS.P + L.C.ON –
the Space Temperature rises above SPS.P + L.C.ON + L.C.OF/2 [High Cool Off]), control point transitions back to
H.C.ON, the unit will change the Control Point to CSP.2. 60 F (CSP.1). If space continues to fall below 71 F (SPS.P +
Space Temperature Control Mode, SPT.M will indicate 2 (Hi L.C.ON – L.C.OF [Low Cool Off]), the unit is shut off.
Cool). CSP.2 will remain the Control Point until the Space
Temperature falls below SPS.P + L.C.ON – (L.C.OF/2) at Figure 84 summarizes this example.

SPS.P
L.C.ON H.C.ON
High Cool Off High Cool On

CSP.2

L.C.OF/2
L.C.ON
Low Cool Off Low Cool On

CSP.1

L.C.OF

°F 68.0 69.0 70.0 71.0 72.0 73.0 74.0 75.0 76.0 77.0

Fig. 84 — C-TYP=5, Space Temperature Control Example

74
 For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method (Con- Compressor Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a
figurationOPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the ma- digital compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start
chine to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for additional fully loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between
information. loaded and unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the
On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine unit’s supply air temperature meets the Control Point (CTPT)
will remain off until Minutes Off Time Configuration as described in Supply Air Temperature Control on page 110.
OPT2DELY timer has expired. See Minutes Off Time on If additional capacity requires the lag circuit to start, the lag
page 128 for additional information. Liquid Line Solenoid circuit’s lead compressor will be determined and started.
Valve operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid Valves During operation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to
on page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors. For maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on
specific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard page 117.
Active on page 135. As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
StatusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Run mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
StatusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 (Off pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
Time), or 4 (Off Emrgcy). When the Control Mode, STAT=5 initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
(On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On Time), SPT.M=1 (Lo Cool) started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
if Y1 is closed (InputsGEN.IY.1=ON), SPT.M=2 High will turn off the compressor if needed.
Cool if Y2 is closed (InputsGEN.IY.2=ON), or SPT.M=0 As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
(Off Cool) if Y1 and Y2 are both open, Y.1=OFF and chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
Y.2=OFF. With this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
Switch opens, InputsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF, STAT will Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
change to 8 (IDFS Not On), the unit will remain with SPT.M=0 capacity.
(Off Cool) if Y1 and Y2 are both open, Y.1=OFF and 38APS — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status Cir A
Y.2=OFF. If Y1 or Y2 close, Y.1=ON or Y.2=ON the unit Con- (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must be
trol Mode will change from STAT=8 (IDFS Not On), to 4 (Off closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead compres-
Emrgcy) as an alarm is generated. Table 32 shows the space sor will be determined and started. See Circuit Compressor
temperature control mode response for C.TYP=5. Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a digital com-
Table 32 — Space Temperature Control Mode pressor and is enabled, the compressor will start fully loaded
Response for C.TYP=5 for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded and
unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the unit’s supply
INDOOR
SPACE air temperature meets the Control Point (CTPT) as described
SPACE FAN
TEMPER- in Supply Air Temperature Control on page 110. During oper-
CONTROL TEMPERATURE STATUS ATURE ation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to maintain
MODE STAT CONTROL
SPT CIR A MODE head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
ID.F.A
SPT.M As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
1 (Off Local) Not Applicable Off or On 0 (Off Cool) for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
2 (Off CCN) Not Applicable Off or On 0 (Off Cool) circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
3 (Off Time) Not Applicable Off or On 0 (Off Cool) routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
4 (Off Emrgcy) Not Applicable Off or On 0 (Off Cool) Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
SPS.P + LC.ON – and will turn off the compressor if needed.
L.C.OF < SPT < On 1 (Lo Cool)* As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
SPS.P + LC.ON
5 (On Local) chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
SPS.P + L.C.OF/2 < Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
SPT < SPS.P + On 2 (Hi Cool)*
L.C.ON + H.C.ON Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
SPS.P + LC.ON – capacity. The liquid line solenoid valve is de-energized 5 sec-
L.C.OF < SPT < On 1 (Lo Cool)* onds after the circuit stops.
SPS.P + LC.ON C.TYP = 7 (PCT CAP) — This configuration will allow the
6 (On CCN)
SPS.P + L.C.OF/2 < main base board (MBB) to monitor the 4-20 mA cooling
SPT < SPS.P +
L.C.ON + H.C.ON
On 2 (Hi Cool)*
demand signal Inputs4-20CL.MA input to the energy
SPS.P + LC.ON –
management module and translate this into desired percent
L.C.OF < SPT < On 1 (Lo Cool)* capacity for the unit.
7 (On Time)
SPS.P + LC.ON Recommended Applications — This configuration is com-
SPS.P+L.C.OF/2 < patible with both standard and digital compressors. This appli-
SPT < SPS.P + On 2 (Hi Cool)* cation is intended for direct capacity control by a third-party
L.C.ON + H.C.ON
control system. All safeties remain in effect (minimum run
8
(IDFS Not On)
Not Applicable Off 0 (Cool Off)* time, time guard, low saturated suction, high condensing tem-
9 < SPS.P + LC.ON –
perature, low superheat, etc.).
On 0 (Cool Off)*
(SPT Satisfied) L.C.OF Hardware Requirements — The following hardware is
*There is built-in overlap of the High Cool and Low Cool Operation. required:
Actual Space Temperature Control Mode depends on the direction • energy management module
of space temperature change (positive or negative) and its starting • 4 to 20 mA generator
point.
Required Configurations — Table 33 lists the configurations
required for proper operation.
38APD Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must Wiring — See Fig. 85.
be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead circuit
is determined. See Lead/Lag Determination on page 112. The
lead compressor will be determined and started. See Circuit

75
 Table 33 — C.TYP=7 (Pct Cap) Required Configuration
CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None*
OPT1
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None*
Default: 4
OPT2 C.TYP X Machine Control Type Range: 1 to 9
Set Item to 7 (Pct Cap)
*Although return air and supply air thermistors are not required, they
can be configured. If they are not installed, the values for RAT.T and
SAT.T must be set to 2.

38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2

REQUESTED 4-20 mA
CAPACITY SIGNAL – 8
GENERATOR
SIGNAL
(REQUIRED) + 10

SAT (OPTIONAL)
11

REMOTE ON/OFF
13

14

FS1
16

18

19
MAT/RAT (OPTIONAL)
20
LLSV-B (38APD)
LEGEND LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
ALM R — Alarm Relay
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board 24
FS1 — Fan Status Switch LLSV-A
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage or LLSV-B (065)
(38APS040,050, 38APD070-130 only) 25
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage
(38APS065, 38APD only)
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage
(38APS065, 38APD070-130 only)
FIELD-SUPPLIED
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal (38APD070-130 ONLY)
MAT/RAT — Mixed Air Thermistor/Return Air Thermistor TRANSFORMER
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor (REQUIRED)
Factory Wiring
Field Wiring 24 VAC
NOTES: SECONDARY
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes.
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV)
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. CXB-J6
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 LLSV-A2
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not RED 5 PNK
to exceed 75 VA.
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC. 6
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must LLSV-B2
be installed. 7 ORN
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required.
8. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.
A38-7281

Fig. 85 — C.TYP=7 (Pct Cap) Wiring

76
Sequence of Operation — Capacity control is determined by For specific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time
the signal provided by the Building Management System. The Guard Active on page 135.
field-supplied 4 to 20 mA signal is converted to a linear scale In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run
for percent capacity vs. 4 to 20 mA input as shown in Fig. 86. StatusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Run
StatusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 (Off
Time) or 4 (Off Emrgcy). SPT.M=3 (Cool On) as long as
100

90
Control Mode, STAT=5 (On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On
PERCENT CAPACITY

80
Time). In this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status Switch
70
opens (InputsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF), Control Mode
60
(STAT) will change to 8 (IDFS Not On) as long as there is no
50
call for cooling (CL.MA < 4 mA). If there is a call for cooling
40
(CL.MA > 4 mA), the unit will alarm and STAT switch to 4
30
(Off Emrgcy). Table 34 shows the space temperature control
20
mode response for C.TYP=7.
10

0 Table 34 — Space Temperature Control Mode

2 5 10 15 20 22 Response for C.TYP=7
mA SIGNAL INDOOR FAN SPACE TEMPER-
CONTROL MODE
Fig. 86 — Percent Capacity vs. 4 to 20 mA Signal STAT STATUS CIR A ATURE CONTROL MODE
ID.F.A SPT.M
1 (Off Local) Off or On 0 (Cool Off)
While using this control method, the control algorithm
sending the 4 to 20 mA signal must be properly tuned to avoid 2 (Off CCN) Off or On 0 (Cool Off)
rapid cycling or hunting. The machine controls will select the 3 (Off Time) Off or On 0 (Cool Off)
capacity stage with the least amount of error relative to the 4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On 0 (Cool Off)
Building Management System’s requested percent capacity. 5 (On Local) On 3 (Cool On)
This may result in a capacity stage greater than the requested 6 (On CCN) On 3 (Cool On)
percent capacity. Circuit loading methods are illustrated in 7 (On Time) On 3 (Cool On)
Fig. 87-139. 8 (IDFS Not On) Off 3 (Cool On)
If the unit has a digital compressor and the Building Man- 9 (SPT Satisfied) Not Applicable
agement System is requesting a capacity percentage less than
the capacity that the first compressor can provide, the MBB 38APD Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
waits until the error between the requested capacity and the Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must
unit’s capacity with the first compressor is less than the re- be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead circuit
quested capacity and zero percent capacity before the control is determined. See Lead/Lag Determination on page 112. The
will start the digital compressor. lead compressor will be determined and started. See Circuit
Compressor Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a
Error is calculated by the following formula: digital compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start ful-
([% Capacity – Requested % Capacity]/Requested Percent ly loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between load-
Capacity) x 100 ed and unloaded.
The unit will stage compressors every 90 seconds to meet
For simplicity to illustrate this point, the 38APD030 is used. the requested capacity. With every change in capacity that oc-
This unit uses two compressors of the same capacity. In order curs, a 90-second time delay is initiated and the capacity stage
to get the digital compressor to start, the requested percent ca- is held during this time delay. If the capacity change is a change
pacity signal must be above 8 mA corresponding to 25% ca- of the digital compressor only, the compressor will be modulat-
pacity. At 8 mA, the error between 0% and 25% is the same as ed to the requested capacity without moving in increments.
the error between 25% and 50% (the compressor’s percent ca- For example, if the requested capacity requires a change to the
pacity contribution is the same). Once the signal exceeds the compressor unload time from 8 to 2 seconds, that change will
8 mA value, the first compressor is allowed to start. See occur without the intermediate steps of 7, 6, 5, 4, and 3 sec-
Fig. 88. The digital compressor will start and operate at full ca- onds. If additional capacity requires the lag circuit to start, the
pacity for 90 seconds before reducing the compressor capacity lag circuit’s lead compressor will be determined and started.
to meet the 25% unit capacity (8 mA) request. During operation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to
The digital compressor will run at full capacity for 90 sec- maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on
onds before adjusting the capacity to the requested stage, for oil page 117.
return. Following the 90-second period the control will begin As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
to duty cycle the digital compressor to better match the load. tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
Once the digital compressor reaches full load, the control will mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
begin adding or subtracting compressors every 90 seconds to pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
reach the desired capacity stage. If the 4 to 20 mA signal is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
lost, the MBB will reduce the capacity stage to 0, and generate started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
an alarm. will turn off the compressor if needed.
For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method (Config- As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
urationOPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the machine chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity in response to the
to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for additional infor- requested capacity signal. If the unit is equipped with Mini-
mation. mum Load Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its
On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine last stage of capacity.
will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configura-
tionOPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off
Time on page 128 for additional information. Liquid Line So-
lenoid Valve operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid
Valves on page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors.

77
38APS Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status seconds. During operation, the controls will stage the condens-
Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must er fans to maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control
be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead com- on page 117.
pressor will be determined and started. See Circuit Compressor As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a digital com- for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
pressor and is enabled, the compressor will start fully loaded circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded and un- routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
loaded. Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
The unit will stage compressors every 90 seconds to meet and will turn off the compressor if needed.
the requested capacity. With every change in capacity that oc- As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
curs, a 90-second time delay is initiated and the capacity stage chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity in response to the
is held during this time delay. If the capacity change is a change requested capacity signal. If the unit is equipped with Mini-
of the digital compressor only, the compressor will be modulat- mum Load Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its
ed to the requested capacity without moving in increments. last stage of capacity.
For example, if the requested capacity requires a change to the
compressor unload time from 8 to 2 seconds, that change will See Fig. 87-139 for capacity loading, C.TYP=7.
occur without the intermediate steps of 7, 6, 5, 4, and 3

a38-7347

Fig. 87 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD,APS025-030, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A or B (38APD Only) Leads

78
 a38-7348

Fig. 88 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD,APS025-030, Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A (38APD Only) Leads

a38-7349

Fig. 89 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

79
 a38-7350

Fig. 90 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7351

Fig. 91 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

80
 a38-7352

Fig. 92 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7353

Fig. 93 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

81
 a38-7354

Fig. 94 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD040, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7355

Fig. 95 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

82
 A38-7356

Fig. 96 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7357

Fig. 97 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

83
 a38-7358

Fig. 98 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7359

Fig. 99 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

84
 a38-7360

Fig. 100 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD050, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7361

Fig. 101 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

85
 38AP-7362

Fig. 102 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7363

Fig. 103 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

86
 a38-7364

Fig. 104 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7365

Fig. 105 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

87
 a38-7366

Fig. 106 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD060, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7367

Fig. 107 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

88
 a38-7368

Fig. 108 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7369

Fig. 109 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

89
 A38-7370

Fig. 110 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7371

Fig. 111 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

90
 a38-7372

Fig. 112 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD070, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

A38-7373

Fig. 113 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD080, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

91
 a38-7374

Fig. 114 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD080, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7375

Fig. 115 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD080, Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

92
 a38-7376

Fig. 116 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD080, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7377

Fig. 117 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD080, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

93
 a38-7378

Fig. 118 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7379

Fig. 119 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

94
 a38-7380

Fig. 120 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7381

Fig. 121 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

95
 a38-7382

Fig. 122 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7383

Fig. 123 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD090, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

96
 a38-7384

Fig. 124 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD100, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A or B Leads

a38-7385

Fig. 125 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD100, Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

97
 A38-7386

Fig. 126 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7387

Fig. 127 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

98
 a38-7388

Fig. 128 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7389

Fig. 129 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

99
 a38-7390

Fig. 130 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7391

Fig. 131 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD115, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

100
 A38-7392

Fig. 132 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7393

Fig. 133 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

101
 a38-7394

Fig. 134 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

a38-7395

Fig. 135 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

102
 a38-7396

Fig. 136 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Non-Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit B Leads

a38-7397

Fig. 137 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APD130, Digital, Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

103
 a38-7398

Fig. 138 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APS040-065, Non-Digital, Equal (Default) or Staged Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads (38APS040-050), Circuit B Leads (38APS065)

a38-7399

Fig. 139 — Capacity Loading, C.TYP=7

38APS040-050, Digital, Equal (Default) Circuit Loading,
Circuit A Leads

104
C.TYP = 8 (DUAL TSTAT) — This configuration allows for On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine
the connection and control of a single 38APD unit to two sepa- will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configuration
rate air handlers. The configuration allows the MBB to monitor OPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off Time on
the thermostat inputs from each of two separate thermostats to page 128 for additional information. Liquid Line Solenoid
make a determination of mode and capacity for each circuit of Valve operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid Valves
the 38APD unit. With this control scheme, Thermostat T1, Y1 on page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors. For
and Y2 contacts operate circuit A. Thermostat T2, Y3 and Y4 specific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard
contacts operate circuit B. Active on page 135.
Recommended Applications — This control method is rec- In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run
ommended for 38APD dual-circuit units with two separate air StatusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Control
handlers connected, one to each circuit. Ideally, the 38APD Mode Run StatusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off
unit should have no more than 2 compressors in the circuit. CCN), 3 (Off Time), or 4 (Off Emrgcy). When the Control
Units with more compressors in the circuit may not provide ad- Mode, STAT=5 (On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On Time),
equate control due to the large capacity steps. SPT.M=1 (Lo Cool) if Y1 InputsGEN.IY.1=ON or Y3
This control scheme cannot be used with: Inputs GEN.IY.3=ON is closed. SPT.M=2 (High Cool)
if Y2 InputsGEN.IY.2=ON, or Y4 InputsGEN.I
• Units with digital compressors. Digital operation is not Y.4=ON is closed. SPT.M=0 (Off Cool) if Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4
supported with this control scheme. are all open, Y.1=OFF, Y.2=OFF, Y.3=OFF and Y.4=OFF.
• Minimum Load Control, which is not supported with this With this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status Switch for cir-
control scheme cuit A or B opens, InputsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF or In-
• Single or 2-Step Demand Limit, which are not supported putsGEN.I ID.F.B=OFF, STAT will change to 8 (IDFS
with this control scheme Not On), the unit will remain with SPT.M=0 (Off Cool) if Y1,
• 38APS units Y2, Y3 and Y4 are all open, Y.1=OFF, Y.2=OFF, Y.3=OFF
Hardware Requirements and Y.4=OFF. If Y1, Y2, Y3 or Y4 close, Y.1=ON, Y.2=ON,
• energy management module Y.3=ON or Y.4=ON, Control Mode will change from STAT=8
• 2 two-stage thermostats, one for each air handler (IDFS Not On), to 4 (Off Emrgcy) as an alarm is generated. Ta-
• 4 SPST relays for thermostat input. If Minimum Load ble 36 shows the space temperature control mode response for
Control will be used, install DPDT Relays in place of the C.TYP=8.
SPST Relays. 38APD Units — On a circuit B call for cooling, Y1 closure,
With this configuration, Single or 2-Step Demand Limit is Indoor Fan Status Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is
not available as the inputs for this option are used by the second checked. On a circuit B call for cooling, Y3 closure, Indoor
thermostat. If Demand Limit is required, 4 to 20 mA or De- Fan Status Cir B (InputsGEN.IID.F.B) is checked. The
mand Limit through CCN communications is available. circuit fan status switch must be closed before the capacity rou-
Required Configurations — Table 35 lists the configurations tine will start for the circuit. The lead compressor of the circuit
will be determined and started. See Circuit Compressor Stag-
required for proper operation. ing on page 112. The solenoid corresponding to the circuit is
Table 35 — C.TYP=8 (Dual Tstat) Required opened 30 seconds after the Y1 or Y3 closure. The lead com-
Configuration pressor is started 20 seconds later. Compressors will be staged
at 70-second intervals until the unit’s capacity is as close as
CONFIGURATION MODE possible to 50% without exceeding it. When the Y2 or Y4 con-
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY
ITEM
COMMENT tact is closed, the remaining capacity will be started, staging
DESCRIPTION compressors at 60-second intervals. During operation, the con-
Default: 4 trols will stage the condenser fans to maintain head pressure.
Machine Con- Range: 1 to 9 See Head Pressure Control on page 117.
OPT2 C.TYP X
trol Type Set Item to 8
(Dual Stat) As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
Wiring — See Fig. 140. mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
Sequence of Operation — The MBB monitors the thermostat pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
inputs to make a determination of circuit capacity stage. If Y1 initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
or Y3 input is closed, no more than 50% of the circuit capacity started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
will be energized. If Y2 or Y4 is closed, 100% of the circuit ca- will turn off the compressor if needed.
pacity will be energized for that circuit, if available. Y1 or Y3 As the capacity requirement begins to decrease and the Y2
closure is not required for 100% capacity. Thermostat inputs or Y4 contact opens, the machine controls will reduce the
for circuit A can be monitored at the unit’s scrolling marquee,
unit’s capacity by removing compressors. The first compressor
InputsGEN.IY.1 (Y1 Thermostat Input) and Inputs will turn off between 30 and 60 seconds following the loss of
GEN.IY.2 (Y2 Thermostat Input). Thermostat inputs for cir- the Y2 or Y4 signal. The remaining compressors will turn off
cuit B can be monitored at the unit’s scrolling marquee, In-
in 90-second intervals until the unit is as close to 50% capacity
putsGEN.IY.3 (Y3 Thermostat Input) and Inputs without exceeding it. Finally, as the Y1 or Y3 contact opens,
GEN.IY.4 (Y4 Thermostat Input). the remaining capacity is removed immediately.
For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method
(ConfigurationOPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the
machine to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for addition-
al information.

105
 FIELD-SUPPLIED
TRANSFORMER 38AP LVT
(REQUIRED) TERMINAL STRIP
AHU1 (CIRCUIT A)
THERMOSTAT 1 ALM
24 VAC (REQUIRED) R
SECONDARY
2
R T2-Y1
T1- 3
Y1
Y1 DEMAND
(REQUIRED) LIMIT 4
Y2 T2-Y2
T1- SIGNAL
Y2 5
W1 4-20 mA
(REQUIRED) –
SIGNAL 6
W2 GENERATOR
+ 7
G
8
C
T1-Y1
X 12
REMOTE ON/OFF
AHU2 (CIRCUIT B) 13
THERMOSTAT
(REQUIRED) 14
T1-Y2
R 15
T2- FS1
Y1 Y1 16
(REQUIRED) FS2
Y2
T2- 17
Y2
W1 (REQUIRED) 18

W2 LLSV-B
24
G
LLSV-A
C 25

LEGEND
AHU — Air-Handling Unit
ALM R — Alarm Relay FIELD-SUPPLIED
(38APD070-130 ONLY)
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board TRANSFORMER
FS1 — Fan Status Switch, AHU1 (REQUIRED)
FS2 — Fan Status Switch, AHU2
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage (38APD070-130 only) 24 VAC
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage (38APD070-130 only) SECONDARY
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal
T1 — AHU1 Thermostat
T2 — AHU2 Thermostat
——— Factory Wiring
--------- Field Wiring CXB-J6
LLSV-A2
NOTES:
1. AHU1 is connected to 38APD — Circuit A. RED 5 PNK
AHU2 is connected to 38APD — Circuit B.
2. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes. 6
3. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay LLSV-B2
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
4. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV)
7 ORN
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required.
5. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not
to exceed 75 VA.
6. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC.
7. Installation of fan status switches (FS1, FS2) is recommended. If not used, a
jumper must be installed.
8. Energy management module (EMM) is required.
9. This control scheme does not support digital compressor operation.
10. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.
11. Single or 2-Step Demand Limit is not available with this control type.

Fig. 140 — C.TYP=8 (Dual Tstat) Wiring

106
 Table 36 — Space Temperature Control Mode Response for C.TYP=8
Y1 STATUS Y2 STATUS INDOOR FAN STATUS CIR A
Y.1 Y.2 ID.F.A SPACE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL MODE STAT AND/OR AND/OR AND/OR CONTROL MODE
Y3 STATUS Y4 STATUS INDOOR FAN STATUS CIR B SPT.M
Y.3 Y.4 ID.F.B
1 (Off Local) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
2 (Off CCN) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
3 (Off Time) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On Off or On Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
Off Off Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
5 (On Local) On Off On 1 (Lo Cool)
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
Off Off Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
6 (On CCN) On Off On 1 (Lo Cool)
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
Off Off Off or On 0 (Off Cool)
7 (On Time) On Off On 1 (Lo Cool)
Off or On On On 2 (Hi Cool)
8 (IDFS Not On) Off or On Off or On Off 0 (Off Cool)
9 (SPT Satisfied) Not Applicable
C.TYP = 9 (VAV SETPOINT) — With this configuration, the Wiring — See Fig. 141.
38AP unit operates as a VAV unit and controls unit capacity in Sequence of Operation — The 4-20 mA Cooling Set Point
an attempt to meet a field-supplied 4 to 20 mA supply air tem- (Inputs4-20CL.MA) is translated into a desired active set
perature request, by staging compressors to attempt to meet the point ranging from 40 to 80 F (4.4 to 26.7 C). The control
current Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT). A field- translates the input linearly with 4 mA equal to 40 F (4.4 C)
supplied 4 to 20 mA signal determines the Active Setpoint, and 20 mA equal to 80 F (26.7 C) as the basis for the Active
(Run StatusVIEWSETP). The Control Point is the Ac- Set Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP). With the loss of the
tive Setpoint Run StatusVIEWSETP adjusted for any field-supplied signal, the Active Setpoint will change to Cool-
temperature reset that is applied. See Temperature Reset on ing Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1). See Fig. 142
page 129 for information on Temperature Reset. This control and 143.
type requires the energy management module option or
accessory. The Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) is the Ac-
tive Set Point (SETP) or Cooling Set Point 1 (CSP.1) adjusted
This configuration is compatible with both standard and for any temperature reset that is applied. See Temperature Re-
digital compressors. set on page 129 for additional information.
Recommended Applications — This control type is used For mechanical cooling, the unit’s Control Method (Config-
when variable supply air set points are required and determined urationOPT2CTRL) and inputs must allow the machine
by a third-party Building Management System. to run. See Control Methods on page 60 for additional informa-
Hardware Requirements tion.
• energy management module On power up or changing from Off to Enabled, the machine
• 4 to 20 mA generator will remain off until Minutes Off Time (Configuration
• return/mixed air sensor OPT2DELY) timer has expired. See Minutes Off Time on
• supply air sensor page 128 for additional information. Liquid line solenoid valve
This control scheme requires a supply air sensor and a re- operation is as described in Liquid Line Solenoid Valves on
turn air sensor or mixed air sensor. In lieu of wiring sensors to page 40. Time Guard is honored for all compressors. For spe-
the 38AP unit, both values can be communicated via CCN to cific information on Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard
the 38AP unit. For information on broadcasting values, see Active on page 135.
Thermistors on page 28. The Supply ConfigurationOPT1 In this Control Type, Space Temp Control Mode, Run
SAT.T (SAT Thermistor Type) and Configuration StatusVIEWSPT.M=0 (Off Cool) as long as Run
OPT1RAT.T (RAT Thermistor Type) must be configured for StatusVIEWSTAT=1 (Off Local), 2 (Off CCN), 3 (Off
either 0 (5 k) or 1 (10 k) type sensors whether they are hard Time) or 4 (Off Emrgcy). SPT.M=3 (Cool On) when Control
wired or their values are communicated to the controller. Mode, STAT=5 (On Local), 6 (On CCN), or 7 (On Time). In
Required Configurations — Table 37 lists the configurations this Control Type, if the Indoor Fan Status Switch opens (In-
required for proper operation. putsGEN.IID.F.A=OFF) Control Mode (STAT) will
change to 8 (IDFS Not On); the unit will alarm and switch to 4
Recommended Settings — With this Control Type, CSP.1 (Off Emrgcy). Table 38 shows the space temperature control
should be set to the design supply air temperature used most mode response for C.TYP=9.
often.

107
 Table 37 — C.TYP=9 (VAV Setpoint) Required Configuration
CONFIGURATION MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 2
OPT1
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type Must be set for appropriate value:
0 = 5 k
1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: YES, if factory installed; NO, if
not.
EMM YES/NO EMM Module Installed
EMM must be installed and configured
for YES.
Default: 4
OPT2 C.TYP X Machine Control Type Range: 1 to 9
Set Item to 9 (VAV Setpoint)
SETPOINTS MODE
COOL CSP.1 XX.X Cooling Setpoint 1 Default: 60.0 F (15.6 C)
Range: 40.0 to 80.0 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)

Table 38 — Space Temperature Control Mode As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
Response for C.TYP=9 chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
INDOOR FAN
SPACE Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
CONTROL MODE TEMPERATURE
STAT STATUS CIR A CONTROL MODE capacity.
ID.F.A
SPT.M 38APS Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status
1 (Off Local) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must
2 (Off CCN) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead com-
3 (Off Time) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) pressor will be determined and started. See Circuit Compres-
4 (Off Emrgcy) Off or On 0 (Cool Off) sor Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a digital
5 (On Local) On 3 (Cool On) compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start fully
6 (On CCN) On 3 (Cool On)
loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded
and unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the unit’s sup-
7 (On Time) On 3 (Cool On)
ply air temperature meets the Control Point (CTPT) as
8 (IDFS Not On) Off 3 (Cool On) described in Supply Air Temperature Control on page 110.
9 (SPT Satisfied) Not Applicable During operation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to
38APD Units — On a call for cooling, the Indoor Fan Status maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on
Cir A (InputsGEN.IID.F.A) is checked. The switch must page 117.
be closed before the capacity routine will start. The lead circuit As part of normal operation, if a single compressor operates
is determined. See Lead/Lag Determination on page 112. The for the cumulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in
lead compressor will be determined and started. See Circuit circuit capacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this
Compressor Staging on page 112. If the lead compressor is a routine is initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started.
digital compressor and is enabled, the compressor will start Once started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority
fully loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between and will turn off the compressor if needed.
loaded and unloaded. Compressors will be staged until the As the capacity requirement begins to decrease, the ma-
unit’s supply air temperature meets the Control Point (CTPT) chine controls will reduce the unit’s capacity to maintain the
as described in Supply Air Temperature Control on page 110. Control Point. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load
If additional capacity requires the lag circuit to start, the lag Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of
circuit’s lead compressor will be determined and started. capacity.
During operation, the controls will stage the condenser fans to
maintain head pressure. See Head Pressure Control on
page 117.
As part of normal operation, if a single compressor in a mul-
tiple compressor circuit (38APD040-130) operates for the cu-
mulative time of 60 minutes without an increase in circuit ca-
pacity, an oil recovery routine is initiated. When this routine is
initiated, a second compressor in the circuit is started. Once
started, the normal capacity control routine takes priority and
will turn off the compressor if needed.

108
 38AP LVT
TERMINAL STRIP

1 ALM
R
2
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 1
3

4
DEMAND LIMIT STEP 2
4-20 mA
DEMAND SIGNAL – 5
LIMIT GENERATOR
SIGNAL 6
+
7
4-20 mA
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL – 8
RESET GENERATOR
SIGNAL
+ 9

REQUESTED 4-20 mA
COOLING SIGNAL –
SETPOINT GENERATOR
SIGNAL
(REQUIRED) + 10
SAT (REQUIRED)
11

REMOTE ON/OFF
13

14

FS1
16

18

19
MAT/RAT (REQUIRED)
20 LLSV-B (38APD)
LLSV-A2 (38APS)
or LLSV-B2 (065)
24
LLSV-A
or LLSV-B (065)
LEGEND 25
ALM R — Alarm Relay
CXB — Compressor Expansion Board
FS1 — Fan Status Switch, AHU1
LLSV-A — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, First Stage FIELD-SUPPLIED
(38APD070-130 ONLY)
LLSV-A2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit A, Second Stage (38APS040,050, TRANSFORMER
38APD070-130 only) (REQUIRED)
LLSV-B — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, First Stage (38APS065, 38APD only)
LLSV-B2 — Liquid Line Solenoid, Circuit B, Second Stage (38APS065,
38APD070-130 only) 24 VAC
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal SECONDARY
MAT/RAT — Mixed Air Thermistor/Return Air Thermistor
SAT — Supply Air Thermistor
——— Factory Wiring
--------- Field Wiring
NOTES: CXB-J6
1. Field wiring must be in accordance with local codes. LLSV-A2
2. LVT-1 and 2 are for the alarm relay. The maximum load allowed for the alarm relay
is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. RED 5 PNK
3. LVT-24, 25, and 2 are for control of field-supplied liquid line solenoid valve (LLSV)
15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 VAC. Field power supply is not required. 6
4. For 38APD070-130 units, an additional LLSV, 15 VA sealed, 30 VA inrush at 24 LLSV-B2
VAC can be connected to CXB. A field-supplied control transformer is required, not 7 ORN
to exceed 75 VA.
5. All discrete inputs are 24 VAC.
6. Installation of fan status switch (FS1) is recommended. If not used, a jumper must
be installed.
7. Energy management module (EMM) is required.
8. The contacts for Remote On-Off, Fan Status Switch and Demand Limit must be
rated for dry circuit applications capable of handling a 24 VAC load up to 50 mA.

Fig. 141 — C.TYP=9 (VAV Setpoint) Wiring

109
 90

80

SETP (ACTIVE SET POINT), °F

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25

CL.MA (4-20 mA COOLING SETPOINT INPUT), mA a38-7285

Fig. 142 — Active Setpoint (English)

30.0

25.0
SETP (ACTIVE SET POINT), °C

20.0

15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0
0 5 10 15 20 25

a38-7286
CL.MA (4-20 mA COOLING SETPOINT INPUT), mA

Fig. 143 — Active Setpoint (SI)

CAPACITY CONTROL ALGORITHMS — Three types of Return Air Temperature TemperaturesUNITRAT and
capacity control are available for the 38AP units. Supply Air Temperature TemperaturesUNITSAT. With
Supply Air Temperature Control — This control algorithm is this information, a capacity ratio is calculated to determine
applicable to Control Types ConfigurationOPT2 whether to make any changes to the current stage of capacity.
C.TYP=1 (VAV), 3 (Tstat Multi), 5 (SPT Multi), or 9 (VAV This ratio, Capacity Load/Unload Factor (Run Sta-
Setpoint). tusVIEWLOD.F) value ranges from –100% to +100%
times Deadband Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN).
Capacity control is determined by the difference between See Deadband Multiplier on page 115 for more information. If
the supply air temperature and the Control Point (Run Sta- the next stage of capacity is a compressor, the control starts
tusVIEWCTPT) and its rate of change. The capacity con- (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches +100% (–100%)
trol routine runs every 30 seconds. The algorithm attempts to times Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN). Once a change in capacity
maintain the Control Point at the desired set point. Additional- occurs, a 90-second time delay is initiated and the capacity
ly, the control calculates a rise per stage knowing which com- stage is held during this time delay.
pressor is on, its capacity and the temperature difference across
the evaporator coil (return or mixed air temperature minus sup- When the unit is at stage zero (Requested Stage Run Sta-
ply air temperature) to determine the best time to turn on or off tusVIEWSTGE=0) as part of the capacity control routine,
the next compressor, institute Minimum Load Control, or the control adds a 1.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce
change the digital response, if equipped. Supply and return air cycling.
temperatures can be monitored at the unit’s interface device

110
 If the unit is equipped with a digital compressor, it is nor- The CCN Point ALRM_CNT is the variable and can be
mally the first compressor started. If the lead compressor is a modified with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service
digital compressor, and is enabled and available (not in alarm Tool only. It cannot be modified with the scrolling marquee or
or held off by Time Guard), the compressor will start fully Navigator™ display.
loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is
and unloaded. Once the digital compressor is on, positive 11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to
changes in LOD.F will cause the compressor to load. Negative ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK.
changes to LOD.F will cause the compressor to unload. This
process can occur every 30 seconds. Changes to the digital Alarm routing is not supported with the LON Translator.
loading are not subject to the 90-second delay. Alarm Equipment Priority — The ComfortVIEW software
If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Control, it will uses the equipment priority value to determine the order in
not be active until the unit is on its last stage of capacity. It too which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is
is treated as a stage of compression. As a result, Minimum the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7
Load Control will be activated when capacity is decreasing, would appear last when sorted. For example, if two units send
Requested Stage STGE=1, and Capacity Load/Unload Factor out identical alarms, the unit with the higher priority would be
(Run StatusVIEWLOD.F) is –100% times Deadband listed first. The default is 4. The CCN point EQP_TYPE is the
Multiplier (Z.GN). variable and can be changed when using ComfortVIEW soft-
ware or Network Service Tool only. This variable cannot be
Similar to increasing STGE from 0 to 1, the control adds a changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator display.
1.2 factor to the capacity control routine when reducing capaci-
ty from 1 to 0 to reduce cycling. Communication Failure Retry Time — This variable speci-
fies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between
Thermostat Capacity Stage Control — This control algo- alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is not acknowl-
rithm is applicable to Control Types Configuration edged by a network alarm acknowledger, which may be either
OPT2C.TYP=4 (Tstat 2 Stg), or 8 (Dual Tstat). This capac- ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowledgement is not
ity routine relies on inputs from thermostats to control capacity received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after the number of
staging. See the Sequence of Operation section for the specific minutes specified in this decision. The factory default for this
Capacity Control (C.TYP=4, page 69 or C.TYP=8, page 105). item is 10 minutes with a range of 1 to 254 minutes. The CCN
4 to 20 mA Capacity Stage Control — This control algo- Point RETRY_TM is the variable and can be changed with
rithm is applicable to Control Type Configuration ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This
OPT2C.TYP=7 (Pct Cap). This capacity routine relies on a variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Nav-
4 to 20 mA input from an external source to control capacity igator display.
staging. See the Sequence of Operation seection for C.TYP=7 Re-Alarm Time — This variable specifies the amount of time
(page 75). that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A re-alarm
Field Configurable Controls occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm con-
tinue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this deci-
ALARM ROUTING — A CCN feature within the 38AP sion. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified
units allows for alarm broadcasting. interval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. To
Alarm Routing Control — Alarms recorded on the 38AP disable this feature, set the variable to 255. The factory default
unit can be routed through the CCN. To configure this option, is 30 minutes with a range of 1 to 254. The CCN Point RE-
the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine ALARM is the variable and can be changed with Comfort-
which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input VIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This variable
for the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator
set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will display.
be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Alarm System Name — This variable specifies the system
Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory element name that will appear in the alarms generated by the
default is 00000000. See Figure 144. The default setting is unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters
based on the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a long and should be unique to the unit. The factory default is
network. If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW™, SPLIT. The CCN point ALRM_NAM is the variable and can
ComfortWORKS®, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink mod- be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service
ule, enabling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling
the CCN communication bus. marquee or Navigator display.

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT
Building Supervisor,
ComfortVIEW™,
ComfortWORKS™,
BACnet Communications (UPC),
BACnet Translator
TeLink,
Autodial Gateway
Unused

Alarm Printer interface Module,

BACLink or DataLINK™
Unused

Fig. 144 — Alarm Routing Control

111
COMPRESSOR STAGING — Several factors determine
which circuit and compressor to start:
Lead/Lag Determination (38APD Units) — Lead/Lag deter-
mination is a configurable choice and is factory set to be auto-
matic, ConfigurationOPT2LLCS=1 for all units, and
applies specifically to the 38APD units.
When the 38APD unit is equipped with a digital scroll com-
pressor and enabled (ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=YES),
or minimum load is installed and enabled (Configuration
OPT1MLV.S=YES), then circuit A is always the lead circuit
regardless of the LLCS value. For 38APD units without digital
scroll compressor (A1.TY=NO), or minimum load is not in-
stalled or enabled (MLV.S=NO), the value can be changed to
Circuit A leads (LLCS=2) or Circuit B leads (LLCS=3) as de-
sired. Set at automatic LLCS=1, the control will sum the cur-
rent number of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the cur-
rent operating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the low-
est sum is started first.
Circuit Wear Factor = Circuit Starts + (Circuit Run Hours/4)
Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and which is the lag
are also made when total machine capacity is at 100% or when
there is a change in the direction of capacity (increase or
decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.
Lead/Lag determination will obey the Time Guard function.
If a compressor is unavailable due to Time Guard, it will be
skipped in the selection process. For additional information on
Time Guard, see MDTG - Time Guard Active on page 135.
Loading Sequence Select — This feature is configurable as
equal circuit loading or staged circuit loading with the default
set at equal (ConfigurationOPT2LOAD=1). The control
determines the order in which the steps of capacity for each
circuit are changed. Set to equal, the unit will alternate starting
compressors in each circuit as the requirement increases. Set to
staged (ConfigurationOPT2LOAD=2), one circuit will
load completely before the second circuit is started. This con-
trol choice does NOT have any impact on machines with only
one circuit or units with 2 compressors, one in each circuit.
Circuit Compressor Staging — The control has an automatic
lead-lag feature built in which determines the wear factor for
each compressor. Wear factor is calculated for each compres-
sor as 6 times the number of starts plus the number of run
hours.
Compressor Wear Factor = 6 x (Compressor Starts +
Compressor Run Hours)
If all compressors are off and less than 30 minutes have
elapsed since the last compressor was turned off, the wear fac-
tor is used to determine which compressor to start next. As ad-
ditional stages of compression are required, the unit control
will add them after the Time Guard timer has expired, if appli-
cable. Time Guard may change the loading sequence. If a cir-
cuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest wear fac-
tor will be shut off first after its Time Guard timer has expired,
if applicable. For additional information on Time Guard,
MDTG - Time Guard Active on page 135.
Tables 39 and 40 are examples that depict the capacity stag-
ing for equal circuit loading and staged circuit loading, without
digital compressor. These are two of many possible staging se-
quences and are only meant to provide examples of staging
sequences.

112
 Table 39 — Capacity Staging, Equal Circuit Loading (Example)
LEAD CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT B
UNIT CAPACITY STEP
% DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR % DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR
1 50 A1 50 B1
38APD025-030
2 100 A1, B1 100 A1, B1
1 26 A1 24 B1
2 50 A1, B1 50 A1, B1
38APD040
3 76 A1, A2, B1 74 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 24 A1 26 B1
2 50 A1, B1 50 A1, B1
38APD050
3 74 A1, A2, B1 76 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 23 A1 27 B1
2 50 A1, B1 50 A1, B1
38APD060
3 73 A1, A2, B1 77 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 24 A1 18 B1
2 41 A1, B1 41 A1, B1
38APD070 3 65 A1, A2, B1 59 A1, B1, B2
4 83 A1, A2, B1, B2 83 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
1 20 A1 20 B1
2 40 A1, B1 40 A1, B1
38APD080 3 60 A1, A2, B1 60 A1, B1, B2
4 80 A1, A2, B1, B2 80 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
1 16 A1 18 B1
2 33 A1, B1 33 A1, B1
3 49 A1, A2, B1 51 A1, B1, B2
38APD090
4 67 A1, A2, B1, B2 67 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 82 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 85 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 17 A1 17 B1
2 33 A1, B1 33 A1, B1
3 50 A1, A2, B1 50 A1, B1, B2
38APD100
4 67 A1, A2, B1, B2 67 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 83 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 83 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 14 A1 19 B1
2 33 A1, B1 33 A1, B1
3 48 A1, A2, B1 52 A1, B1, B2
38APD115
4 67 A1, A2, B1, B2 67 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 81 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 86 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 13 A1 21 B1
2 33 A1, B1 33 A1, B1
3 46 A1, A2, B1 54 A1, B1, B2
38APD130
4 67 A1, A2, B1, B2 67 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 79 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 88 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 50 A1
38APS025-030 — —
2 100 A1, A2
1 33 A1
38APS040-050 2 67 A1, A2 — —
3 100 A1, A2, A3
1 33 B1
38APS065 2 — — 67 B1, B2
3 100 B1, B2, B3

113
 Table 40 — Capacity Staging, Staged Circuit Loading (Example)
LEAD CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT B
UNIT CAPACITY STEP
% DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR % DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR
1 50 A1 50 B1
38APD025-030
2 100 A1, B1 100 A1, B1
1 26 A1 24 B1
2 53 A1, A2 47 B1, B2
38APD040
3 76 A1, A2, B1 74 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 24 A1 26 B1
2 48 A1, A2 52 B1, B2
38APD050
3 74 A1, A2, B1 76 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 23 A1 27 B1
2 46 A1, A2 54 B1, B2
38APD060
3 73 A1, A2, B1 77 A1, B1, B2
4 100 A1, A2, B1, B2 100 A1, A2, B1, B2
1 24 A1 18 B1
2 48 A1, A2 35 A1, B1
38APD070 3 65 A1, A2, B1 52 A1, B1, B2
4 83 A1, A2, B1, B2 76 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
1 20 A1 20 B1
2 40 A1, B1 40 A1, B1
38APD080 3 60 A1, A2, B1 60 A1, B1, B2
4 80 A1, A2, B1, B2 80 A1, A2, B1, B2
5 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
1 16 A1 18 B1
2 31 A1, A2 36 B1, B2
3 46 A1, A2, A3 54 B1, B2, B3
38APD090
4 64 A1, A2, A3, B1 69 A1, B1, B2, B3
5 82 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 85 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 17 A1 17 B1
2 33 A1, A2 33 B1, B2
3 50 A1, A2, A3 50 B1, B2, B3
38APD100
4 67 A1, A2, A3, B1 67 A1, B1, B2, B3
5 83 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 83 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 14 A1 19 B1
2 29 A1, A2 38 B1, B2
3 43 A1, A2, A3 57 B1, B2, B3
38APD115
4 62 A1, A2, A3, B1 71 A1, B1, B2, B3
5 81 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 86 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 13 A1 21 B1
2 25 A1, A2 42 B1, B2
3 38 A1, A2, A3 63 B1, B2, B3
38APD130
4 58 A1, A2, A3, B1 75 A1, B1, B2, B3
5 79 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 88 A1, A2, B1, B2, B3
6 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 100 A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
1 50 A1
38APS025-030 — —
2 100 A1, A2
1 33 A1
38APS040-050 2 67 A1, A2 — —
3 100 A1, A2, A3
1 33 B1
38APS065 2 — — 67 B1, B2
3 100 B1, B2, B3

114
DEADBAND MULTIPLIER — The user configurable 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN loadshed
Deadband Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN) has a module and has the ability to limit the current operating capaci-
default value of 1.0. The range is 1.0 to 4.0. When set to a ty to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required. The
value other than 1.0, this factor is applied to the Capacity fourth type utilizes communications to write directly to the de-
Load/Unload Factor (Run StatusVIEWLOD.F). The mand limit point.
configuration affects the cycling rate of the cooling stages by NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20 mA input signal
raising or lowering the threshold that capacity Load/Unload types of demand limiting require the energy management mod-
Factor must build to in order to add or subtract a stage of cool- ule (EMM).
ing. The larger this value is set, the longer the control will
delay between adding or removing stages of capacity. To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to
use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the
Normally this configuration should not require any tuning type selected.
or adjustment. If there is an application where the unit may be
significantly oversized and there are indications of high com- 2-Stage Switch Controlled Demand Limit
pressor cycles, then the Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN) can be NOTE: Single or 2-Stage Switch Controlled Demand Limit is
used to adjust the overall logic gain. As the value of (Z.GN) is not available when using Dual Thermostat Control Type,
increased, the cycling of cooling stages will be slowed. C.TYP=8.
DEMAND LIMIT — Demand limit is a feature that allows To configure Demand Limit for 2-stage switch control, set
the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC)
usage. Depending on the load profile for the space and the to 1. Then configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Con-
demand limit placed on the machine, the unit may not be able figurationRSETDLS1 and DLS2) to the desired capacity
to satisfy the cooling requirements while demand limit is limit. See Table 41. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay
active. switch inputs field-wired to low voltage terminal (LVT) strip
For units with a digital compressor, digital operation is ig- terminal 3-6. Refer to the specific control type wiring diagrams
nored when determining capacity limit of the machine. Since or unit wiring diagram for these connections. Demand Limit
Demand Limit controls the number of compressors operating, Switch status can be monitored at the unit’s scrolling marquee,
the requested demand limit must allow for the corresponding Demand Limit Switch 1 and Demand Limit Switch 2 (In-
capacity of the full digital compressor capacity plus any re- putsGEN.IDLS1 and DLS2) respectively.
maining compressors. For example, a 38APS040 unit with a For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first
digital compressor will require a demand limit of at least 33% stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand
for the first compressor to be energized. No compressor opera- limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity
tion will be allowed prior to this demand limit level. Digital op- entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point. Closing contacts
eration below 33% will require a demand limit of at least 33% on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from ex-
to allow a compressor to start. Digital operation between 33 ceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set
and 67% will require a demand limit of at least 67% to allow 2 point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand
compressors to be operating. Finally, for digital operation takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If the de-
above 67%, demand limit must be at 100% to allow for all mand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the unit
compressors to be operating. For other unit capacity steps, see will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.
Tables 39 and 40. As an example, 2-stage demand limit is planned with De-
If Demand Limit is active, the control will indicate an Oper- mand Limit Switch 1 to allow the unit to operate to 80% capac-
ating Mode of Demand Limited, Operating Modes ity. Demand Limit Switch 2 is to allow the unit to operate to
MODEMD15=YES. 50% capacity. See Table 41 for programming requirements.
Four types of demand limiting can be configured. The first When Demand Limit Switch 1 closes, the unit’s capacity will
type is through 2-stage switch control, which will reduce the not exceed 80%. If Demand Limit Switch 2 closes, the unit’s
maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentages. The capacity will not exceed 50%. The Operating Mode, Demand
second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input, which will reduce Limited (MD15) will remain active as long as either Demand
the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input Limit Switch 1 or Demand Limit Switch 2 is closed.
signal (no reduction) down to the user configurable level at a
Table 41 — Configuring 2-Stage Demand Limit
CONFIGURATIONOPT2
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS EXAMPLE VALUE
Range: 1 to 9
1 (VAV)
3 (Tstat Multi)
4 (Tstat 2stg)
5 (SPT Multi)
C.TYP Machine Control Type 7 (PCT Cap) 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, or 9
8 (Dual Tstat)
9 (VAV Setpoint)
Default: 4
Value must not be set to 8.
CONFIGURATIONRSET
0=None (Default)
DMDC Demand Limit Select 1=Switch 1
2=4 to 20 mA Input
3=CCN Loadshed
DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 Range: 0 to 100% 80%
Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%
DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 50%
Default: 50%

115
4-20 mA Controlled Demand Limit — To configure demand
limit for 4 to 20 mA control, set the Demand Limit Select CAUTION
(ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the
Demand Limit at 20 mA (ConfigurationRSETDM20) to
To avoid unit damage, care should be taken when interfac-
the maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from
ing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to
an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block
LVT strip terminals 7 (+) and 8 (-). The external signal can be power supply differences, full wave bridge versus half
wave rectification. The two different power supplies cannot
monitored at the scrolling marquee, 4-20 mA Demand Signal
be mixed. ComfortLink controls use half wave rectifica-
(Inputs4-20DMND). Refer to the specific control type
tion. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full
wiring diagrams or unit wiring diagram for these connections. wave bridge signal generating device is used.
The control will reduce allowable capacity to this user-pro-
grammed level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 42 and The 4-20 mA Input Demand Limit example (Fig. 145) will
Fig. 145. allow the unit to operate at full capacity if required with
DMND =4 mA or 100% Demand Limit. At DMND=20 mA
the unit is not allowed to operate, with a Demand Limit of 0%.
Between DMND=4 mA and DMND=20 mA a proportional
demand limit amount will be applied to the machine.
Table 42 — Configuring 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit
CONFIGURATIONRSET
ITEM DISPLAY COMMENTS EXAMPLE
0=None (Default)
1=Switch
DMDC Demand Limit Select 2=4 to 20 mA Input 2
3=CCN Loadshed
Range: 0 to 100%
DM20 Demand Limit at 20 mA Default: 100% 0%

100

90

80
Unit allowed to Unit allowed to operate
operate at full capacity at 50% capacity with a
DEMAND LIMIT RESPONSE (%)

70 with a 4 mA signal 12 mA signal

60

50

40

30

DM20 = 0%
20 Demand Limit at 20 mA

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25

4 TO 20 mA DEMAND LIMIT INPUT SIGNAL, DMND A38-7288

Fig. 145 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit, Demand Limit Select DMDC=2

116
CCN Loadshed Demand Limit — To configure Demand for 11 seconds, the compressor will be operating at approxi-
Limit for CCN Loadshed control, set the Demand Limit Select mately 25% of its capacity. Capacity is the time-averaged sum-
(ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 3. Then configure the mation of loaded and unloaded states, and its range is
Loadshed Group Number (ConfigurationRSETSHNM), continuous from 10% to 100%. Regardless of capacity, the
Loadshed Demand Delta (ConfigurationRSETSHDL), compressor always rotates with constant speed. As the com-
and Maximum Loadshed Time (ConfigurationRSET pressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state, the dis-
SHTM). charge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the compressor
The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN sound will change.
system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a When a digital compressor is started, it will run at full load
Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the Red- for 90 seconds prior to beginning the digital operation. This is
line command is received, the current stage of capacity is set to for oil return.
the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed control The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the op-
send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will re- eration of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to
duce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed De- maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is in-
mand delta. The maximum loadshed time is the maximum stalled, an additional discharge gas thermistor (DTT) is in-
length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The stalled along with the AUX board for control of the DUS.
control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Can-
cel command has been received within the configured maxi- Digital Compressor Configuration — When a digital
mum loadshed time limit. Refer to the Loadshed Overview compressor is installed, the configuration parameter
and Configuration Manual for additional information. ConfigurationUNITA1.TY is configured to YES. There
is also a maximum unload time configuration,
CCN Controlled Demand Limit — With the control method ConfigurationUNITMAX.T, that is set based on unit
set to CCN Control (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL=3 size, which indicates the maximum unloading for the digital
[CCN]), an external CCN device controls the On/Off state of compressor. The factory default for MAX.T is 10
the machine. While in this control mode, the demand limit can (38APD,APS025-030) or 8 (38APD,APS040-130). These
be written to the CCN Point, DEM_LIM. No other configura- numbers can be lowered, but cannot be increased more than
tion is required. Any value less than 100% written to this point the factory default. The upper limit for the maximum unload
will limit the capacity to this value. time is preset based on the unit and is set for oil return. See
Units controlled via communications by a separate third- Table 43 for required configurations.
party building automation system through a translator or UPC HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL — The main base board
Open Controller must be set to CCN Control (CTRL=3). If the (MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest con-
unit is to be monitored only via communications, CTRL=3 densing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit effi-
(CCN) is not required. ciency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing temperature
DIGITAL COMPRESSOR — The 38AP units have a fac- input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside air
tory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which pro- temperature (OAT) sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater
vides additional capacity control for the unit. If equipped, the than 70 F (21.1 C) before a circuit is starting, then all con-
digital compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor denser fan stages will be energized. A fan stage is changed
location. When a digital compressor is installed, a digital based on SCT (saturated condensing temperature).
unloader solenoid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor. Fan staging is controlled by four parameters: Head Setpoint
Digital Scroll Operation — A digital scroll operates in two On (SetpointsHEADH.SP), Head Setpoint Off (Set-
states: the “loaded state” when the digital unloader solenoid pointsHEADH.SP.F), Fan Stage Delta (Setpoints
valve (DUS) is normally closed, and the “unloaded state” HEADF.DLT), and Fan Delta Active Time (Setpoints
when the DUS is open. During the loaded state, the compres- HEADF.TME). From these parameters, two control points
sor operates like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and are calculated, Fan On Set Point (SetpointsHEADF.ON)
mass flow. However, during the unloaded state, there is no and Fan Off Set Point (SetpointsHEADF.OFF).
capacity and no mass flow through the compressor. The capac- See Table 44 for head pressure control settings. Tables 45-
ity of the system is varied by varying the time the compressor 52 show the number of fan stages, contactors energized and the
operates in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second fans that are on during the fan stage.
period. If the DUS is energized for 7.5 seconds, the compres-
sor will be operating at 50% capacity. If the DUS is energized

Table 43 — Digital Compressor Required Configurations

CONFIGURATIONUNIT
ITEM DISPLAY EXPANSION COMMENTS
YES = Factory Equipped (Default)
A1.TY NO/YES A1 Compressor Digital?
NO = Not Equipped
Range: 0 to 10 (38AP025-030)
0 to 8 (38AP040-130)
MAX.T XX Sec Maximum A1 Unload Time
Default: 10 (38AP025-030)
8 38AP040-130)

117
 Fan On Set Point (F.ON) is Head Setpoint On (H.SP) ex- 38APD070 — The 38APD070 unit uses an additional fan
cept after a fan stage increase, when Head Setpoint On (H.SP) stage when the ambient temperature is less than 32 F (0 °C)
is increased by Fan Stage Delta (F.DLT) for the Fan Delta Ac- and only one circuit is on, Fan Stage 1. This fan stage turns on
tive Time (F.TME). Using the factory default settings results the fans in the opposite circuit to draw a lower air volume
in the following values: F.ON=115.0 F (46.1 C) or following a across the active circuit coils. (This fan stage is not used if
fan stage increase, F.ON=130 F [115.0 + 15.0 F] (54.4 C [46.1 Motormaster® control is used.) When the circuit SCT is
+ 8.3 C]) for 60 seconds following the fan stage increase. greater than F.ON, then an additional stage of fan will be
Fan Off Set Point (F.OFF) is Head Setpoint Off (H.SP.F). added to the current fan stage. F.ON will be updated for the
Using the factory default settings results in the following value: required time. A fan stage will decrease if the circuit’s SCT is
F.OFF=72.0 F (22.2 C). less than F.OFF for 2 minutes.
38APD025-060 — The 38APD025-060 units have common 38APD080-130 — The 38APD080-130 units have some fans
fan control; both circuits share the same condenser fans. When that are common between both circuits and some that are con-
the highest SCT of both circuits is greater than F.ON, then an trolled by each circuit individually. Initial fan stages are circuit-
additional stage of fan will be added to the current fan stage. specific fans and are controlled by the circuit’s SCT. When the
F.ON will be updated for the required time. A fan stage will circuit SCT is greater than F.ON, then an additional stage of
decrease if the SCT for both circuit is less than F.OFF for 2 fan will be added to the current fan stage. F.ON will be
minutes. updated for the required time.
38APS025-065 — For 38APS025-065 units, when the circuit The common fans are controlled by the circuit with the
SCT is greater than F.ON, then an additional stage of fan will highest SCT. If the next fan stage is a common fan stage and
be added to the current fan stage. F.ON will be updated for the one circuit’s SCT is greater than F.ON, the next fan stage will
required time. A fan stage will decrease if the circuit’s SCT is be energized. F.ON will be updated for the required time.
less than F.OFF for 2 minutes A fan stage will decrease if the circuit’s SCT is less than
F.OFF for 2 minutes.

Table 44 — Head Pressure Control Settings

SETPOINTSHEAD
ITEM DISPLAY EXPANSION COMMENTS
Range: 85.0 to 120.0 F (29.4 to 48.9 C)
H.SP XXX.X °F (°C) Head Setpoint On
Default: 115.0 F (46.1 C)
Range: 45.0 to 90.0 F (7.2 to 32.2 C)
H.SP.F XX.X °F (°C) Head Setpoint Off Default: 72.0 F (22.2 C)
F.ON XXX.X °F (°C) Fan On Set Point Calculated value, cannot be changed
F.OFF XXX.X °F (°C) Fan Off Set Point Calculated value, cannot be changed
Range: 0.0 to 50.0 F (0.0 to 27.8 C)
F.DLT XX.X F (C) Fan Stage Delta
Default: 15.0 F (8.3 C)
Range: 0 to 300 seconds
F.TME XXX secs Fan Stage Active Time Default: 60 seconds

Table 45 — 38APD,APS025-030 Fan Staging

OFM1
CONTROL BOX

OFM2

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
38APD025,027,030, 1 FAN1 FC1 OFM1†
38APS025, 027,030 A (38APS)
With or Without Motormaster A or B (38APD) 2 FAN1 FC1 OFM1†
Controller FAN2 FC2 OFM2

*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.

†Motormaster controlled motor, if equipped.

118
 Table 46 — 38APD,APS040-050 Fan Staging

OFM1

CONTROL BOX
OFM3

OFM2

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM3
38APD040,050
38APS040,050 A (38APS) 2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
A or B (38APD) FAN1 FC1 OFM3
Without Motormaster® Controller 3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
38APD040,050 1 FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
A (38APS)
38APS040,050 FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
With Motormaster Controller A or B (38APD) 2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Motormaster controlled motor.

Table 47 — 38APD060, 38APS065 Fan Staging

OFM1 OFM3
CONTROL BOX

OFM2 OFM4

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM3
2 FAN1 FC1 OFM3
FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
38APD060 FAN1 FC1
A or B 3 OFM3, OFM4
Without Motormaster Controller FAN3 FC3
FAN1 FC1 OFM3
4 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
FAN3 FC3 OFM4
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
FAN1 FC1
2 OFM3†, OFM4
FAN3 FC3
38APD060 FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
With Motormaster Controller A or B 3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
4 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
FAN3 FC3 OFM4
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
FAN1 FC1
2 FAN3 FC3 OFM3†, OFM4
38APS065 3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
With or Without Motormaster B FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
Controller 4 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
FAN1 FC1 OFM3†
5 FAN2 FC2 OFM1, OFM2
FAN3 FC3 OFM4
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Motormaster controlled motor, if equipped.

119
 Table 48 — 38APD070 Fan Staging

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3

CONTROL BOX
OFM2 OFM4

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
1†
FAN4 FC4 OFM2
A 2 FAN1 FC1 OFM3**
FAN1 FC1 OFM3**
3
FAN3 FC3 OFM4
FAN1 FC1 OFM3**
1† FAN3 FC3 OFM4
38APD070 B 2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
With or Without Motormaster® FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
Controller 3 FAN4 FC4 OFM2
1† — — —
FAN1 FC1 OFM3**
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
A and B FAN1 FC1 OFM3**
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
3 FAN3 FC3 OFM4
FAN4 FC4 OFM2
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or Outputs GEN.O.
†Fan Stage 1 is used only when ambient temperature is less than
32 F (0 °C) and circuit A or B is running alone. Fan Stage 1 is not
used when Motormaster is used.
**Motormaster controlled motor, if equipped.

Table 49 — 38APD080 Fan Staging

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM5
CONTROL BOX

OFM3

OFM2 OFM6

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM5†
A FAN1 FC1 OFM5†
2
FAN3 FC3** OFM2, OFM6
1 FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
FAN3 FC3** OFM2, OFM6
2
B FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
38APD080 3 FAN3 FC3** OFM2, OFM6
With or Without Motormaster FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
Controller FAN1 FC1 OFM5†
1 FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
FAN1 FC1 OFM5†
2 FAN3 FC3** OFM2, OFM6
A and B FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
FAN1 FC1 OFM5†
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
3 FAN3 FC3** OFM2, OFM6
FAN4 FC4 OFM3†
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or Outputs GEN.O.
†Motormaster controlled motor, if equipped.
**Fans that affect both circuits.

120
 Table 50 — 38APD090, 100 Fan Staging

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3 OFM5

CONTROL BOX
OFM2 OFM4 OFM6

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN4 FC4† OFM3
2 FAN1 FC1 OFM5
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
3 FAN4 FC4† OFM3
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
A FAN4 FC4† OFM3
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
5
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
6 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
1 FAN4 FC4† OFM3
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
38APD090,100 B 4
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
Without Motormaster®
Controller FAN2 FC2 OFM1
5 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
6 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
1 FAN4 FC4† OFM3
FAN1 FC2 OFM1
2 FAN2 FC4† OFM3
3 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
4 FAN4 FC4† OFM3
A and B
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
5 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
6 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Fans that affect both circuits.
**Motormaster controlled motor.

121
 Table 50 — 38APD090, 100 Fan Staging (cont)

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3 OFM5

CONTROL BOX
OFM2 OFM4 OFM6

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
2 FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
A FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
3
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
1 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
2
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
B FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
3 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
38APD090,100
With Motormaster® Controller FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
A and B FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4. OFM6
FAN1 FC1 OFM5**
4 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Fans that affect both circuits.
**Motormaster controlled motor.

122
 Table 51 — 38APD115 Fan Staging

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3 OFM7

CONTROL BOX
OFM5

OFM2 OFM4 OFM8

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1 OFM5
2 FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
A 3 FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
4 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
1 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
2 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
B 3
FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
38APD115 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
Without Motormaster® 4 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
Controller FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
1 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
2 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
A and B FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
4 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
1 FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
2 FAN1 FC1 OFM5
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
A
3 FAN1 FC1 OFM5
4 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
1 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
B FAN2 FC2 OFM**
3
FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
4 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
38APD115 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
With Motormaster Controller FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
1 FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN2 FC2 OFM5
OFM1**
2 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5
OFM7**
FAN1 FC1
A and B OFM1**
3 FAN2 FC2 OFM3, OFM8
FAN4 FC4†
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1 OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
4 FAN3 FC3 OFM2, OFM4
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Fans that affect both circuits.
**Motormaster controlled motor.

123
 Table 52 — 38APD130 Fan Staging

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3 OFM5 OFM7

CONTROL BOX
OFM2 OFM4 OFM6 OFM8

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN1 FC1† OFM5
2 FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
3 FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
A 4 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
5 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
1 FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
B 3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1
38APD130 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
Without Motormaster® FAN1 FC1† OFM5
Controller FAN2 FC2 OFM1
4
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
1 FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
2 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
3 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
A and B FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
4
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1
5 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Fans that affect both circuits.
**Motormaster controlled motor.

124
 Table 52 — 38APD130 Fan Staging (cont)

CKT B CKT A

OFM1 OFM3 OFM5 OFM7

CONTROL BOX
OFM2 OFM4 OFM6 OFM8

UNIT OPERATING CIRCUIT FAN STAGE OUTPUT POINT NAME* CONTACTOR FANS ENERGIZED
1 FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
2 FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
A 3 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
1 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
B 3 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
38APD130
With Motormaster® Controller FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
1 FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
2 FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
A and B FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
3 FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
FAN1 FC1† OFM5
FAN2 FC2 OFM1**
4 FAN3 FC3† OFM2, OFM4, OFM6
FAN4 FC4† OFM3, OFM8
FAN5 FC5 OFM7**
*Items in either Service TestOUTS or OutputsGEN.O.
†Fans that affect both circuits.
**Motormaster controlled motor.

Motormaster V Option/Accessory — For low-ambient oper- Once Motormaster V controller is enabled, the calculated
ation, the first stage of fan is equipped with the Motormaster V value Fan On Set Point (F.ON) is lowered by 10° F (5.6° C).
head pressure controller option or accessory. Units Using the factory defaults, F.ON=105.0 F [115.0 – 10.0° F]
38APD025-060 and 38APS025-065 have one Motormaster V (40.6 C [46.1 – 5.6° C]) or following a fan stage increase,
controller for each unit. The 38APD070-130 units have two F.ON= 120 F [115.0 + 15.0 – 10.0° F] (48.8 C [46.1 + 8.3 –
Motormaster V controllers, one in each circuit. 5.6° C]) for 60 seconds following the fan stage increase.
If equipped, the Motormaster controller must be enabled in The Motormaster V controller is provided an ON command
the controls. See Table 53. with the first stage of fan, and is started at 100%. It adjusts fan
speed through a 0 to 10 vdc output from the AUX Board. On
Table 53 — Motormaster Required Configurations 38APD025-060 units, the highest circuit SCT controls the
CONFIGURATIONM.MST speed signal to the Motormaster V controller to try to maintain
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
it at 105 F (40.6 C). On 38APD070-130 and 38APS025-065
units, each circuit controls its Motormaster V controller to try
YES = Factory Equipped
(Default) to maintain SCT at 105 F (40.6 C) for the circuit.
MMR.S Motormaster Select NO = Not Equipped The signal to the Motormaster V controller can be moni-
Value: YES to enable tored through the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display.
MIN.S
Range: 0 to 100%
Minimum Fan Speed Default: 8% Each circuit has a corresponding signal in percentage of full
speed. These values can be found under Var Head Press Out
Although the control has a Minimum Fan Speed configura- Cir A (Outputs GEN.OV.HPA) and Var Head Press Out
tion, the Motormaster V device has a programmed point for Cir B (OutputsGEN.OV.HPB). For units that use a single
minimum fan speed. Its default is 8 Hz. This is above the Motormaster controller (38AP025-060), the output will be dis-
minimum speed for the unit control. This parameter does not played under V.HPA. For 38APS065, the output will be
need to be adjusted. displayed under V.HPB.

125
 The Motormaster V display indicates speed in Hz. connection diagram. See Table 55 for Operating Mode drive
Motormaster V® Drive Configuration — The Motormaster parameters and default values. Once the drive is powered, it
V controller is configured for 1 of 12 operation modes based will change to the mode selected according to the inputs. See
on the inputs to the control terminal block. The 38AP units use Fig. 148.
operating modes 5 through 8. The operating mode determines Table 54 — Run Jumper Connection Points
the default parameter values. With these operating modes, the
Motormaster V follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference signal RUN JUMPER
VOLTAGE-Hz OPERATING MODE
present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (–). The AUX Board gener- CONNECTION
ates a 2 to 10 vdc signal that is converted to a 4 to 20 mA sig- 208/230-60
nal by means of a 240 , 1/4 w resistor in series with the 1 TO 2 460-60 5
575-60
positive (+) signal wire. One additional jumper, a Run Jumper
controlled by a relay, is required to configure the drive for 13A TO 2 208-60 6
380-60
operation and input voltage. The jumper termination is deter-
380/415-50
mined by the system voltage and frequency. See Table 54 and 13C TO 2
400-50
8
Fig. 146 for Run Jumper terminations. See Fig. 147 for

1 2 5 6 11 12 2 14 13A 13B 13C 15 25 2 30 31 TXA TXB

a38-7297
Note: All “2” terminals are internally connected to each other.
Fig. 146 — Motormaster V Terminal Block Designations

MOTORMASTER V

L1 T1
1
BLK BLK-1
INCOMING 2
YEL L2 T2 BLK-2
POWER
3
BLU L3 T3 BLK-3

2
GRN/YEL
FROM 240 ¼
25
RED
AUX-J4 OR BLK 2
AUX-J5
YEL
* FR
a38-7298
*See Table 54 for proper termination. VIO 11 14

Fig. 147 — Motormaster V Connection Diagram

EPM L1 L2 L3

LEGEND
EPM — Electronic Programming Module
MMV — Motormaster V

Mode
DANGER

MMV
TERMINAL
BLOCK

T1 T2 T3 B- B+
a38-7299

BUTTONS DISPLAY

Mode

Fig. 148 — Motormaster V Buttons and Mode Display

126
 Table 55 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes
PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION MODE 5 MODE 6 MODE 7 MODE 8
P01 Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line 01 02 01 02
P02 Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz 01 01 01 01
P03 Startup mode: flying restart 06 06 06 06
P04 Stop mode: coast to stop 01 01 01 01
Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,
P05 04 04 04 04
04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22/410A, 06=R134a
P06 TB-14 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P08 TB-30 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P09 TB-31 Output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P10 TB-13A function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P11 TB-13B function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P12 TB-13C function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P13 TB-15 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P14 Control: 01 = Terminal strip 01 01 01 01
P15 Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer 02 02 02 02
P16 Units editing: 02 = whole units 02 02 02 02
P17 Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only 01 01 01 01
P19 Acceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10
P20 Deceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10
P21 DC brake time: 0 0 0 0 0
P22 DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0% 0 0 0 0
P23 Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm 8 8 8 8
P24 Max freq 60 60 50 50
P25 Current limit: (%) 125 110 125 110
P26 Motor overload: 100 100 100 100 100
P27 Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz 60 60 50 50
P28 Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
P29 Accel boost: 0% 0 0 0 0
P30 Slip compensation: 0% 0 0 0 0
P31 Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal 57 57 47 47
P32 Preset spd #2: 0 0 0 0 0
P33 Preset spd #3: 0 0 0 0 0
Preset spd 4 default — R22/410A set point.
P34 TB12-2 open 18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0

P35 Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point. 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6
TB12-2 closed
P36 Preset spd 6 default 0 0 0 0
P37 Preset spd 7 default 0 0 0 0
P38 Skip bandwidth 0 0 0 0
P39 Speed scaling 0 0 0 0
P40 Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz 60 60 50 50
P41 Load scaling: default (not used so NA) 200 200 200 200
P42 Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA) 60 60 60 60
P43 Serial address 1 1 1 1
P44 Password:111 111 111 111 111
Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID
P45 8 8 8 8
mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA
Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used
P46 when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA 60 60 50 50
P47 Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear) 01 01 01 01
P48 Program selection: Program 1 – 12 05 06 07 08
P61 PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID 01 01 01 01
P62 Min feedback = 0 (0V *10) 0 0 0 0
P63 Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10) 50 50 50 50
P64 Proportional gain = 4% 4 4 4 4
P65 Integral gain = .2 .2 .2 .2 .2
P66 PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5 5 5 5 5
P67 Min alarm 0 0 0 0
P68 Max alarm 0 0 0 0
P69 0 - 10 vdc feedback NA NA NA NA
LEGEND
NA — Not Applicable
PID — Proportional Integral Derivative
TB — Terminal Block

127
Changing Motormaster® V Parameters The factory default is 20 F (–28.9 C) and indicates that this
feature is disabled. If an Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor fail-
ure is declared, this feature must be disabled by setting the
CAUTION OAT.L to 20 F (–28.9 C), to allow the unit to operate.
MAINTENANCE REMINDER — The 38AP ComfortLink
It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any controls have the ability to provide a reminder for service per-
programming without consulting Carrier service personnel. sonnel that regularly scheduled condenser coil maintenance is
Unit damage may occur from improper programming. required. Maintenance interval is a field-configurable item.
The service interval should be adjusted for the job site condi-
To change parameter values of the Motormaster V controller: tions. See Table 56.
1. To enter the PROGRAM mode to access the parameters,
press the Mode button. This will activate the password Table 56 — Configuring Maintenance Reminder
prompt (if the password has not been disabled). The dis- RUN STATUSPMCOIL
play will read “00” and the upper right-hand decimal
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
point will be blinking. See Fig. 148.
Range: 0 to 65,500 hrs
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll to the pass- Default: 8760 hrs
SI.CL Coil Cleaning Srvc Int Setting SI.CL to 0 disables
word value (the factory default password is 111) and
press the Mode button to accept the value. the feature.
3. Once the correct password value is entered, the display
will read P01, which indicates that the PROGRAM mode MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL — Minimum load control is
has been accessed. P01 is the first parameter. generally not recommended for split systems. If installed, the
NOTE: If the display flashes “Er,” the password was in- feature must be enabled in the controls. Minimum load control
correct, and the process to enter the password must be re- or hot gas bypass cannot be used in conjunction with the digital
peated. scroll option.
4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll to the de- Minimum load control can only be added to standard com-
sired parameter number. pressor units in the field. This feature will not operate with an
5. Once the desired parameter number is found, press the optional digital compressor and when the digital function is en-
Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The abled (ConfigurationUnitA1.TY=YES). To enable the
upper right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indi- minimum load valve, confirm that the digital compressor op-
cating that the present parameter setting is being dis- tion is disabled and set Minimum Load Valve Select to YES,
played, and that it can be changed by using the up and (ConfigurationOPT1MLV.S=YES). See Table 57.
down buttons. Use the up and down arrow buttons to NOTE: Minimum Load Control and Digital Compressor oper-
change setting. Press Mode to store the new setting and ation cannot be used together.
exit the PROGRAM mode.
Table 57 — Configuring Minimum Load Control
6. To change another parameter, press the Mode button
again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the parameter CONFIGURATIONUNIT
menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode button is Range: NO/YES
pressed within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM Compressor A1
Default: Depends on prod-
mode, the password is not required to access the parame- A1.TY
Digital?
uct configuration
ters. After two minutes, the password must be entered in NO = Not Equipped
Value must be set to NO
order to access the parameters again.
CONFIGURATIONOPT1
The drive uses an electronic programming module (EPM) Range: NO/YES
chip to store the program parameters. This is an EPROM mem- MLV.S
Minimum Load Vlv
Default: NO
Select
ory chip and is accessible from the front of the Motormaster V. Set to YES to activate
It should not be removed with power applied to the VFD. See
Fig. 148. If equipped and enabled, the Minimum Load Control valve
is active as the last stage of capacity when the unit is unloading.
Motormaster V Drive Password Configuration — Changing
MINUTES OFF TIME — The Minutes Off Time feature
the password is not recommended. Once the password is (ConfigurationOPT2DELY) is a user-configurable time
changed, there is no means to retrieve the new password if it is
lost. A new EPM chip must be installed. period used by the control to determine how long unit opera-
tion is delayed after the unit has been enabled. This delay is
To change password, follow the parameter changing in- initiated following the Enable-Off-Remote Switch being
structions in the section Changing Motormaster V Parameters placed in “Enable” position or “Remote” with remote contacts
above. Change parameter P44 to the desired password. Set- closed, or if power is applied/restored to the unit with the
ting P44 to 000 disables the password function. Valid range for Enable-Off-Remote Switch in a position that would allow the
the password is 000 to 999. unit operate. Typically, this time period is configured when
LOW AMBIENT LOCKOUT — The control software has a multiple machines are located on a single site. For example,
feature that allows the user to select an outdoor air temperature this gives the user the ability to prevent all the units from
(OAT) at which mechanical cooling will be disabled. To use restarting at once after a power failure. A value of zero for this
this feature, set OAT Lockout Temperature (Set Points variable does not mean that the unit should be running.
COOLOAT.L) to a value between –19 and 80 F (–28.3 If Minutes Off Time is active, the control will indicate Op-
and 26.7 C). This value should be set to the desired tempera- erating Mode, Minutes Off Time Active (Operating
ture at which no mechanical cooling is required. Any time the ModesMODEMD10 will indicate YES).
feature is active due to the outdoor air temperature being below
the field programmed value, the machine will indicate OAT RAMP LOADING — The Ramp Loading Select feature
Below Lockout Temp (Operating ModesMODE (ConfigurationSLCTRL.S) limits the rate of change of
supply air temperature. This feature is only available for
L.OUT=YES). Mechanical cooling will be enabled once the Machine Control Types (ConfigurationOPT2) C.TYP=1
Outdoor Ambient is 3° F (1.6° C) above the OAT.L set point.
(VAV), C.TYP=3 (Tstat Multi), C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi), and

128
C.TYP=9 (VAV Setpoint). This feature is not available for If Temperature Reset is active, the control will indicate Op-
Machine Control Types C.TYP=4 (2 Stg Tstat), C.TYP=7 (Pct erating Mode, Temperature Reset (Operating Modes
Cap) and C.TYP=8 (Dual Tstat). MODEMD14 will indicate YES).
If the unit is in a cooling mode and configured for ramp NOTE: Temperature Reset is available for a Control Type
loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to (ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP) that uses a Supply Air
change stages of capacity. The control calculates a temperature Temperature set point, such as C.TYP=1 (VAV), C.TYP=3
difference between the control point and supply temperature. If (TSTAT MULTI) or C.TYP=5 (SPT MULTI). While Tem-
the difference is greater than 4° F (2.2° C) and the rate of perature Reset will operate with C.TYP=9 (VAV Setpoint),
change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cool- since the set point temperature is being supplied to the control,
ing Ramp Loading value (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP) at Temperature Reset should be accomplished by the building
the current capacity stage, the control does not allow any management system incorporating any required reset in the set
change to the current stage of capacity. point signal.
If Ramp Loading is active, the control will indicate Operat- Space Temperature Reset — Space temperature must be
ing Mode, Ramp Load Limited (Operating Modes available to the unit controls, either by communication via a
MODEMD05 will indicate YES). See Table 58. network connection or by a wired sensor. Any one of the
accessory space temperature sensors (T55, T56, or T59) can be
Table 58 — Configuring Ramp Loading Control installed for space temperature reset.
CONFIGURATIONOPT2 To use space temperature reset, four variables must be con-
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS figured. In ConfigurationRSET, set these items:
Range: 1 to 9 • Cooling Reset Type (CRST): Configure for the type of
1 (VAV) reset desired, Space Temperature
3 (Tstat Multi)
4 (Tstat 2stg) • Remote – No Reset Temp (RM.NO): Set to the tempera-
5 (SPT Multi) ture that no reset should occur
C.TYP Machine Control Type 7 (PCT Cap) • Remote – Full Reset Temp (RM.F): Set to the tempera-
8 (Dual Tstat) ture that maximum reset is to occur
9 (VAV Setpoint)
Default: 4 • Remote – Degrees Reset (RM.DG): Set to the maximum
Value must be set to 1, 3, 5 amount of reset desired
or 9 The space temperature reset example shown in Table 59 and
CONFIGURATIONSLCT Fig. 149 and 150 provides 0° F (0° C) reset to the Active Set
Range: DSBL/ENBL Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) if Space Temperature
RL.S Ramp Loading Select Default: ENBL
Set to ENBL to activate
(TemperaturesUNITSPT) =72 F (22.2 C), and 6 F (3.3 C)
reset if SPT=68 F (20.0 C). Using these values, if SETP=55 F
Cooling Ramp Range: 0.2 to 2.0
CRMP
Loading Default: 1.0 (12.8 C) and SPT=68 F (20.0 C) or less, the Control Point
(Run StatusVIEWCTPT) will reflect 6 F (3.3 C) reset or
TEMPERATURE RESET — The control system is capable 61 F (16.1 C). If SPT=72 F (22.2 C) or more, the Control Point
of changing the controlling set point based on several different (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) will reflect 0° F (0.0° C) reset
methods: space temperature (SPT), outside air temperature or 55 F (12.8 C). Between SPT=68 F (20.0 C) and SPT=72 F
(OAT), and from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. (22.2 C) a proportional reset amount will be applied to CTPT.
The set point can be adjusted up or down depending on how it
is configured.
Table 59 — Configuring Space Temperature Reset
CONFIGURATIONOPT2
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS EXAMPLE VALUE
Range: 1 to 9 1, 3, 5 or 9
1 (VAV)
3 (Tstat Multi)
4 (Tstat 2stg)
C.TYP Machine Control Type 5 (SPT Multi)
7 (PCT Cap)
8 (Dual Tstat)
9 (VAV Setpoint)
Default: 4
Value must be set to 1, 3, 5 or 9
CONFIGURATIONRSET
0=No Reset (Default) 4
1=4-20 Input
CRST Cooling Reset Type 2=Out Air Temp
3=Return*
4=Space Temp
Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F 72.0 F (22.2 C)
(–17.8 to 51.7 C)
RM.NO Remote – No Reset Temp Default: 125.0 °F (51.7 C)

Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F 68.0 F (20.0 C)

RM.F Remote – Full Reset Temp (–17.8 to 51.7 C)
Default: 0.0 F (–17.8 C)
Range: –30.0 to 30.0 F 6.0 F
RM.DG Remote – Degrees Reset (–16.7 to 16.7 C) (3.3 C)
Default: 0.0 F (0.0 C)
*Not supported.

129
 7

RM.F=68.0 °F

TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °F

Remote - Full Reset Temp
6

RM.DG=6.0 ΔF
3
Remote - Degrees Reset

RM.NO=72.0 °F
1 Remote - No Reset Temp

0
66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74

SPACE TEMPERATURE, °F a38-7300

Fig. 149 — Space Temperature Reset, °F (CRST=4)

3.5
RM.F=20.0 °C
Remote - Full Reset Temp
TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °C

3.0

2.5

2.0

RM.DG=3.3 ΔC
Remote Degrees Reset
1.5

1.0

RM.NO=22.2 °C
Remote - No Reset Temp
0.5

0.0
19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0

SPACE TEMPERATURE, °C a38-7301

Fig. 150 — Space Temperature Reset, °C (CRST=4)

130
Outside Air Temperature Reset — The 38AP units are The Outside Air Temperature Reset example shown in Table
shipped with an outside air sensor, so no additional sensors are 60 and Fig. 151 and 152 provides 0° F (0° C) reset to the
required. Active Set Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) if Outside Air
To use Outside Air Temperature Reset, four variables must Temperature (TemperaturesUNITOAT)=85 F (29.4 C)
be configured. In ConfigurationRSET, set these items: and 6 F (3.3 C) reset if OAT=55 F (12.8 C). Using these val-
ues, if SETP=55 F (12.8 C) and OAT=55 F (12.8 C) or less,
• Cooling Reset Type (CRST): Configure for the type of the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) will reflect
reset desired, Outside Air Temperature 6° F (3.3° C) reset or 61 F (16.1 C). If OAT=85 F (29.4 C) or
• Remote – No Reset Temp (RM.NO): Set to the tempera- more, the control point Run StatusVIEWCTPT will
ture that no reset should occur reflect 0° F (0.0° C) reset or 55 F (12.8 C). Between
• Remote – Full Reset Temp (RM.F): Set to the tempera- OAT=55 F (12.8 C) and OAT=85 F (29.4 C) a proportional
ture that maximum reset is to occur reset amount will be applied to CTPT.
• Remote – Degrees Reset (RM.DG): Set to the maximum
amount of reset desired

Table 60 — Configuring Outside Air Temperature Reset

CONFIGURATIONOPT2
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS EXAMPLE VALUE
Range: 1 to 9 1, 3, 5 or 9
1 (VAV)
3 (Tstat Multi)
4 (Tstat 2stg)
C.TYP Machine Control Type 5 (SPT Multi)
7 (PCT Cap)
8 (Dual Tstat)
9 (VAV Setpoint)
Default: 4
Value must be set to 1, 3, 5 or 9
CONFIGURATIONRSET
0=No Reset (Default) 2
1=4-20 Input
CRST Cooling Reset Type 2=Out Air Temp
3=Return*
4=Space Temp
Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F 85.0 F (29.4 C)
RM.NO Remote – No Reset Temp (–17.8 to 51.7 C)
Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)
Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F 55.0 F (12.8 C)
RM.F Remote – Full Reset Temp (–17.8 to 51.7 C)
Default: 0.0 F (–17.8 C)
Range: –30.0 to 30.0 F 6.0 F
RM.DG Remote – Degrees Reset (–16.7 to 16.7 C) (3.3 C)
Default: 0.0 F (0.0 C)
*Not supported.

131
 7

RM.F=55.0 °F
Remote - Full Reset Temp

TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °F

6

3 RM.DG=6.0 ΔF
Remote Degrees Reset

RM.NO=85.0 °F
Remote - No Reset Temp

0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE, °F A38-7302

Fig. 151 — Outside Air Temperature Reset, °F (CRST=2)

4.0

RM.F=12.8 °C
TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °C

3.5 Remote - Full Reset Temp

3.0

2.5

2.0

RM.DG=3.3 ΔC
Remote Degrees Reset
1.5

1.0

RM.NO=29.4 °C
0.5 Remote - No Reset Temp

0.0
5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
A38-7303
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE, °C

Fig. 152 — Outside Air Temperature Reset, °C (CRST=2)

132
4-20 mA Temperature Reset — The energy management The 4-20 mA input temperature reset example shown in Ta-
module (EMM) must be used for temperature reset using a 4 to ble 61 and Fig. 153 and 154 provides 0° F (0° C) reset to the
20 mA signal. The signal can be monitored to the control at Active Set Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) if RSET =4
the scrolling marquee point 4-20 mA Reset Signal (Inputs mA and 6° F (3.3° C) reset if RSET=20 mA. Using these val-
4-20RSET). ues, if SETP=55 F (12.8 C) and RSET =4 mA, the Control
To use 4-20 mA temperature reset, two variables must be Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) will reflect 0° F (0.0° C)
configured. In ConfigurationRSET, set these items: reset or 55 F (12.8 C). If RSET=20 mA, the Control Point
(Run StatusVIEWCTPT) will reflect 6° F (3.3° C) reset
• Cooling Reset Type (CRST): Configure for the type of or 61 F (16.1 C). Between RSET =4 mA and RSET=20 mA a
reset desired, 4-20 mA Input proportional reset amount will be applied to CTPT.
• MA.DG: Set to the amount of reset desired with a 20 mA
signal. The control will interpolate between 0 degrees reset
at 4 mA and the value entered for MA.DG at 20 mA.

CAUTION
To avoid unit damage, care should be taken when interfac-
ing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to
power supply differences, full wave bridge versus half
wave rectification. The two different power supplies cannot
be mixed. ComfortLink controls use half wave rectifica-
tion. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full
wave bridge signal generating device is used.

Table 61 — Configuring 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset

CONFIGURATIONOPT2
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS EXAMPLE VALUE
Range: 1 to 9 1, 3, 5 or 9
1 (VAV)
3 (Tstat Multi)
4 (Tstat 2stg)
5 (SPT Multi)
C.TYP Machine Control Type
7 (PCT Cap)
8 (Dual Tstat)
9 (VAV Setpoint)
Default: 4
Value must be set to 1, 3, 5 or 9
MODESUB-MODE: CONFIGURATIONRSET
0=No Reset (Default) 1
1=4-20 Input
CRST Cooling Reset Type 2=Out Air Temp
3=Return*
4=Space Temp
Range: –30.0 to 30.0 F 6.0 F
MA.DG 4-20 – Degrees Reset (–16.7 to 16.7 C) (3.3 C)
Default: 0.0 F (0.0 C)
*Not supported.

133
 7

TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °F

6

MA.DG = 6.0 ΔF
3
4-20 - Degrees Reset

0
0 5 10 15 20 25

4-20 mA INPUT SIGNAL, RSET A38-7304

Fig. 153 — 4-20 mA Temperature Reset, °F (CRST=1)

4.0
TEMPERATURE RESET APPLIED TO ACTIVE SETPOINT, °C

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

MA.DG = 3.3 ΔC
1.5 4-20 - Degrees Reset

1.0

0.5

0.0
0 5 10 15 20 25

4-20 mA INPUT SIGNAL, RSET A38-7305

Fig. 154 — 4-20 mA Temperature Reset, °C (CRST=1)

134
Operating Modes — Operating Modes are capacity MD21 (High SCT Circuit A), MD22 (High SCT Circuit B)
overrides that override the normal operation of the unit control. — When these modes are active (Operating Modes
See Table 62. MODEMD21=YES and/or MD22=YES) unit is ON and
D.OIL (Digital Oil Recover Mode) — When this mode is the saturated condensing temperature (SCT) of the circuit is
active (Operating ModesMODED.OIL=YES) the unit is greater than the calculated maximum limit. No additional
ON and the digital compressor has been operating at less than stages of capacity will be added. Unit capacity may be reduced
the standard Maximum A1 Unload Time (Configura- if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by
tionUNITMAX.T) for more than 30 minutes of cumula- reducing condensing temperature. If this condition is encoun-
tive time without an increase in circuit capacity. During this oil tered, check items listed for alerts T122 – Circuit A High Pres-
recovery mode, the compressor will load fully for 30 seconds. sure Trip and T123 – Circuit B High Pressure Trip on
The unit capacity may exceed system requirements. For more page 170.
information, contact your Carrier representative. MD23 (Minimum Comp On Time) — When this mode is
L.OUT (OAT Below Lockout Temp) — When this mode is active (Operating ModesMODEMD23=YES) the unit is
active (Operating ModesMODEL.OUT=YES) the unit is ON, a compressor has just started, and the Minimum Com-
ON and the ambient temperature is below the field pro- pressor On Time timer of 60 seconds is active. Although the
grammed OAT Lockout Temperature. See Low Ambient cooling load may be satisfied, control continues to operate
Lockout on page 128 for additional details. compressor to ensure proper oil return. This may be an indica-
MD05 (Ramp Load Limited) — When this mode is active tion of oversized application or low airflow.
(Operating ModesMODEMD05=YES) the unit capacity MD25 (Low Sound Mode) — This mode is not supported.
is limited. See Ramp Loading on page 128 for details. MDTG (Time Guard Active) — When this mode is active
MD06 (Timed Override in Effect) — When this mode is (Operating ModesMODEMDTG=YES) at least one
active (Operating ModesMODEMD06=YES) the unit is compressor is affected by a Time Guard timer. Any time a
operating under normal capacity control during a scheduled compressor is started, it must remain on for 120 seconds. If a
unoccupied time. See Timed Override on page 63 for addi- compressor is shut off, it must remain off for 180 seconds.
tional information. Unit capacity or compressor staging sequence may be affected
MD09 (Slow Change Override) — When this mode is active if this mode is active. This is part of the compressor protection
(Operating ModesMODEMD09=YES) the supply air algorithm to prevent rapid cycling of a compressor.
temperature is close to and is moving toward the Control Point
(Run StatusVIEWCTPT). While this mode is active, the
control is prohibited from making capacity stage changes.
MD10 (Minimum Off Time Active) — When this mode is
active (Operating ModesMODEMD10=YES) the unit
is prohibited from starting by Minutes Off Time
(ConfigurationOPT2DELY). See Minutes Off Time on
page 128 for additional information.
MD14 (Temperature Reset) — When this mode is active
(Operating ModesMODEMD14=YES) Temperature
Reset is in effect. In this mode, unit is using Temperature Reset
to adjust Active Set Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) and
is currently controlling to the modified set point, (Run Sta-
tusVIEWCTPT). The set point can be modified based on
outdoor air temperature, space temperature, or a 4 to 20 mA
signal. See Temperature Reset on page 129 for additional
information.
MD15 (Demand Limited) — When this mode is active
(Operating ModesMODEMD15=YES) Demand Limit is
in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the unit is being
limited by the demand limit control option. Because of this
limitation, the unit may not be able to produce the desired sup-
ply air temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch
inputs or a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Demand Limit on page 115
for additional information.
MD17 (Low Temperature Cooling) — When this mode is
active (Operating ModesMODEMD17=YES) unit is ON
and the rate of change of the supply air temperature is negative
and decreasing faster than –0.5° F (0.5° C) per minute. Error
between Supply Air Temperature (Run StatusVIEWSAT)
and Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) exceeds
fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the unit if
necessary.
MD18 (High Temperature Cooling) — When this mode is
active (Operating ModesMODEMD18=YES) unit is ON
and the rate of change of the supply air temperature is positive
and increasing. Error between Supply Air Temperature (Run
StatusVIEWSAT) and Control Point (Run Sta-
tusVIEWCTPT) exceeds fixed amount. Control will
automatically load the unit if necessary to better match the
increasing load.

135
 Table 62 — Operating Modes
MODE ITEM EXPANSION DESCRIPTION SYSTEM EFFECT
Digital compressor has been running Digital compressor will load completely.
below standard Maximum A1 Unload supply air temperature may be lower than
D.OIL Digital Oil Recover Mode Time (ConfigurationUNITMAX.T) for Control Point (Run StatusVIEW
more than 30 minutes. Digital compres- CTPT).
sor will load to 100% for 30 seconds.
Ambient temperature is below field config- Unit is not allowed to start.
L.OUT OAT Below Lockout Temp urable setting, causing mechanical cool-
ing to be disabled.
Prevents rapid staging of compressors at May not be able to supply air at the Con-
MD05 Ramp Load Limited
start-up trol Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT)
Unit is operating outside of normal occu- Normal capacity control is enabled.
MD06 Timed Override in Effect pied time period
Supply air temperature is close to and Capacity stage changes are prohibited.
moving toward the Control Point Unit may not supply air at the Control
MD09 Slow Change Override (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) Point
(Run StatusVIEWCTPT)
Unit is prohibited from starting until the Unit is not allowed to start.
MD10 Minutes Off Time Active timer has expired
MD14 Temperature Reset Unit is operating with a modified set point Unit is operating with a modified set point
under normal capacity control.
Unit capacity is being limited by a Unit may not be able to deliver the desired
MD15 Demand Limited
Demand Limit command supply air temperature.
Supply Air Temperature is decreasing Unit may unload.
faster than 0.5 F (0.3 C) and the differ-
MD17 Low Temperature Cooling ence between the Supply Air Tempera-
ture and Control Point (Run
StatusVIEWCTPT) exceeds a calcu-
lated value.
Supply Air Temperature and and its rate Unit will automatically load.
of change are increasing, and the differ-
ence between the Supply Air Tempera-
MD18 High Temperature Cooling ture and Control Point (Run
StatusVIEWCTPT) exceeds a calcu-
lated value.
MD21 High SCT Circuit A No additional stages of capacity will be
Circuit SCT exceeds a calculated limit added. Unit may unload to lower SCT.
MD22 High SCT Circuit B
Compressor will remain running. Supply
MD23 Minimum Comp On Time Compressor has not completed its mini- Air Temperature may be lower than Con-
mum run time
trol Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT).
MD25 Low Sound Mode Not supported Not Supported
May allow the unit to overshoot the set
MDTG Time Guard Active Prevents rapid cycling of a compressor point or not allow a compressor to start if
required.

SERVICE Test the condenser fans, liquid line solenoids and alarm re-
lay by changing the item values from OFF to ON. These dis-
Service Test — The controls system allows for the oper- crete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity
ation of various components in a Service Test mode. While op- for 10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired per-
erating in Service Test mode, outputs can be tested and various centage when testing Motormaster® V controller or number of
components run to confirm proper operation. While operating seconds for the digital unloader solenoid, if equipped. All com-
compressors in Service Test mode, the capacity control algo- pressor outputs can be turned on, but the control will limit the
rithm and all safeties are active. Confirm airflow in the evapo- rate by staging one compressor per minute. Minimum load
rator before starting the unit in Service Test. valve relays/solenoids, if installed, can be tested with the com-
NOTE: Main power must be on for Service Test to function. pressors on or off. The relays under the CMPA or CMPB mode
The Service Test function should be used to verify proper will stay on for 10 minutes if there is no keypad activity. Com-
operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load pressors will stay on until they are turned off by the operator.
valve solenoid (if installed), and remote alarm relay. To use the The Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there
Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored
must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys and Service during this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the ma-
Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory table in Appendix A to chine off, if required. Any other mode or sub-mode can be ac-
enter the mode and display TEST. Press ENTER twice so that cessed, viewed, or changed during the TEST mode. The
OFF flashes. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow MODE item (Run StatusVIEW) will display NO as long as
key to change the TEST value to the ON position and press the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must
ENTER . Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the be changed back to OFF before the unit can be switched to En-
ENABLE position to begin Service Test. Press ESCAPE and able or Remote Control for normal operation.
the up or down key to enter the OUTS, CMPA or CMPB sub-
mode.

136
Compressors
CAUTION
WARNING Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the
machine may result.
Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover
removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, Figure 155 shows the location of each compressor within the
resulting in personal injury or death. unit. Figures 156 and 157 show the compressor operating
envelope.

WARNING
Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor cur-
rents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the
problems described below before installing and running a
replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves
when handling refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning
can cause fire, resulting in personal injury or death.

Compressor Layout Dual Circuit, 38APD

A1

B1 B1 A3
A2
CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX
CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX A2
A1 B2 A2 B2
B1

B1 B2 B3 B3 A1
A1

Top View Top View Top View Top View

Sizes 025-030 Sizes 040-060 Sizes 070-080 Sizes 090-130

Compressor Layout Single Circuit, 38APS

A1 B1
CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX
CONTROL BOX

A1 A2 B2

A2 A3 B3

Top View Top View Top View a38-7306

Sizes 025-030 Sizes 040-050 Size 065

Fig. 155 — Compressor Locations

137
 170

Saturated Condensing Temperature (°F)

160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
a38-7307
Saturated Suction Temperature (°F)
Fig. 156 — Compressor Operating Envelope, °F
Saturated Condensing Temperature (°C)

Saturated Suction Temperature (°C)

Fig. 157 — Compressor Operating Envelope, °C

ENABLING AND DISABLING COMPRESSORS —
Compressors in the 38AP units can be enabled or disabled in
the controls. To enable or disable a compressor, toggle the
value in the ConfigurationSERV menu for each individual
compressor.
COMPRESSOR MOTOR PROTECTION — Two types of
motor protection are used on the scroll compressors.
Compressor Circuit Breakers — Compressors have a man-
ual reset, calibrated trip, magnetic circuit breaker for overcur-
rent protection. Do not bypass connections or increase the size
of the circuit breaker to correct trouble. Determine the cause
and correct it before resetting the breaker.
Advanced Scroll Temperature Protection (ASTP) — All Fig. 158 — Advanced Scroll Temperature
non-digital Copeland compressors are equipped with advanced Protection Label
scroll temperature protection (ASTP). A label located above Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of internal
the terminal box identifies models that contain this technology. discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll com-
See Fig. 158. pressor when the internal temperature reaches approximately
300 F (150 C). At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk
valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which
stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance

138
while the motor continues to run. After the compressor runs for
some time without pumping gas, the motor overload protector CAUTION
will open. The longer the compressor runs unloaded, the longer
it must cool before the bi-metal disk resets. See Fig. 159 for ap-
Restoring the compressor sooner may cause a destructive
proximate reset times.
temperature build up in the scrolls.
To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped
and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor For this reason, module power must never be switched with
will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to 90 the control circuit voltage.
minutes later. Advanced Scroll Temperature Protection will re-
Current sensing boards monitor to the compressor current.
set automatically before the motor protector resets, which may The ComfortLink control system takes advantage of the com-
take up to 2 hours. pressor overload operation by locking out the compressor if
current draw is not detected. This will prevent unnecessary
compressor cycling on a fault condition until corrective action
120 can be taken.
Recommended Cooling Time

110
100 Kriwan Motor Protection Module Troubleshooting — Cope-
90 land models with a “TW” in the electrical code (i.e.,
80 ZP182KCETWD), have a motor overload system that consists
70
of an external Kriwan electronic control module. These have
(Minutes)

60
50 been replaced by the CoreSense* communication module for
40 motor protection. This section is included for reference, and
30 contains instructions for replacing the Kriwan module with the
20
10
CoreSense module in the field.
0 Follow the steps listed below to troubleshoot the Kriwan
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 module in the field. See wiring diagram on terminal box cover,
Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes) or Fig. 160.
NOTE: Times are approximate. Various factors, including high humidity, high
ambient temperature, and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-
down times. WARNING
Fig. 159 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover
Time After Compressor is Stopped removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire,
MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION resulting in personal injury or death.
Copeland* Compressors Models with Electrical Code TF
— Models with a “TF” in the electrical code (i.e., WARNING
ZP182KCETFE) have an internal line break motor overload
located in the center of the Y of the motor windings. This over- Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor cur-
load disconnects all three legs of the motor from power in case rents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the
of an over-current or over-temperature condition. The overload problems described below before installing and running a
reacts to a combination of motor current and motor winding replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves
temperature. The internal overload protects against single when handling refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning
phasing. Time must be allowed for the motor to cool down can cause fire, resulting in personal injury or death.
before the overload will reset. If current monitoring to the
compressor is available, the system controller can take advan-
tage of the compressor internal overload operation. The con- CAUTION
troller can lock out the compressor if current draw is not
coincident with contactor energizing, implying that the com- Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the
pressor has shut off on its internal overload. This will prevent machine may result.
unnecessary compressor cycling on a fault condition until cor-
rective action can be taken.
Copeland Compressors Models with Electrical Code TW or
TE

CAUTION
The electronic motor protection module is a safety device
that must not be bypassed or compressor damage may
result.
Models with a “TW” or “TE” in the electrical code (i.e.,
ZP182KCETWD or ZP182KCETED) have a motor overload
system that consists of an external electronic control module
1 2 3
connected to a chain of four thermistors embedded in the motor
windings. The module will trip and remain off for a minimum LEGEND
of 30 minutes if the motor temperature exceeds a preset point 1 — Kriwan Motor Protection Module Power
to allow the scrolls to cool down after the motor temperature 2 — Kriwan Control Circuit Connections
3 — Motor Thermal Sensor
limit has been reached. It may take as long as two hours for the
motor to cool down before the overload will reset.
Fig. 160 — Kriwan Motor Protection Wiring
NOTE: Turning off power to the module will reset it immedi-
ately. *Trademarks of Emerson Climate Technologies.

139
1. De-energize control circuit and module power. Remove CoreSense Replacement of Kriwan Motor Protection
the control circuit wires from the module (terminals M1 Module — The Kriwan module has been replaced by the Core-
and M2). Connect a jumper across these control circuit Sense communication module for motor protection. Minor
wires. This will bypass the control contact of the module. wiring changes are required as described below.

CAUTION WARNING
The motor protection system within the compressor is now Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
bypassed. Use this configuration to temporarily test mod- off all power to this equipment during installation and ser-
ule only. vice. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag
all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power
2. Re-energize the control circuit and module power. If the until work is completed.
compressor will not operate with the jumper installed,
then the problem is external to the solid-state protection
system. If the compressor operates with the module by- WARNING
passed but will not operate when the module is reconnect-
ed, then the control circuit relay in the module is open.
Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover
Remove the temporary jumper installed in Step 1.
removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire,
3. The thermistor protection chain now needs to be tested to resulting in personal injury or death.
determine if the module’s control circuit relay is open due
to excessive internal temperatures or a faulty component. Removing the Kriwan motor protection module:
Check the thermistor protection chain located in the com- 1. Disconnect and lock out the high voltage and control
pressor as follows: voltage supply to the unit.
a. De-energize control circuit and module power. 2. Using a straight blade screwdriver, carefully depress the
b. Remove the sensor leads from the module (S1 and tabs holding the terminal cover to the terminal box to re-
S2). move the terminal cover. Before proceeding, use a volt
c. Measure the resistance of the thermistor protection meter to verify that the power has been disconnected
chain through these sensor leads with an ohm from the unit.
meter. 3. Using wire markers, label the M1, M2, T1, and T2 wires
that are connected to the Kriwan module. Using needle
nose pliers, remove the M1, M2, T1, T2, S1 and S2 wires
CAUTION from the Kriwan motor protector module.
Use an ohmmeter with a maximum of 9 volts to check the 4. Gently bend the holding tabs holding the Kriwan module
sensor chain. The sensor chain is sensitive and easily dam- in the terminal box and remove the Kriwan module from
aged; no attempt should be made to check continuity the terminal box. See Fig. 161.
through it with anything other than an ohmmeter. The 5. Take note of the S1-S2 plug orientation on the compres-
application of any external voltage to the sensor chain may sor thermistor fusite. Remove the S1-S2 wire harness and
cause damage requiring the replacement of the compressor. plug from the compressor.
d. The diagnosis of this resistance reading is as fol-
lows:
• 200 to 2250 ohms: Normal operating range
• 2750 ohms or greater: Compressor overheated. HOLDING
Allow time to cool. TAB
• Zero resistance: Shorted sensor circuit. Replace the
compressor.
• Infinite resistance: Open sensor circuit. Replace
the compressor.
4. If the resistance reading is abnormal, remove the sensor
connector plug from the compressor and measure the re-
sistance at the sensor fusite pins. This will determine if
the abnormal reading was due to a faulty connector. HOLDING
TAB
5. On initial start-up, and after any module trip, the resis- a38-7310
tance of the sensor chain must be below the module reset
point before the module circuit will close. Reset values Fig. 161 — Kriwan Motor Protection Module
are 2250 to 3000 ohms. Removal
6. If the sensor chain has a resistance that is below 2250
ohms, and the compressor will run with the control circuit Installing the CoreSense communications module:
bypassed, but will not run when connected properly, the 1. A new S1-S2 thermistor wiring harness is shipped with
solid-state module is defective and should be replaced. the CoreSense kit and must be used. The wiring harness
The replacement module must have the same supply volt- connector block should be fully inserted on the three pins
age rating as the original module. in the orientation shown in Fig. 162 for proper operation.

140
 RED

BLACK

WHITE
INSTALL IN THIS HOLDING
ORIENTATION TAB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T2 T1 L1 L2 L3
THERMISTOR WIRE
HARNESS PLUGGED
BLACK INTO 2X2 SOCKET
WHITE
A38-7313

HOLDING
BLUE
TAB

Fig. 164 — CoreSense Communication Module

Mounting

CoreSense Communications Module Troubleshooting —

Copeland models with a "TE" in the electrical code (i.e.,
A38-7311
ZP182KCETED) have a motor overload system that consists
of an external CoreSense communication electronic control
Fig. 162 — Compressor Motor Sensor Harness module.
Installation Motor thermistors are connected to the CoreSense commu-
nication module via a 2x2 plug (Fig. 165).
2. Review the DIP switch settings on the CoreSense mod-
ule. DIP switch no. 1 should be ON (up position) and all
other DIP switches should be OFF (down position). See
Fig. 163. SCROLL
MOTOR
PTC NTC CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT (NOT USED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
O ON
FOR FUTURE COMMON
F
F USE CONNECTION
a38-7308

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

ROCKER DOWN A38-7812

Fig. 165 — CoreSense Communications

Fig. 163 — CoreSense Communication DIP Motor Thermistor Plug
Switch Settings for Kriwan Retrofit
The CoreSense communications module has field configurable
3. Install the CoreSense module in the compressor terminal DIP switches for addressing and configuring the module. The
box as shown in Fig. 164, with the tabs holding the DIP switches should be addressed as shown in Table 63.
module in place. Route the thermistor wire harness as The CoreSense communication module has a green and a
shown and plug the harness into the 2x2 socket on the red light-emitting diode (LED). A solid green LED indicates
CoreSense module. the module is powered and operation is normal. A solid red
4. Connect the previously labeled M1, M2, T1, and T2 LED indicates an internal problem with the module. If a solid
wires to the appropriate terminals on the CoreSense mod- red LED is encountered, power down the module (interrupt the
ule. T1-T2 power) for 30 seconds to reboot the module. If a solid
5. Connect the L1, L2, and L3 phase sensing wires to the red LED is persistent, change the CoreSense module.
L1, L2, and L3 compressor terminal block connections.
See the compressor terminal cover diagram for identica-
tion of the L1, L2, and L3 terminal block connections.
6. Double-check the installation and make sure all connec-
tions are secure. Install the compressor terminal cover.
The CoreSense retrofit is complete and the system can be
put back into service.

141
 The CoreSense module communicates warning codes via a • Code 2 – Open/Shorted Motor Thermistor: The module
green flashing LED. Warning codes do not result in a trip or will flash the red Alert LED 2 times indicating the motor
lockout condition. Alert codes are communicated via a red PTC thermistor circuit has a resistance value greater than
flashing LED. Alert codes will result in a trip condition and 2200  or less than 100 . that indicates an open/shorted
possibly a lockout condition. See wiring diagram on terminal thermistor chain. A Code 2 Alert will open the M2-M1
box cover, or Fig. 166. The flash code corresponds to the num- contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the
ber of LED flashes, followed by a pause, and then the flash M2-M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the motor
code is repeated. A lockout condition produces a red flash, fol- PTC circuit is back in the normal range. The module will
lowed by a pause, a solid red, a second pause, and then repeat- lock out the compressor if the trip condition exists for
ed. Table 64 lists the flash code information for Warning and longer than 6 hours. Once the module has locked out the
Alert codes along with code reset and troubleshooting informa- compressor, a power cycle will be required to clear the
tion. lockout.
• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the red
LEDS Alert LED 3 times indicating the compressor is locked
DIP SWITCHES
out due to short cycling. A Code 3 Alert will open the
MOTOR THERMAL
SENSORS
M2-M1 contacts. Code 3 will be enabled when the Short
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R Cycling DIP switch (no. 10) is ON (in the up position)
G JUMPER and the compressor has exceeded the number of short
cycles configured by the user in a 24-hour period. Once
COMMUNICATION the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle
PORT will be required to clear the lockout.
• Code 4 – Scroll High Temperature: The module will
M2 M1
flash the red Alert LED 4 times indicating the scroll NTC
circuit is less than 2400 .. A Code 4 Alert will open the
T2 T1 L1 L2 L3 CONTROL CIRCUIT M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes
CONNECTIONS and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the
scroll NTC circuit is higher than 5100 .. The module
will lock out the compressor if the number of Code 4
MODULE COMPRESSOR PHASE
Alerts exceeds the user configurable number of Code 4
POWER SENSING A38-7314 events within a 24-hour period. Once the module has
locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be
required to clear the lockout.
Fig. 166 — CoreSense Communication Motor • Code 5 – Not used.
Protection Wiring • Code 6 – Missing Phase: The module will flash the red
Alert LED 6 times indicating a missing phase in one of
Warning Codes (Green LED Flash Code): the three leads to the compressor. A Code 6 Alert will
• Code 1 – Loss of Communication: The module will flash open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 5
the green Warning LED one time indicating the module minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the missing
has not communicated with the master controller for lon- phase condition is not present. The module will lock out
ger than 5 minutes. Once communication is reinitiated, the compressor after 10 consecutive Code 6 Alerts. Once
the Warning will be cleared. The 38AP units do not sup- the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle
port the communication capability of this module. will be required to clear the lockout.
• Code 2 – Reserved For Future Use • Code 7 – Reverse Phase: The module will flash the red
• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the green Alert LED 7 times indicating a reverse phase in two of
Warning LED three times indicating the compressor has the three leads to the compressor. A Code 7 Alert will
short cycled more than 48 times in 24 hours. A short open the M2-M1 contacts. The module will lock out the
cycle is defined as compressor runtime of less than 1 compressor after one Code 7 Alert. A power cycle will
minute. The Warning will be activated when the “Short be required to clear the lockout.
Cycling” DIP Switch (no. 10) is OFF (in the down posi- • Code 8 – Not used.
tion). When fewer than 48 short cycles are accumulated • Code 9 – Module Low Voltage: The module will flash
in 24 hours the Warning code will be cleared. the red Alert LED 9 times indicating low module volt-
• Code 4 – Open/Shorted Scroll Thermistor: The module age, less than 18 vac on the T2-T1 terminals for more
will flash the green Warning LED four times, indicating than 5 seconds. A Code 9 Alert will open the M2-M1
that the scroll NTC thermistor has a resistance value that contacts. The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and the M2-
indicates an open/shorted thermistor. The Warning will M1 contacts will close if the T2-T1 voltage is above the
be cleared when the resistance value is in the normal reset value in 18 to 30 vac.
range. The 38AP units do not utilize a scroll thermistor.
• Code 5 – Not used. Resetting Alert codes can be accomplished manually by cy-
cling power to the module (disconnect T2 or T1 for 5 seconds).
Alert/Lockout Codes (Red LED Flash Code): If the fault that initiated the Alert code is absent after the reset
• Code 1 – Motor High Temperature: The module will is performed, the Alert code will be cleared and CoreSense
flash the red Alert LED one time indicating the motor module will allow normal operation. If the fault is still present
PTC circuit has exceeded 4500 .. A Code 1 Alert will after the reset is performed, the fault code will continue to be
open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 displayed via the green or red flashing LED.
minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the resis- Troubleshooting procedures described for the Kriwan mod-
tance of the motor PTC circuit is below 2750 .. Five ule section (page 139) are applicable to the CoreSense commu-
consecutive Code 1 Alerts will lock out the compressor. nication module.
Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power
cycle will be required for the lockout to be cleared.

142
 Table 63 — CoreSense Communication Module DIP Switch Settings
COPELAND DIP SWITCH
ELECTRICAL
CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
“TE” ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
“TW”* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
*Settings for Kriwan retrofit. See “CoreSense Replacement of
Kriwan Motor Protection Module” on page 140.

Table 64 — CoreSense Communication Module LED Flash Codes

LED STATUS FAULT CONDITION FAULT CODE FAULT CODE RESET TROUBLESHOOTING
DESCRIPTION INFORMATION
None, normal operation Module is powered and Not applicable None
SOLID GREEN
under normal operation
Module malfunction Module has an internal fault Not applicable 1. Reset module by removing
SOLID RED power from T1-T2.
2. Replace module.
WARNING LED FLASH
Loss of communication Module and Master Control- Automatic when communi- Not Supported. Check DIP
GREEN FLASH CODE 1 ler have lost communica- cations are re-established Switch settings.
tions with each other for
more than 5 minutes
GREEN FLASH CODE 2 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min- Fewer than 48 short cycles 38AP controls do not allow
ute. Number of short cycles in 24 hours this operation normally. Con-
GREEN FLASH CODE 3
exceeds 48 in a 24-hour firm proper wiring and DIP
period. switch settings.
Open/Shorted Scroll Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
GREEN FLASH CODE 4
Thermistor
GREEN FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
ALERT/LOCKOUT LED FLASH
High motor temperature Thermistor resistance Thermistor resistance less 1. Check power supply.
greater than 4500 . Lock- than 2750  and 30 min- 2. Check system charge and
RED FLASH CODE 1 out occurs after 5 alerts. utes have elapsed superheat.
3. Check compressor
contactor.
Open/shorted motor Thermistor resistance Terhmistor resistance is 1. Check for poor connec-
thermistor greater than 4500 , or less between 100 and 2750  tions at module and therm-
than 100 . Lockout occurs and 30 minutes have istor fusite.
RED FLASH CODE 2 after 6 hours. elapsed 2. Check continuity of therm-
istor wiring harness.
3. Check for an open thermis-
tor circuit.
Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min- Interrupt power to T2-T1 38AP controls do not allow
ute. Lockout if the number this operation normally. Con-
RED FLASH CODE 3 of alerts exceeds the num- firm proper wiring.
ber configured by the user
in 24 hours.
RED FLASH CODE 4 Scroll high temperature Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
RED FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Missing phase Missing phase detected. After 5 minutes and missing 1. Check incoming power.
Lockout after 10 consecu- phase condition is not pres-2. Check fuses or circuit
RED FLASH CODE 6 tive alerts. ent breakers.
3. Check compressor contac-
tor.
Reverse phase Reverse phase detected. Interrupt power to T2-T1 1. Check incoming power
Lockout after 1 alert. phase sequence
RED FLASH CODE 7 2. Check compressor contac-
tor
3. Check module phase wir-
ing A-B-C.
RED FLASH CODE 8 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Module low voltage Less than 18 vac supplied After 5 minutes and voltage This alert does not result in a
to module is between 18 and 30 vac lockout fault.
RED FLASH CODE 9 1. Verify correct 24 vac mod-
ule is installed.
2. Check for a wiring error.

143
Compressor Discharge Check Valve — A disk-type check
valve in the discharge of the compressor prevents high pressure WARNING
discharge gas from flowing rapidly back through the compres-
sor at shutdown. This same check valve prevents a high to low
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
side bypass in multiple compressor circuits.
off all power to this equipment during installation and ser-
COMPRESSOR FUNCTIONAL CHECK vice. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag
all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power
WARNING until work is completed.

Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover 1. Open and tag all disconnects following proper lock-out
removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, tag-out procedures. Use proper personal protective equip-
resulting in personal injury or death. ment.
2. Remove the junction box cover and disconnect the com-
pressor power and ground connections. See Fig. 167 or
WARNING 168.
Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor cur- 3. Disconnect and remove the crankcase heater from the
rents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the compressor. Save the ground screw for re-installation
problems described below before installing and running a later.
replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves 4. If the compressor is equipped with a motor protection
when handling refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning module (Kriwan or CoreSense), disconnect the wiring to
can cause fire, resulting in personal injury or death. the device.
5. Remove the cable from the compressor junction box.
CAUTION 6. If the compressor is a digital compressor, remove the dig-
ital unloader solenoid (Fig. 169). Save the mounting
Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the screw for re-installation later. Remove the harness from
machine may result. the junction box.
7. Isolate the circuit and remove the refrigerant using stan-
A functional compressor test with the suction service valve dard refrigeration techniques.
closed to check how low the compressor will pull suction pres-
sure is not a good indication of how well a compressor is per- 8. If the circuit high pressure switch (HPS), discharge tem-
forming. Such a test may damage a scroll compressor. The perature thermistor (DTT), return gas thermistor (RGT),
following diagnostic procedure should be used to evaluate discharge pressure transducer (DPT), or suction pressure
whether a Copeland scroll compressor is working properly. transducer (SPT) are in an area where brazing could dam-
age the sensor, remove the device from the line and se-
1. Proper voltage to the unit should be verified. cure it out of the way.
2. The normal checks of motor winding continuity and short 9. For tandem and trio compressor circuits, remove the oil
to ground should be made to determine if the inherent from the compressors as described in the section Remov-
overload motor protector has opened or if an internal mo- ing Oil on page 149. This is required to cut (tandem com-
tor short or ground fault has developed. If the protector pressor circuits) or remove (trio compressor circuits) the
has opened, the compressor must be allowed to cool suffi- oil equalizer line. For tandem compressor circuits, cut the
ciently to allow it to reset. oil equalizer with a tubing cutter in a convenient place to
3. Proper indoor and outdoor blower/fan operation should be able to reconnect with a coupling.
be verified. 10. Remove the bolts securing the compressor. Be sure to
4. With service gages connected to suction and discharge save all of the mounting hardware for compressor instal-
pressure fittings, turn on the compressor. If suction pres- lation.
sure falls below normal levels, the system is either low on
charge or there is a flow blockage in the system.
5. If suction pressure does not drop and discharge pressure
does not rise to normal levels, reverse any two of the
compressor power leads and reapply power to make sure
compressor was not wired to run in reverse direction. If
pressures still do not move to normal values, the com-
pressor may be faulty. Reconnect the compressor leads as
originally configured.
6. To test if the compressor is pumping properly, the com-
pressor current draw must be compared to published
compressor performance curves using the operating pres-
sures and voltage of the system. If the measured average
current deviates more than ±15% from published values,
a faulty compressor may be indicated. A current imbal-
ance exceeding 15% of the average on the three phases
should be investigated further. NOTE: See wire color codes in
Crankcase Heater Wiring sec-
SEE
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT — All models contain NOTE tion, page 146.
scroll compressors and have from one to six compressors.
38APD025-030 units utilize a single compressor per circuit. a38-7315
These compressors are mounted directly to the unit base. All
other sizes have multiple compressors per circuit. Multiple Fig. 167 — Compressor Junction Box Without
compressor circuits are mounted in sets on mounting rails. Motor Protection Module

144
 14. Before moving the compressor into its final location, in-
stall the mounting grommets on the compressor.
15. Carefully move the compressor into place on the unit.
All compressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use
care and extreme caution when lifting and moving com-
pressors.
16. Secure the compressor using the mounting hardware re-
moved in Step 10. Tighten mounting hardware to torque
values listed in Table 65.
17. Using new fittings and tubing, reconnect the suction and
discharge lines. In tandem compressor circuits, the oil
equalizer line for the new compressor should be as close
to the original as possible. Make the connections using
proper service techniques. In trio compressor circuits, re-
SEE connect the oil equalizer line. Be sure to use a new O ring
NOTE NOTE: See wire color codes in to make the connection. Proper torque values are listed in
Crankcase Heater Wiring sec- Table 65.
tion, page 146.
18. Replace the liquid line filter drier.
a38-7316
19. If the compressor failure was as a result of a motor burn,
install a suction line filter drier. This device must be re-
Fig. 168 — Compressor Junction Box With Motor moved after 72 hours.
Protection Module 20. Leak check all braze connections and repair if necessary.
21. Evacuate the circuit using proper service techniques.
22. Knock the same holes out of the new compressor junction
box, if required, and install the cable connectors from the
old compressor.
23. Install the crankcase heater on the compressor as de-
scribed in the section Crankcase Heater Mounting on
page 146 and wire the crankcase heater as described in
the same section. Crankcase heater position is critical to
proper operation.
24. For compressors with the motor protection module, wire
the power wiring and control wiring as shown in Fig. 168.
Be sure the correct motor protection module is installed.
Copeland replacement compressors can be shipped with
one of two motor protection modules, Kriwan or Core-
Sense communication module. Replacement compres-
a38-7317 sors shipped with Kriwan motor protection modules are
shipped with two solid-state motor protection modules. A
120/240-volt module is installed and a 24-volt module is
shipped with the compressor. Replacement compressors
Fig. 169 — Digital Unloader Solenoid Valve with CoreSense modules are shipped with a voltage spe-
cific solid-state motor protection module. The 38AP units
require the 24-volt module be field installed. Failure to in-
11. Using a tubing cutter, cut the suction and discharge lines stall the 24-volt module will result in a compressor failure
in an area of the manifold that can be reconnected with a alarm. For compressors without a motor protection mod-
coupling. ule, install the motor plug by hand only. See Fig. 167.
12. Carefully remove the compressor from the unit. All com-
pressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use care and
extreme caution when lifting and moving compressors. CAUTION
The molded electrical plug should be installed by hand to
WARNING properly seat the plug on the electrical terminals. To avoid
damage, the plug should not be struck with a hammer or
All compressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use care any other device.
and extreme caution when lifting and moving compressors
to avoid personal injury and equipment damage. Table 65 — Compressor Fastener Recommended
Torque Values
13. The replacement compressor will come with an oil
charge. If the compressor will be mounted in a tandem or FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE
trio compressor circuit, the oil must be drained below the COMPRESSOR SLED 7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)
MOUNTING BOLTS
connection point. Be sure to measure the amount of oil re-
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING 7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)
moved and replace it with new oil once the assembly is BOLTS
complete. In tandem compressor applications, while con- COMPRESSOR POWER 24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7 to 3.2 N-m)
necting the oil equalizer line, it is recommended that the CONNECTIONS
compressor be tipped back approximately 12 degrees COMPRESSOR GROUND 14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)
from the horizontal to move the oil away from the fitting TERMINAL CONNECTION
so any remaining oil moves away from the oil equalizer TRIO COMPRESSOR
ASSEMBLY OIL EQUALIZER
74 to 81 ft-lb (100 to 110 N-m)
connection point. CONNECTION

145
25. If the compressor is a digital compressor, connect the dig-
ital unloader solenoid as shown in Fig. 169.
0.51-0.71 in.
[13-18 mm]
CAUTION
Do not start the compressor while the system is in a deep
vacuum. Compressor failure may occur.
26. Recharge the compressors with new oil as described in
the section Adding Oil on page 147. Fig. 171 — Copeland ZP/ZPD154,182 Crankcase
27. Charge the circuit as described in the Start-Up section on Heater Location
page 41.
28. Check the operation of the compressor.
CRANKCASE HEATER MOUNTING — All 38AP units
have crankcase heaters as standard equipment. It is important
that the crankcase heater be tight to the compressor shell and in 1.25-1.77 in.
proper location. See Table 66 and Fig. 170-174 for proper loca- [32-45 mm]
tion. Crankcase heaters should be tightened to 20 to 25 in.-lb
(2.26 to 2.82 N-m).
Table 66 — Crankcase Heater Location
a38-7320
CRANKCASE HEATER LOCATION Fig. 172 — Copeland ZP235 Crankcase Heater
SERIAL
UNIT NUMBER CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B Location
COMPRESSOR(S) COMPRESSOR(S)
38APD025 — Fig. 170 Fig. 170
38APD027 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171
38APD030 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171
38APD040 — Fig. 170 Fig. 170
38APD050 — Fig. 170 Fig. 171
38APD060 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171
38APD070 — Fig. 171 Fig. 170
38APD080 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171
38APD090 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171 2.48-2.75 in.
[63-70 mm] a38-7321
38APD100 — Fig. 171 Fig. 171
PSN 1714Q Fig. 171 Fig. 172 Fig. 173 — Copeland ZP236,296 Crankcase
38APD115
SSN 1714Q Fig. 171 Fig. 173 Heater Location
PSN 1714Q Fig. 171 Fig. 174
38APD115
SSN 1714Q Fig. 171 Fig. 173
38APS025 — Fig. 170 —
38APS027 — Fig. 171 —
38APS030 — Fig. 171 —
38APS040 — Fig. 171 — 1.57-1.97 in.
[40-50 mm]
38APS050 — Fig. 171 —
PSN 1714Q — Fig. 172
38APS065
SSN 1714Q — Fig. 173
a38-7322
LEGEND
PSN — Prior Serial Number
SSN — Starting Serial Number Fig. 174 — Copeland ZP295 Crankcase Heater
Location

0.55-0.95 in. CRANKCASE HEATER WIRING — Crankcase heaters are

[14-24 mm] specific to unit voltage. Each crankcase heater has a color-cod-
ed tag to indicate voltage. Table 67 identifies tag color code for
each voltage. See Fig. 167 and 168 for compressor junction
box connection information
Table 67 — Crankcase Heater Color-Coded Tags
UNIT POWER SUPPLY TAG COLOR
Fig. 170 — Copeland ZP/ZPD103, 120,137 208/230-3-60
Crankcase Heater Location 380-3-60 Yellow
380/415-3-50
460-3-60 Red
575-3-60 Blue

146
OIL CHARGE checking oil level. Oil levels above the recommended level
can lead to poor system performance.
CAUTION Adding Oil — Add oil to the oil equalizer Schrader valve on
tandem compressor sets and the compressor Schrader valve on
trio and single compressor circuits. (See Fig. 175 and 176.)
The compressor in a Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) system When oil can be seen at the bottom of the sight glass, add oil in
uses a polyolester (POE) oil. This is extremely hygro- 5 oz (0.15 L) increments, each of which is approximately 1/8 in.
scopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can
absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for (3.2 mm) oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes, then
shut off to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil
HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all necessary precau-
tions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure level is present.
to do so could result in possible equipment damage. NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved
sources are:
Puron systems use a polyolester (POE) oil. Use only Carrier Totaline® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3MAF POE P903-1601
approved compressor oil. Table 68 lists indicates the factory oil
charge per compressor and the cold oil recharge amount. Mobil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EAL Arctic 32-3MA
Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF
visible in compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has
from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. All compressors must be off when been exposed to atmosphere.

Table 68 — Factory/Recharge Oil Charge Quantity per Compressor

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B
OIL CHARGE PER OIL CHARGE PER
UNIT
COMPRESSOR* QTY COMPRESSOR, oz. (L) COMPRESSOR* QTY COMPRESSOR, oz. (L)
FACTORY RECHARGE FACTORY RECHARGE
38APD025 ZP/ZPD137 1 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2) ZP137 1 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2)
38APD027 ZP/ZPD154 1 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP154 1 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD030 ZP/ZPD182 1 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 1 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD040 ZP/ZPD120 2 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2) ZP103 2 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2)
38APD050 ZP/ZPD137 2 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2) ZP154 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD060 ZP/ZPD154 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD070 ZP/ZPD182 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD080 ZP/ZPD182 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD090 ZP/ZPD154 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
38APD100 ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1)
ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP235 3 158 (4.7) 148 (4.4)
38APD115
ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP236 3 152 (4.5) 142 (4.2)
ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP295 3 230 (6.8) 217 (6.4)
38APD130
ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) ZP296 3 152 (4.5) 142 (4.2)
38APS025 ZP/ZPD137 2 110 (3.2) 110 (3.2) — — — —
38APS027 ZP/ZPD154 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) — — — —
38APS030 ZP/ZPD182 2 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) — — — —
38APS040 ZP/ZPD154 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) — — — —
38APS050 ZP/ZPD182 3 110 (3.2) 106 (3.1) — — — —
— — — — ZP235 3 158 (4.7) 148 (4.4)
38APS065
— — — — ZP236 3 152 (4.5) 142 (4.2)
*Standard compressor model numbers start with ZP. Digital com-
pressor model numbers start with ZPD.

147
 SUCTION RGT B SPT B
SCHRADER B

SPT A
RGT A

SUCTION
SCHRADER A

HPS A

DPT A

OIL EQUALIZER
HPS B LINE

DTT A DPT B

OIL EQUALIZER
LINE

OIL SIGHT
LEGEND GLASS
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor
SPT — Space Temperature Sensor

Fig. 175 — Typical Tandem Compressor Assembly

RGT A
SPT A

SUCTION
SCHRADER A

HPS A

DPT A

DTT A

OIL ADD
LOCATION

OIL SIGHT
GLASS

LEGEND
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor
SPT — Space Temperature Sensor

Fig. 176 — Typical Trio Compressor Assembly

148
Removing Oil — If the oil level is determined to be too high, Table 70 — Replacement Modules
oil can be removed from the Schrader fitting on the compres-
sors for the single and trio compressor circuits. Remove oil MODULE
REPLACEMENT PART NUMBER
(WITH SOFTWARE)
from the Schrader fitting on the oil equalizer tube for the tan-
dem compressor circuits. Main Base Board (MBB) 38AP501672
Scrolling Marquee Display HK50AA031
If the complete oil charge must be removed, an oil dip tube
Energy Management Module
assembly is required. The oil dip tube assembly is inserted into (EMM)
30GT515218
the compressor oil sight glass assembly. Oil dip tube assem- Navigator Display HK50AA033
blies are available through Carrier Replacement Components.
Compressor Expansion
See Table 69. Board (CXB)
30GT515219

Table 69 — Oil Dip Tube Assemblies Auxiliary Board (AUX) 32GB500442E

COPELAND COMPRESSOR Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 38AP units (completed
CARRIER PART NUMBER USAGE at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. This infor-
30RA680018 ZP/ZPD103,120,137,154,182 mation is needed later in this procedure. If the checklist does
30RA680041 ZP235 not exist, fill out the current information in the Configuration
30RA680040 ZP236, 296
mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and config-
urations as needed for this particular installation.
30RA680039 ZP295
Leaving the oil dip tube assembly in place is not recom-
mended. See the section Replacing the Sight Glass below for WARNING
installation instructions.
Electrical shock can cause personal injury. Disconnect all
COMPRESSOR AND OIL EQUALIZER LINE SIGHT electrical power before servicing.
GLASSES — Compressors in single and tandem circuit ar-
rangements have oil sight glasses located on the compressors 1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect
(Fig. 175 and 176). all wires from the defective module by unplugging its
Replacing the Sight Glass — The sight glass seal is accom- connectors.
plished with an O ring. Do not reuse O ring. 2. To remove the defective module, remove its mounting
To install or replace the compressor sight glass, torque the screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and remove the mod-
sight glass to 50 to 58 ft-lb (68 to 78 N-m). ule from the control box. Save the screws for later use.
If the sight glass is on the oil equalizer line, torque the sight 3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switch-
glass to 25 to 30 ft-lb (34 to 40 N-m). Be sure to use a back-up es (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the
wrench to install the sight glass on the oil equalizer line. defective module.
NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to
Control Module Service avoid electrostatic discharge.
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION — Loss of communication 4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new
issues can be found on the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) module for return to Carrier.
or Local Equipment Network (LEN). See the specific section
below. 5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a
Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) — Loss of communication
with CCN will result in the unit entering stand-alone mode. In 6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Naviga-
this case check CCN wiring to the machine. The CCN com- tor™ device replacement, make sure the plug is installed
munications with external control systems can be affected by at LVT in the LEN connector.
high frequency electrical noise generated by the Motormaster 7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring
V control. Ensure unit is well grounded to eliminate ground power.
currents along communication lines. 8. Verify the Enable/Off/Remote contact switch is in the
Local Equipment Network (LEN) — Loss of communica- OFF position.
tions with the LEN is typically an internal wiring issue or a 9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs
shorted input or output to a control module. Check the wiring, blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking
LEN wiring and input and output wiring. and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator display is
CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT — The Com- communicating correctly.
fortLink replacement modules are shown in Table 70. If the 10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points
Main Base Board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all con- and schedules. Return the Enable/Off/Remote contact
figuration data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table switch to its previous position.
and verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and
OPT2 are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or Condenser Fan Motors — If a condenser fan motor
options (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified, as must be replaced, be sure to orient the motor properly in the
well as any specific time and maintenance schedules. motor mount. For 38APD025-060 and 38APS025-050, orient
the motor plug toward the control box. Be sure the motor is se-
curely seated in the bearing cup at the bottom of the motor sup-
port. Be sure to form a drip loop in the power wiring prior to
connecting the power plug. See Condenser Fans on page 150
for proper fan placement.

149
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR PROTECTION — Each con- AEROACOUSTIC™ (LOW SOUND) FANS — Two de-
denser fan motor is internally protected against overtempera- signs have been used for this option and can be distinguished
ture. They are also protected against a severe overcurrent con- by the mounting bolt color. Two separate processes are used
dition by manual reset, calibrated trip, magnetic circuit break- depending on the design revision. A shroud and a wire guard
ers or fuses on a common circuit. Do not bypass connections or provide protection from the rotating fan.
increase breaker size or fuse to correct trouble. Determine the
cause and correct it before resetting the breaker.
IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counter-
Condenser Fans — Two types of condenser fans are of- clockwise when viewed from above). If necessary,
fered in the 38AP units: metal (value sound) fans, and Aero- switch any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.
acoustic™ (low sound) fans. Each is addressed below. Each
fan is supported by a formed wire mount bolted to a fan deck Gray Bolt — The fan motor shaft is protected from weather by
and covered with a wire guard. grease and the fan cover. If fan motor must be removed for ser-
METAL (VALUE SOUND) FANS — The exposed end of vice or replacement, when reinstalling the motor be sure to
fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease and a rub- mount the motor band in the proper location. Re-grease fan
ber boot. If fan motor must be removed for service or replace- shaft and reinstall fan cover. The fan motor has a step in the
ment, when reinstalling the motor be sure to mount the motor motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be positioned
band in the proper location. Re-grease fan shaft and reinstall such that it is securely seated on this step. See Fig. 178. Tighten
fan guard. For recommended grease information, see the sec- bolt to 15 ± 2 ft-lb (20 ± 2.7 N-m). Figure 178 shows the proper
tion Condenser Fan Blades on page 161. The fan hub must be position of mounted fan.
facing up. For proper performance, fan web should be 0.32 in. Black Bolt — To remove the fan, a fan puller will likely be
(8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of the fan needed. The fan motor shaft is protected from weather by the
hub. See Fig. 177. Tighten set screws to 15 ± 2 ft-lb (20 ± 2.7 fan cover. If fan motor must be removed for service or replace-
N-m). Figure 177 shows the proper position of mounted fan. ment, when reinstalling the motor be sure to mount the motor
band in the proper location. Do not use grease on the shaft or
key. The fan motor has a step in the motor shaft. For proper
IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clock- performance, fan should be positioned such that it is securely
wise when viewed from above). If necessary, switch seated on this step. Apply Loctite 680 Retaining Compound to
any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation. the hub and motor keyway only just prior to installing the key.
See Fig. 179 and 180. Tighten bolt to 24 ± 2 ft-lb (32.5 ± 2.7 N-
m). Figure 181 shows the proper position of mounted fan.

0.32 ± 0.12 in. (8 ± 3 mm)

MEASURE FROM FAN WEB TOP TO TOP OF FAN DECK ORIFICE.

FAN DECK

7.00 in. (178 mm)

MIN.
a38-7325

Fig. 177 — Value Fan Mounted Position

150
 TORQUE BOLTS
15 ± 2 ft-lb (20 ± 2.6 N-m)

FAN CAP

FAN DECK

7.00 in. (178 mm)

MIN.

Fig. 178 — Aeroacoustic Fan (Gray Bolt) Mounted Position

680
680

a38-7326 a38-7327

Fig. 179 — Aeroacoustic Fan (Black Bolt) Fan

Hub Keyway Fig. 180 — Aeroacoustic Fan (Black Bolt) Fan
Motor Keyway

TORQUE BOLTS 24 ± 2 ft-lb (32.5 ± 2.7 N-m)

FAN DECK

7.00 in. (178 mm)

MIN.
a38-7328

Fig. 181 — Aeroacoustic Fan (Black Bolt) Mounted Position

151
 Filter Drier — This is a required field supplied and in- TROUBLESHOOTING — The drive is programmed to re-
stalled device. Replace whenever the moisture/liquid indicator start automatically after a fault and will attempt to restart three
shows moisture in the system. times after most faults (the drive will not restart after CF, cF,
GF, F1, F2-F9, or Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are un-
High Pressure Switch — All 38AP units are equipped successful, the drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC),
with one high pressure switch per circuit, for high pressure pro- which requires a manual reset. To do a manual reset, if the fault
tection. The high pressure switch is an automatic reset device. condition has been removed, cycle power to the unit to reset
For pressure settings, see High Pressure Switch (HPS) on the VFD.
page 28. See Fig. 33-43 for typical locations of the high pres-
sure switch on each circuit. Troubleshooting the Motormaster V controller requires a
combination of observing system operation and VFD informa-
REPLACING SWITCH tion. The drive provides 2 kinds of troubleshooting modes: a
status matrix using the 3-digit display (Parameters P57, P58)
and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs. The collec-
WARNING tive group is displayed through parameters P50 through P60.
All values are read-only. These parameters can be accessed
Care should be exercised while removing high pressure without a password. Pressing the Mode button twice will
switch. Refrigerant system is under pressure. DO NOT change the display to P50. Use the up and down arrow buttons
remove high pressure switch before the condensing unit to reach the desired parameter. Press the Mode button to view
has been isolated and the refrigerant has been removed the parameter value. The upper right decimal point will blink
using standard refrigeration practices. Be sure to use proper indicating the parameter value. See Table 71 for a list of trou-
personal protection equipment to guard against accidental bleshooting parameters.
exposure to refrigerant.
 Fault Codes — Motormaster V fault codes will be displayed
The high pressure switch is mounted on a female flare fit- in parameter P50. Up to 8 faults will be displayed in a 3-digit
ting. There is no Schrader valve under the high pressure switch. format. The first digit is the alarm occurrence, 1 through 8. The
If the high pressure switch must be removed, the condensing next 2 digits are the fault code. See Fig. 182 for an example of
unit must be isolated and the refrigerant removed using stan- the fault code. Faults are stored from most recent to oldest. Ta-
dard refrigeration practices before removing the high pressure ble 72 lists Motormaster fault codes.
switch, using a back-up wrench to secure the fitting. Be sure to
loop cable and secure with a wire tie to create a strain relief as
shown in Fig. 48 on page 40.
Moisture/Liquid Indicator — This is a required field
supplied and installed device. A clear flow of liquid refrigerant
indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles indicate un-
dercharged system or the presence of non-condensables. Mois-
ture in the system measured in parts per million (ppm) changes
the color of the indicator. See the specific manufacturer’s in-
structions for moisture indication. Change the filter driers at the FAULT NO. 2-DIGIT FAULT CODE
first sign of moisture in the system. (1-8) (SF IN THIS EXAMPLE)
a38-7451

Fig. 182 — Motormaster V

IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least 12 P50 Fault Code Display
hours before moisture indicator can give an accurate
reading. With unit running, indicating element must be Manual Control — The Motormaster V controller can be con-
in contact with liquid refrigerant to give a true reading. figured for manual control to allow the user to control the mo-
tor speed to test its operation. To disable automatic control
Motormaster® V Controls — If the Motormaster con- mode and enter manual speed control mode follow the instruc-
troller is properly configured, powered, has a control signal, tions in the section Motormaster V Drive Configuration on
and has the Run jumper closed, the controlled fan motor should page 126 to obtain access to the parameter mode. Change the
be operating. The Motormaster V controller has internal diag- following parameter:
nostics that are available on the device. The default display is 1. Change parameter P05 to 01. This will allow for manual
the frequency command for the drive. If the drive is in a stop speed control.
state, the display will indicate “---”. If the drive is commanded
to start, the display will indicate the commanded frequency. 2. With the Run jumper closed, push the up and down arrow
The motor speed may lag the commanded speed until the mo- buttons to set manual speed of the controlled motor.
tor’s actual speed reaches the commanded speed. 3. Be sure to set P05 back to 04 to restore 4 to 20 mA con-
trol once the test is complete.

WARNING
The opening of a branch-circuit protective device may be
an indication that a fault has been interrupted. To reduce
the risk of fire or electric shock, current carrying parts and
other components of the controller should be examined and
replaced if damaged.

815 152
 Table 71 — Motormaster® V Troubleshooting Parameters
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
P50 Fault History This parameter lists the last 8 faults that tripped the drive. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the faults. The left hand digit of
the display is the fault number. The remaining two digits are the fault
code. Fault codes are defined in Table 71. Faults are stored from most
recent to older faults; for example, 1xx, 2xx, 3xx, etc., where “xx” is the
Fault Code listed in Table 71. The display will read “ - -” if the Fault His-
tory is empty.
P51 Software Version This parameter is the software version for the Motormaster V controller.
The software version is displayed in two parts. The first part is the soft-
ware version. The second part is the revision number.
P52 DC Bus Voltage This parameter value indicates the DC bus voltage in percent of nominal.
Nominal DC bus voltage is determined by multiplying the drive’s name-
plate input voltage rating by 1.4.
P53 Motor Voltage This parameter displays the output voltage in percent of the drive’s
nameplate output voltage rating.
P54 Motor Load This parameter displays the motor load in percent of the drive’s output
current rating.
P55 0 to 10 vdc Analog Input This parameter indicates the level of the 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal
at TB-5. A value of 100% indicates a 10 vdc at TB-5.
P56 4 to 20 mA Input Analog Input This parameter indicates the level of the 4 to 20 mA analog input signal at
TB-25. A value of 20% indicates a 4 mA input at TB-25. A value of 100%
indicates a 20 mA at TB-25.
P57 Terminal Strip Status This parameter indicates the status of several terminals using vertical
segments of the LED display. An illuminated segment indicates that the
terminal is closed with respect to TB-2. The Charge Relay is not a termi-
nal and should always be illuminated. See the diagram below for seg-
ment meanings.

TB-1 TB-13A TB-13C TB-15

CHARGE
TB-12 TB-13B TB-14
RELAY
a38-7329

P58 Keypad and Protection Status This parameter indicates the status of the buttons on the keypad and the
status of the protective circuitry in the drive, using the horizontal seg-
ments of the LED display. An illuminated segment indicates that the but-
ton is depressed and the protective circuit is active. See the diagram
below for segment meanings.

FCLIM

OUTPUT
Mode FAULT
a38-7330

P59 TB-30 Analog Output This parameter displays the level of the analog output at TB-30. A value
of 100% indicates a 10 vdc. This output is not used on 38AP units.
P60 TB-31 Analog Output This parameter displays the level of the analog output at TB-31. A value
of 100% indicates a 10 vdc. This output is not used on 38AP units.
LEGEND
FCLIM — Fast Current Limit

153
 Table 72 — Motormaster® V Fault Codes
FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION SOLUTION
High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too Check cooling fan operation.
AF high; cooling fan has failed (if equipped).
CF Control Fault: A blank EPM or an EPM with corrupted Perform a factory reset using Parameter P48 - PRO-
data has been installed. GRAM SELECTION.
Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible Either remove the EPM or perform a factory reset
cF parameter version has been installed. (Parameter 48) to change the parameter version of the
EPM to match the parameter version of the drive.
CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the Check for loose electrical connections.
CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter P25) and the drive Check for faulty condenser fan motor.
is reducing the output frequency to reduce the output Check that Parameter P25 (see Table 55 on page 127)
CL current. is set correctly.
If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can
trip into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).
Error: Invalid data has been entered or an invalid com-
Er
mand was attempted.
Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are Restore factory defaults P48, see fault code CF. If that
GF corrupted does not work, replace EPM.
HF High DC Bus Voltage Fault: line voltage is too high; Check line voltage; set P01 appropriately.
deceleration rate is too fast; overhauling load.
Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicat- Check serial connection (computer)
JF ing that the serial link has been lost. Check settings for P15.
Check settings in communication software to match
P15.
LC Fault Lockout: The drive has failed three start attempts Correct fault condition.
and requires a manual reset.
LCS Loss of control signal
LF Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low. Check line voltage; set P01 appropriately.
Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to Check VFD wiring to motor. Be sure motor is connected
ground short circuit on the output; failed output transis- to T1, T2, and T3.
OF
tor; boost settings are too high; acceleration rate is too Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.
fast. If unsuccessful, replace drive.
Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the appli- Check line voltage; set P01 appropriately.
PF cation; mechanical problem with the driven equipment. Check for dirty coils.
Check for motor bearing failure.
SF Single-phase fault: Single-phase input power has been Check input power phasing.
applied to a three-phase drive
SP Start pending: The drive is in between restart attempts. Correct fault condition.
F1 EPM fault: The EPM is missing or damaged
Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a prob- Consult factory.
F2 - F9, Fo lem
Drive display = 60.0 even Feedback signal is above set point Check for proper set point.
though it is cold outside and Check liquid line pressure.
it should be running slower
Drive display = --- even Start jumper is missing Replace start jumper. See section above.
though drive should be
running
Drive display = 8.0 even Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at mini- Check for proper set point.
though fan should be mum speed Check liquid line pressure.
running faster
Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 In stand-alone mode: Check transducer wiring and feed-
Hz until reset or loss of start command. Resetting back voltage. Feedback voltage displayed on P-69. Pin
VFD flashes 57 and LCS requires cycling start command (or power). 6 should be 5 v output.
Pin 5 (feedback) should be between 0 and 5 v.
LEGEND
EPM — Electronic Programming Module
VFD — Variable Frequency Drive

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of be-
transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished ing faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply
by the color of the transducer body: suction (yellow) and dis- voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,
charge (red). See Fig. 33-43 for typical locations of pressure compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee
transducers on each circuit. No pressure transducer calibration display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure
is required. The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is gage. Pressure readings should be within ± 5 psig (35 kPa). If
generated by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 183 for the two readings are not reasonably close, check the pressure
transducer connections to the J8 connector on the MBB. transducer harness wiring at the MBB connection and at the
transducer plug. If the wiring is good, replace the pressure
transducer.

154
 Use caution when removing the transducer. Use a back-up
wrench to secure the fitting while removing and installing the
pressure transducer. Be sure to loop cable and secure with a
wire tie to create a strain relief as shown in Fig. 48 on page 40.

WARNING

MBB Care should be exercised while removing any device, pres-

sure sensing device or cap from an access fitting. Refriger-
ant system is under pressure. Be sure to use proper personal
J8
protection equipment to guard against accidental exposure
to refrigerant.
Temperature Relief Devices — All units have tem-
perature relief devices to protect against damage from exces-
sive pressures caused by extreme high temperatures (i.e., fire).
These devices protect the high and low side and are installed in
the liquid line between the condenser coils and the liquid line
service valve.
A38-7331
Fig. 183 — Typical 38AP Pressure Transducer Thermistors — Several styles of thermistors are used in
Wiring the 38AP units. See Thermistors on page 28 for specific infor-
mation on each thermistor. Thermistor connections are made
REPLACING TRANSDUCER — The pressure transducer to both the MBB and AUX Board. See Fig. 184 and 185.
should be mounted on an access fitting with a Schrader valve.

MBB

J8

A38-7332

Fig. 184 — Typical Main Base Board (MBB) Thermistor Connections

AUX

J6
a38-7333

Fig. 185 — Typical AUX Board (AUX) Thermistor Connections (Digital Compressor Option Only)

155
TROUBLESHOOTING — To perform a thermistor-tempera- Outdoor Air Thermistor (OAT) — This thermistor for
ture sensor check, a high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is re- 38APD/APS025-060 units is mounted close to the base of the
quired. unit. It must be mounted off the base rail for an accurate out-
1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate door ambient temperature. See Fig. 46 on page 39 for mount-
thermistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the main ing dimensions.
base board or J6 terminal strip of the AUX Board. See Return Gas Thermistor (RGT) — Return gas thermistors are
Fig. 184 and 185. mounted in thermistor wells. The well assembly consists of
2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem- three parts, the thermistor well body, seal disc and nut. See
perature from Tables 73-77. Fig. 186. Remove seal disc and nut from the existing thermis-
tor and install on the new thermistor. Before introducing a
3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at thermistor into the well body, add a small amount of thermal
probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem- conductive grease to the thermistor well and end of probe. In-
perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to sert the probe into well. Tighten the retaining nut 1/4 turn past
avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. finger tight using a back-up wrench. Be sure to loop cable and
Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature secure with a wire tie to create a strain relief as shown in
determined from thermistor voltage reading should be Fig. 48 on page 40. Once in place and wired, insulate the de-
close, ± 5° F (3° C), if care was taken in applying thermo- vice with cork insulation tape, similar to Presstite, to form a
couple and taking readings. watertight seal around the thermistor and minimize the ambient
If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down influence on the sensor.
and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature
(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage
NUT
drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter-
mining the resistance with unit shut down and thermistor dis- SEAL DISC
connected from J8. Compare the values determined with the
value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the
scrolling marquee display. THERMISTOR
REPLACING THERMISTORS — Special instructions for WELL BODY
replacing the return gas thermistor (RGT), Outdoor air thermis-
tor (OAT), and discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) are
listed below. All other thermistors can be replaced simply by
replacing the old with the new.

CAUTION
Be sure to route wiring away from all refrigerant piping.
Heat from the piping can damage wiring.
a38-7334

Discharge Temperature Thermistor (DTT) —This thermis-

tor is only used when the unit is equipped with a digital com-
pressor. Mount the thermistor in the appropriate location. Once Fig. 186 — Thermistor Well Assembly
in place and wired, insulate the device with cork insulation tape
to form a watertight seal around the thermistor and minimize
the ambient influence on the sensor. See Fig. 45 on page 39.

156
 Table 73 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE
(F) DROP (OHMS) (F) (OHMS) (F) (OHMS)
(V) (V) (V)
–25 3.699 98,010 59 1.982 7,686 143 0.511 1,190
–24 3.689 94,707 60 1.956 7,665 144 0.502 1,165
–23 3.679 91,522 61 1.930 7,468 145 0.494 1,141
–22 3.668 88,449 62 1.905 7,277 146 0.485 1,118
–21 3.658 85,486 63 1.879 7,091 147 0.477 1,095
–20 3.647 82,627 64 1.854 6,911 148 0.469 1,072
–19 3.636 79,871 65 1.829 6,735 149 0.461 1,050
–18 3.624 77,212 66 1.804 6,564 150 0.453 1,029
–17 3.613 74,648 67 1.779 6,399 151 0.445 1,007
–16 3.601 72,175 68 1.754 6,238 152 0.438 986
–15 3.588 69,790 69 1.729 6,081 153 0.430 965
–14 3.576 67,490 70 1.705 5,929 154 0.423 945
–13 3.563 65,272 71 1.681 5,781 155 0.416 925
–12 3.550 63,133 72 1.656 5,637 156 0.408 906
–11 3.536 61,070 73 1.632 5,497 157 0.402 887
–10 3.523 59,081 74 1.609 5,361 158 0.395 868
–9 3.509 57,162 75 1.585 5,229 159 0.388 850
–8 3.494 55,311 76 1.562 5,101 160 0.381 832
–7 3.480 53,526 77 1.538 4,976 161 0.375 815
–6 3.465 51,804 78 1.516 4,855 162 0.369 798
–5 3.450 50,143 79 1.493 4,737 163 0.362 782
–4 3.434 48,541 80 1.470 4,622 164 0.356 765
–3 3.418 46,996 81 1.448 4,511 165 0.350 750
–2 3.402 45,505 82 1.426 4,403 166 0.344 734
–1 3.386 44,066 83 1.404 4,298 167 0.339 719
0 3.369 42,679 84 1.382 4,196 168 0.333 705
1 3.352 41,339 85 1.361 4,096 169 0.327 690
2 3.335 40,047 86 1.340 4,000 170 0.322 677
3 3.317 38,800 87 1.319 3,906 171 0.317 663
4 3.299 37,596 88 1.298 3,814 172 0.311 650
5 3.281 36,435 89 1.278 3,726 173 0.306 638
6 3.262 35,313 90 1.257 3,640 174 0.301 626
7 3.243 34,231 91 1.237 3,556 175 0.296 614
8 3.224 33,185 92 1.217 3,474 176 0.291 602
9 3.205 32,176 93 1.198 3,395 177 0.286 591
10 3.185 31,202 94 1.179 3,318 178 0.282 581
11 3.165 30,260 95 1.160 3,243 179 0.277 570
12 3.145 29,351 96 1.141 3,170 180 0.272 561
13 3.124 28,473 97 1.122 3,099 181 0.268 551
14 3.103 27,624 98 1.104 3,031 182 0.264 542
15 3.082 26,804 99 1.086 2,964 183 0.259 533
16 3.060 26,011 100 1.068 2,898 184 0.255 524
17 3.038 25,245 101 1.051 2,835 185 0.251 516
18 3.016 24,505 102 1.033 2,773 186 0.247 508
19 2.994 23,789 103 1.016 2,713 187 0.243 501
20 2.972 23,096 104 0.999 2,655 188 0.239 494
21 2.949 22,427 105 0.983 2,597 189 0.235 487
22 2.926 21,779 106 0.966 2,542 190 0.231 480
23 2.903 21,153 107 0.950 2,488 191 0.228 473
24 2.879 20,547 108 0.934 2,436 192 0.224 467
25 2.856 19,960 109 0.918 2,385 193 0.220 461
26 2.832 19,393 110 0.903 2,335 194 0.217 456
27 2.808 18,843 111 0.888 2,286 195 0.213 450
28 2.784 18,311 112 0.873 2,239 196 0.210 445
29 2.759 17,796 113 0.858 2,192 197 0.206 439
30 2.735 17,297 114 0.843 2,147 198 0.203 434
31 2.710 16,814 115 0.829 2,103 199 0.200 429
32 2.685 16,346 116 0.815 2,060 200 0.197 424
33 2.660 15,892 117 0.801 2,018 201 0.194 419
34 2.634 15,453 118 0.787 1,977 202 0.191 415
35 2.609 15,027 119 0.774 1,937 203 0.188 410
36 2.583 14,614 120 0.761 1,898 204 0.185 405
37 2.558 14,214 121 0.748 1,860 205 0.182 401
38 2.532 13,826 122 0.735 1,822 206 0.179 396
39 2.506 13,449 123 0.723 1,786 207 0.176 391
40 2.480 13,084 124 0.710 1,750 208 0.173 386
41 2.454 12,730 125 0.698 1,715 209 0.171 382
42 2.428 12,387 126 0.686 1,680 210 0.168 377
43 2.402 12,053 127 0.674 1,647 211 0.165 372
44 2.376 11,730 128 0.663 1,614 212 0.163 367
45 2.349 11,416 129 0.651 1,582 213 0.160 361
46 2.323 11,112 130 0.640 1,550 214 0.158 356
47 2.296 10,816 131 0.629 1,519 215 0.155 350
48 2.270 10,529 132 0.618 1,489 216 0.153 344
49 2.244 10,250 133 0.608 1,459 217 0.151 338
50 2.217 9,979 134 0.597 1,430 218 0.148 332
51 2.191 9,717 135 0.587 1,401 219 0.146 325
52 2.165 9,461 136 0.577 1,373 220 0.144 318
53 2.138 9,213 137 0.567 1,345 221 0.142 311
54 2.112 8,973 138 0.557 1,318 222 0.140 304
55 2.086 8,739 139 0.548 1,291 223 0.138 297
56 2.060 8,511 140 0.538 1,265 224 0.135 289
57 2.034 8,291 141 0.529 1,240 225 0.133 282
58 2.008 8,076 142 0.520 1,214

157
 Table 74 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE
(C) DROP (OHMS) (C) (OHMS) (C) (OHMS)
(V) (V) (V)
–32 3.705 100,260 15 1.982 7,855 62 0.506 1,158
–31 3.687 94,165 16 1.935 7,499 63 0.490 1,118
–30 3.668 88,480 17 1.889 7,161 64 0.475 1,079
–29 3.649 83,170 18 1.844 6,840 65 0.461 1,041
–28 3.629 78,125 19 1.799 6,536 66 0.447 1,006
–27 3.608 73,580 20 1.754 6,246 67 0.433 971
–26 3.586 69,250 21 1.710 5,971 68 0.420 938
–25 3.563 65,205 22 1.666 5,710 69 0.407 906
–24 3.539 61,420 23 1.623 5,461 70 0.395 876
–23 3.514 57,875 24 1.580 5,225 71 0.383 836
–22 3.489 54,555 25 1.538 5,000 72 0.371 805
–21 3.462 51,450 26 1.497 4,786 73 0.360 775
–20 3.434 48,536 27 1.457 4,583 74 0.349 747
–19 3.406 45,807 28 1.417 4,389 75 0.339 719
–18 3.376 43,247 29 1.378 4,204 76 0.329 693
–17 3.345 40,845 30 1.340 4,028 77 0.319 669
–16 3.313 38,592 31 1.302 3,861 78 0.309 645
–15 3.281 38,476 32 1.265 3,701 79 0.300 623
–14 3.247 34,489 33 1.229 3,549 80 0.291 602
–13 3.212 32,621 34 1.194 3,404 81 0.283 583
–12 3.177 30,866 35 1.160 3,266 82 0.274 564
–11 3.140 29,216 36 1.126 3,134 83 0.266 547
–10 3.103 27,633 37 1.093 3,008 84 0.258 531
–9 3.065 26,202 38 1.061 2,888 85 0.251 516
–8 3.025 24,827 39 1.030 2,773 86 0.244 502
–7 2.985 23,532 40 0.999 2,663 87 0.237 489
–6 2.945 22,313 41 0.969 2,559 88 0.230 477
–5 2.903 21,163 42 0.940 2,459 89 0.223 466
–4 2.860 20,079 43 0.912 2,363 90 0.217 456
–3 2.817 19,058 44 0.885 2,272 91 0.211 446
–2 2.774 18,094 45 0.858 2,184 92 0.204 436
–1 2.730 17,184 46 0.832 2,101 93 0.199 427
0 2.685 16,325 47 0.807 2,021 94 0.193 419
1 2.639 15,515 48 0.782 1,944 95 0.188 410
2 2.593 14,749 49 0.758 1,871 96 0.182 402
3 2.547 14,026 50 0.735 1,801 97 0.177 393
4 2.500 13,342 51 0.713 1,734 98 0.172 385
5 2.454 12,696 52 0.691 1,670 99 0.168 376
6 2.407 12,085 53 0.669 1,609 100 0.163 367
7 2.360 11,506 54 0.649 1,550 101 0.158 357
8 2.312 10,959 55 0.629 1,493 102 0.154 346
9 2.265 10,441 56 0.610 1,439 103 0.150 335
10 2.217 9,949 57 0.591 1,387 104 0.146 324
11 2.170 9,485 58 0.573 1,337 105 0.142 312
12 2.123 9,044 59 0.555 1,290 106 0.138 299
13 2.076 8,627 60 0.538 1,244 107 0.134 285
14 2.029 8,231 61 0.522 1,200

158
 Table 75 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE

(F) DROP (OHMS) (F) DROP (OHMS) (F) DROP (OHMS)
(V) (V) (V)
–25 4.758 196,453 61 2.994 14,925 147 0.890 2,166
–24 4.750 189,692 62 2.963 14,549 148 0.876 2,124
–23 4.741 183,300 63 2.932 14,180 149 0.862 2,083
–22 4.733 177,000 64 2.901 13,824 150 0.848 2,043
–21 4.724 171,079 65 2.870 13,478 151 0.835 2,003
–20 4.715 165,238 66 2.839 13,139 152 0.821 1,966
–19 4.705 159,717 67 2.808 12,814 153 0.808 1,928
–18 4.696 154,344 68 2.777 12,493 154 0.795 1,891
–17 4.686 149,194 69 2.746 12,187 155 0.782 1,855
–16 4.676 144,250 70 2.715 11,884 156 0.770 1,820
–15 4.665 139,443 71 2.684 11,593 157 0.758 1,786
–14 4.655 134,891 72 2.653 11,308 158 0.745 1,752
–13 4.644 130,402 73 2.622 11,031 159 0.733 1,719
–12 4.633 126,183 74 2.592 10,764 160 0.722 1,687
–11 4.621 122,018 75 2.561 10,501 161 0.710 1,656
–10 4.609 118,076 76 2.530 10,249 162 0.699 1,625
–9 4.597 114,236 77 2.500 10,000 163 0.687 1,594
–8 4.585 110,549 78 2.470 9,762 164 0.676 1,565
–7 4.572 107,006 79 2.439 9,526 165 0.666 1,536
–6 4.560 103,558 80 2.409 9,300 166 0.655 1,508
–5 4.546 100,287 81 2.379 9,078 167 0.645 1,480
–4 4.533 97,060 82 2.349 8,862 168 0.634 1,453
–3 4.519 94,020 83 2.319 8,653 169 0.624 1,426
–2 4.505 91,019 84 2.290 8,448 170 0.614 1,400
–1 4.490 88,171 85 2.260 8,251 171 0.604 1,375
0 4.476 85,396 86 2.231 8,056 172 0.595 1,350
1 4.461 82,729 87 2.202 7,869 173 0.585 1,326
2 4.445 80,162 88 2.173 7,685 174 0.576 1,302
3 4.429 77,662 89 2.144 7,507 175 0.567 1,278
4 4.413 75,286 90 2.115 7,333 176 0.558 1,255
5 4.397 72,940 91 2.087 7,165 177 0.549 1,233
6 4.380 70,727 92 2.059 6,999 178 0.540 1,211
7 4.363 68,542 93 2.030 6,838 179 0.532 1,190
8 4.346 66,465 94 2.003 6,683 180 0.523 1,169
9 4.328 64,439 95 1.975 6,530 181 0.515 1,148
10 4.310 62,491 96 1.948 6,383 182 0.507 1,128
11 4.292 60,612 97 1.921 6,238 183 0.499 1,108
12 4.273 58,781 98 1.894 6,098 184 0.491 1,089
13 4.254 57,039 99 1.867 5,961 185 0.483 1,070
14 4.235 55,319 100 1.841 5,827 186 0.476 1,052
15 4.215 53,693 101 1.815 5,698 187 0.468 1,033
16 4.195 52,086 102 1.789 5,571 188 0.461 1,016
17 4.174 50,557 103 1.763 5,449 189 0.454 998
18 4.153 49,065 104 1.738 5,327 190 0.447 981
19 4.132 47,627 105 1.713 5,210 191 0.440 964
20 4.111 46,240 106 1.688 5,095 192 0.433 947
21 4.089 44,888 107 1.663 4,984 193 0.426 931
22 4.067 43,598 108 1.639 4,876 194 0.419 915
23 4.044 42,324 109 1.615 4,769 195 0.413 900
24 4.021 41,118 110 1.591 4,666 196 0.407 885
25 3.998 39,926 111 1.567 4,564 197 0.400 870
26 3.975 38,790 112 1.544 4,467 198 0.394 855
27 3.951 37,681 113 1.521 4,370 199 0.388 841
28 3.927 36,610 114 1.498 4,277 200 0.382 827
29 3.903 35,577 115 1.475 4,185 201 0.376 814
30 3.878 34,569 116 1.453 4,096 202 0.370 800
31 3.853 33,606 117 1.431 4,008 203 0.365 787
32 3.828 32,654 118 1.409 3,923 204 0.359 774
33 3.802 31,752 119 1.387 3,840 205 0.354 762
34 3.776 30,860 120 1.366 3,759 206 0.349 749
35 3.750 30,009 121 1.345 3,681 207 0.343 737
36 3.723 29,177 122 1.324 3,603 208 0.338 725
37 3.697 28,373 123 1.304 3,529 209 0.333 714
38 3.670 27,597 124 1.284 3,455 210 0.328 702
39 3.654 26,838 125 1.264 3,383 211 0.323 691
40 3.615 26,113 126 1.244 3,313 212 0.318 680
41 3.587 25,396 127 1.225 3,244 213 0.314 670
42 3.559 24,715 128 1.206 3,178 214 0.309 659
43 3.531 24,042 129 1.187 3,112 215 0.305 649
44 3.503 23,399 130 1.168 3,049 216 0.300 639
45 3.474 22,770 131 1.150 2,986 217 0.296 629
46 3.445 22,161 132 1.132 2,926 218 0.292 620
47 3.416 21,573 133 1.114 2,866 219 0.288 610
48 3.387 20,998 134 1.096 2,809 220 0.284 601
49 3.357 20,447 135 1.079 2,752 221 0.279 592
50 3.328 19,903 136 1.062 2,697 222 0.275 583
51 3.298 19,386 137 1.045 2,643 223 0.272 574
52 3.268 18,874 138 1.028 2,590 224 0.268 566
53 3.238 18,384 139 1.012 2,539 225 0.264 557
54 3.208 17,904 140 0.996 2,488
55 3.178 17,441 141 0.980 2,439
56 3.147 16,991 142 0.965 2,391
57 3.117 16,552 143 0.949 2,343
58 3.086 16,131 144 0.934 2,297
59 3.056 15,714 145 0.919 2,253
60 3.025 15,317 146 0.905 2,209

159
 Table 76 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE

(C) DROP (OHMS) (C) DROP (OHMS) (C) DROP (OHMS)
(V) (V) (V)
–32 4.762 200,510 15 3.056 15,714 62 0.940 2,315
–31 4.748 188,340 16 3.000 15,000 63 0.913 2,235
–30 4.733 177,000 17 2.944 14,323 64 0.887 2,157
–29 4.716 166,342 18 2.889 13,681 65 0.862 2,083
–28 4.700 156,404 19 2.833 13,071 66 0.837 2,011
–27 4.682 147,134 20 2.777 12,493 67 0.813 1,943
–26 4.663 138,482 21 2.721 11,942 68 0.790 1,876
–25 4.644 130,402 22 2.666 11,418 69 0.767 1,813
–24 4.624 122,807 23 2.610 10,921 70 0.745 1,752
–23 4.602 115,710 24 2.555 10,449 71 0.724 1,693
–22 4.580 109,075 25 2.500 10,000 72 0.703 1,637
–21 4.557 102,868 26 2.445 9,571 73 0.683 1,582
–20 4.533 97,060 27 2.391 9,164 74 0.663 1,530
–19 4.508 91,588 28 2.337 8,776 75 0.645 1,480
–18 4.482 86,463 29 2.284 8,407 76 0.626 1,431
–17 4.455 81,662 30 2.231 8,056 77 0.608 1,385
–16 4.426 77,162 31 2.178 7,720 78 0.591 1,340
–15 4.397 72,940 32 2.127 7,401 79 0.574 1,297
–14 4.367 68,957 33 2.075 7,096 80 0.558 1,255
–13 4.335 65,219 34 2.025 6,806 81 0.542 1,215
–12 4.303 61,711 35 1.975 6,530 82 0.527 1,177
–11 4.269 58,415 36 1.926 6,266 83 0.512 1,140
–10 4.235 55,319 37 1.878 6,014 84 0.497 1,104
–9 4.199 52,392 38 1.830 5,774 85 0.483 1,070
–8 4.162 49,640 39 1.784 5,546 86 0.470 1,037
–7 4.124 47,052 40 1.738 5,327 87 0.457 1,005
–6 4.085 44,617 41 1.692 5,117 88 0.444 974
–5 4.044 42,324 42 1.648 4,918 89 0.431 944
–4 4.003 40,153 43 1.605 4,727 90 0.419 915
–3 3.961 38,109 44 1.562 4,544 91 0.408 889
–2 3.917 36,182 45 1.521 4,370 92 0.396 861
–1 3.873 34,367 46 1.480 4,203 93 0.386 836
0 3.828 32,654 47 1.439 4,042 94 0.375 811
1 3.781 31,030 48 1.400 3,889 95 0.365 787
2 3.734 29,498 49 1.362 3,743 96 0.355 764
3 3.686 28,052 50 1.324 3,603 97 0.345 742
4 3.637 26,686 51 1.288 3,469 98 0.336 721
5 3.587 25,396 52 1.252 3,340 99 0.327 700
6 3.537 24,171 53 1.217 3,217 100 0.318 680
7 3.485 23,013 54 1.183 3,099 101 0.310 661
8 3.433 21,918 55 1.150 2,986 102 0.302 643
9 3.381 20,883 56 1.117 2,878 103 0.294 626
10 3.328 19,903 57 1.086 2,774 104 0.287 609
11 3.274 18,972 58 1.055 2,675 105 0.279 592
12 3.220 18,090 59 1.025 2,579 106 0.272 576
13 3.165 17,255 60 0.996 2,488 107 0.265 561
14 3.111 16,464 61 0.968 2,400

Table 77 — 86K Thermistor Temperatures (°C/°F) vs. Resistance

TEMP TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP TEMP RESISTANCE
(C) (F) (OHMS) (C) (F) (OHMS)
-40 -40 2,889,600 75 167 12,730
-35 -31 2,087,220 80 176 10,790
-30 -22 1,522,200 85 185 9,200
-25 -13 1,121,440 90 194 7,870
-20 -4 834,720 95 203 6,770
-15 5 627,280 100 212 5,850
-10 14 475,740 105 221 5,090
-5 23 363,990 110 230 4,450
0 32 280,820 115 239 3,870
5 41 218,410 120 248 3,350
10 50 171,170 125 257 2,920
15 59 135,140 130 266 2,580
20 68 107,440 135 275 2,280
25 77 86,000 140 284 2,020
30 86 69,280 145 293 1,800
35 95 56,160 150 302 1,590
40 104 45,810 155 311 1,390
45 113 37,580 160 320 1,250
50 122 30,990 165 329 1,120
55 131 25,680 170 338 1,010
60 140 21,400 175 347 920
70 158 15,070 180 356 830

160
 MAINTENANCE Done (Run StatusPMCOILC.L.MN), by toggling the
value from NO to YES.
Recommended Maintenance Schedule — The 1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the core
following are recommended guidelines only. Jobsite conditions
may dictate that maintenance schedule be performed more of- face or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.
ten than recommended. 2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety-
Every month: glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and
gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.
• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.
• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig- 3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
erant loss and presence of moisture. industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-
er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean-
Every 3 months: ing condenser coils.
• Check refrigerant charge.
• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant
leaks, repair as necessary. CAUTION
• Check fan status switch operation.
• Check condenser coils for debris. Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
• Check all condenser fans for proper operation. coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage
• Check compressor oil level. the coil.
• Check crankcase heater operation. 4. Clean condenser face by spraying the coil steadily and
Every 12 months: uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray
• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary. straight toward the coil. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de-
• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary. gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the
• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than coil face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent
± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer. damage to air centers.
• Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than
± 5 psig (35 kPa) variance from calibrated gage. CAUTION
• Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if
necessary. Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between
• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure air centers and refrigerant tubes.
drop, replace as necessary.
• Check condition of condenser fan blades and ensure they Navigator™ Display Module — The Navigator mod-
are securely fastened to the motor shaft. ule can be cleaned with a mild detergent. Isopropyl alcohol or
• Lubricate fan shaft with rust inhibitor, propeller-style a glass cleaner can be used on all Navigator surfaces.
(metal) or AeroAcoustic fans with gray bolt, if necessary.
• Lubricate door hinges. Refrigeration Circuit
• Perform service test to confirm operation of all LEAK TESTING — Units are shipped with a nitrogen hold-
components. ing charge which must be removed prior to charging the system
• If the unit is equipped with a UPC, check the battery and with R-410A. If there is no pressure in the system, introduce
replace if necessary. enough nitrogen to search for the leak. Repair the leak using
• If the unit is equipped with a ground fault interrupter- good refrigeration practices. After leaks are repaired, system
convenience outlet, GFI-CO (208/230, 460, or 575-3-60 must be evacuated and dehydrated using methods described in
only), test the operation of the device. Replace if neces- GTAC II, Module 4, System Dehydration.
sary. CHARGING — If charging is required, see Start-Up section
Lubrication on page 41 for charging procedures.
CONDENSER FAN BLADES — Two types of condenser Ground Fault Interrupter-Convenience Outlet
fans are offered in the 38AP units. Each is addressed below. (GFI-CO) — Some units may be equipped with a ground
Propeller (Metal) Fan and AeroAcoustic Fan with fault interrupter-convenience outlet, GFI-CO (208/230,
Gray Bolt — The fan shaft and hub are greased during the as- 460, or 575-3-60 only). Periodically, test the ground fault
sembly process in the factory. If grease is required, the recom- feature of this device. Test the GFI-CO by pressing the
mended grease is Tectyl 506G (Ashland Petroleum Company). “Test” button on the device and check for power at the
AeroAcoustic Fan with Black Bolt — This assembly uses device. If the device is incorrectly wired, the GFI-CO may
Loctite 680 Retaining Compound. DO NOT lubricate the fan not trip and power may be present at the outlet. If power is
shaft or fan hub. present, disconnect all power to the unit and confirm wir-
ing. If wiring is correct, replace the device.
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR BEARINGS — The condens-
er fan motors have sealed bearings so no field lubrication is re- If no power is present following the test, reset the device. To
quired. restore power to the device, press the “Reset” button on the
GFI-CO.
DOOR HINGES — All door hinges should be lubricated at
least once a year.
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Mainte-
nance and Cleaning Recommendations —
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the
coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should
be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils. Once coil mainte-
nance is complete, using the scrolling marquee or Navigator™
display to indicate to the control Coil Cleaning Maintenance

161
 TROUBLESHOOTING RESETTING ALARMS — Before resetting any alarm, first
determine the cause of the alarm and correct it. After determin-
Table 78 is an abbreviated list of symptoms, probable caus- ing and correcting the cause of the alarm, toggle
es, and potential remedies. AlarmsRCRN (Reset All Current Alarms) from NO to
Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal YES. The control may prompt the user for a password, by dis-
or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the playing PASS and WORD. See Configuration and Service
whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as Password on page 22 for information on the password. If the
listed in Table 79. Active pre-alerts/alerts/alarms are shown in condition has been resolved, the alerts/alarms will be cleared
Currently Active Alarms, AlarmsCRNT. Up to 20 current from the active alert/alarm set.
alarms will be displayed. Pressing ENTER and ESCAPE ALARM HISTORY — The scrolling marquee and Naviga-
buttons simultaneously will expand the alarm code description tor™ display have the ability to display the latest alarms and
only. Time and date stamps are available in Alarm History. alerts up to 20 events. This is a first-in, first-out alarm buffer.
If the unit is in alarm and unable to operate, Control Mode As a Pre-alert, Alert, or Alarm is generated, it is written to the
will show Run StatusVIEWSTAT=4 (Off Emrgcy). Au- Alarm History. To access Alarm History, enter AlarmsHIST.
tomatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if the Use the arrow keys to move through the history. The latest pre-
condition corrects itself. Manual alarms will require operator alerts, alerts and alarms will appear first on the list. Pressing
intervention to reset the alarm. ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously will provide a time
and date stamp and expand the pre-alert/alert/alarm code.

Table 78 — Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE REMEDIES
Check for power to unit Check overcurrent protection device.
Check non-fused disconnect (if equipped).
Restore power to unit.
Check for 24 volts at the control boards.
Wrong/incorrect unit configuration Check unit configuration.
If unit is controlled by a Local Schedule, check to
be sure that the Day of the Week is properly set.
Enable-Off-Remote Switch is not in a position to
Unit does not run allow the unit to operate.
Fan Status Switch is open.
Active alarm Check alarm status. See Alarms and Alerts begin-
ning on page 162 and follow troubleshooting
instructions.
Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating
Modes section beginning on page 135 and follow
troubleshooting instructions.
No cooling load Cooling Load is satisfied.
Unit runs when it is not called for Incorrect unit configuration If unit is controlled by a Local Schedule, check to
be sure that the Day of the Week is properly set.
Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant.
Unit operates too long or continuously Compressor or control contacts welded Replace contactor or relay.
Non-condensables in refrigerant circuit Remove refrigerant and recharge.
Active alarm Check alarm status. See Alarms and Alerts begin-
ning on page 162 and follow troubleshooting
instructions.
Circuit does not run
Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating
Modes section beginning on page 135 and follow
troubleshooting instructions.
Active alarm Check alarm status. See Alarms and Alerts begin-
ning on page 162 and follow troubleshooting
instructions.
Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating
Circuit does not load Modes section beginning on page 135 and follow
troubleshooting instructions.
Low Saturated Suction Temperature See Alarms, Pre-Alerts, and Alerts A120, A121,
P120,121, T120,121, page 168.
Faulty compressor discharge check-valve Replace compressor.
Active alarm Check alarm status. See Alarms and Alerts begin-
ning on page 162 and follow troubleshooting
instructions.
Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating
Compressor does not run Modes section beginning on page 135 and follow
troubleshooting instructions.
Inoperative compressor contactor Check control wiring.
Check contactor operation, replace if necessary.

162
 Table 79 —Alarm and Alert Codes
ALARM/ ALARM OR DESCRIPTION ACTION TAKEN RESET DETAILS PAGE
ALERT CODE ALERT BY CONTROL METHOD REFERENCE
If communications between the scrolling
marquee and the Main Base Board (MBB)
COMM FAIL Alert Communications Failure are lost, unit may continue to run. If the Automatic once commun- 166
communication is internal to the MBB, the ciations are re-established
unit will shut down or not be allowed to
start.
Circuit A Compressor
T048 Alert Circuit is shut down Manual 166
Availability Alert
Circuit B Compressor
T049 Alert Circuit shut down Manual 166
Availability Alert
Circuit A, Compressor 1 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head
A051 Alarm Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit A, Compressor 1
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Chattering Failure
T051 Alert
Circuit A, Compressor 1
Failure Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166

A052 Alarm Circuit A, Compressor 2 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit A, Compressor 2
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Chattering Failure
T052 Alert
Circuit A, Compressor 2
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Failure
Circuit A, Compressor 3 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head
A053 Alarm Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit A, Compressor 3
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Chattering Failure
T053 Alert
Circuit A, Compressor 3 Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Failure
Circuit B, Compressor 1 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head
A055 Alarm Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit B, Compressor 1
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Chattering Failure
T055 Alert
Circuit B, Compressor 1
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Failure
A056 Alarm Circuit B, Compressor 2 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit B, Compressor 2 Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Chattering Failure
T056 Alert
Circuit B, Compressor 2
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Failure
Circuit B, Compressor 3 All compressor outputs de-energized. Head
A057 Alarm Manual 166
Stuck On Failure pressure control remains active.
Circuit B, Compressor 3
Chattering Failure Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
T057 Alert
Circuit B, Compressor 3
Affected compressor is shut down Manual 166
Failure
Alarm Supply Air Unit shut down Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure
A060
Remote Supply Air Temperature
Alarm Update not received Unit shut down Automatic 167
Return Air
Alarm Unit shut down Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure
A061
Remote Return Air Temperature
Alarm Unit shut down Automatic 167
Update not received
Circuit A Return Gas
T068 Alert Circuit shut down Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure
T069 Alert Circuit B Return Gas Circuit shut down Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure
Outside Air Temperature Reset will be dis-
Outside Air abled and the unit will run under normal set
T073 Alert Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure point control. Outdoor Ambient Lockout is
disabled.
Space Temperature Reset will be dis-
Space Temperature
T074 Alert abled.and the unit will run under normal set Automatic 167
Thermistor Failure
point control.
Space Temperature Offset Space Temperature Offset disabled. Unit
T082 Alert will run under normal control without space Automatic 167
Sensor Failure
temperature offset.
T090 Alert Circuit A Discharge Pressure Circuit A shut down Automatic 167
Transducer Failure
T091 Alert Circuit B Discharge Pressure Circuit B shut down Automatic 167
Transducer Failure
LEGEND
A/D — Analog/Digital
AUX — Auxiliary
EEPROM — Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

163
 Table 79 —Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
EXPLANATION
ALARM/ ALARM OR ACTION TAKEN RESET
DESCRIPTION PAGE
ALERT CODE ALERT BY CONTROL METHOD REFERENCE
T092 Alert Circuit A Suction Pressure Circuit is shut down Automatic 167
Transducer Failure
Circuit B Suction Pressure
T093 Alert Circuit is shut down Automatic 167
Transducer Failure
T094 Alert Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Digital compressor is disabled Automatic 167
T110 Alert Circuit A Loss of Charge Circuit is not allowed to start Manual 168
T111 Alert Circuit B Loss of Charge Circuit is not allowed to start Manual 168
T112 Alert Circuit A High Suction Temperature Circuit is shut down Manual 168
T113 Alert Circuit B High Suction Temperature Circuit is shut down Manual 168
T114 Alert Circuit A Low Suction Superheat Circuit is shut down Manual 168
T115 Alert Circuit B Low Suction Superheat Circuit is shut down Manual 168
Automatic, when discharge
This is a non-broadcast alarm.
P118 Pre-Alert High Discharge Gas Temperature temperature is less than 168
Compressor A1 is shut down. 250 F (121.1 C).
T118 Alert High Discharge Gas Temperature Compressor A1 is shut down. Manual 168
A120 Alarm Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Circuit is shut down Manual 168
Temperature Alarm
This is a non-broadcast alarm. If more than
one compressor in the circuit is running,
Circ.A Low Sat. Suct.Temp —
P120 Pre-Alert one of the compressors will be shut down. Automatic 168
One Comp Shutdown
A 15-minute prohibition timer is added to
the compressor.
The circuit is shut down. A 15-minute
Circuit A Low Saturated Suction
T120 Alert prohibition timer is added to the last Automatic 168
Temperature Alert compressor.
Circuit B Low Saturated Suction
A121 Alarm Circuit is shut down Manual 168
Temperature Alarm
This is a non-broadcast alarm. If more than
one compressor in the circuit is running,
P121 Pre-Alert Circ.B Low Sat. Suct.Temp — one of the compressors will be shut down. Automatic 168
One Comp Shutdown
A 15-minute prohibition timer is added to
the compressor.
Circuit B Low Saturated Suction The circuit is shut down. A 15-minute
T121 Alert prohibition timer is added to the last Automatic 168
Temperature Alert compressor.
This is a non-broadcast alarm. Circuit
Circuit A High Pressure Switch shuts down or is not allowed to start. A
Automatic 169
Chattering 15-minute prohibition timer is added to the
circuit restart.
P122 Pre-Alert
This is a non-broadcast alarm. Circuit
Circuit A High Pressure Switch shuts down or is not allowed to start. A
Automatic 170
Trip 15-minute prohibition timer is added to the
circuit restart.
Circuit A High Pressure Switch
Chattering Circuit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 169
T122 Alert
Circuit A High Pressure Switch
Circuit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 170
Trip
This is a non-broadcast alarm. Circuit
Circuit B High Pressure Switch shuts down or is not allowed to start. A Automatic 169
Chattering 15-minute prohibition timer is added to the
circuit restart.
P123 Pre-Alert
This is a non-broadcast alarm. Circuit
Circuit B High Pressure Switch shuts down or is not allowed to start. A
Trip 15-minute prohibition timer is added to the Automatic 170
circuit restart.
Circuit B High Pressure Switch
Circuit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 169
Chattering
T123 Alert
Circuit B High Pressure Switch
Circuit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 170
Trip
A126 Alarm Circuit A High Head Pressure Circuit is shut down Manual 170
T126 Alert Circuit A High Head Pressure Circuit is shut down Automatic 170
A127 Alarm Circuit B High Head Pressure Circuit is shut down Manual 170
T127 Alert Circuit B High Head Pressure Circuit is shut down Automatic 170
A140 Alarm Reverse Rotation Detected Unit is shut down Manual 171
A150 Alarm Unit Is In Emergency Stop Unit is shut down or is not allowed to start Automatic 173
LEGEND
A/D — Analog/Digital
AUX — Auxiliary
EEPROM — Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

164
 Table 79 —Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/ ALARM OR ACTION TAKEN RESET DETAILS PAGE
DESCRIPTION
ALERT CODE ALERT BY CONTROL METHOD REFERENCE
Illegal Configuration - AUX Board
Incorrect Revision
Illegal Configuration - AUX Board Soft-
ware Rev Must be 3 or Higher
Illegal Configuration - AUX Board
should be AUX1, Not AUX2
Illegal Configuration - Control Type
Set to Invalid Type for Split
A151 Alarm Unit is not allowed to start Automatic 173
Illegal Configuration - Dual Thermostat
Type on Single Ckt Unit
Illegal Configuration - Dual Thermostat
and Switch Demand Limit
Illegal Configuration - Invalid Unit Size
Has Been Entered
Illegal Configuration - Unit Configura-
tion Set to Invalid Type
A152 Alarm Unit Down Due to Multiple Failures Unit is not allowed to start Automatic 174
Occupancy Schedules are disabled. Unit
T153 Alert Real Time Clock Hardware Failure changes to Occupied and operates under Automatic 174
local control.
A154 Alarm Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure Unit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 174
T155 Alert Serial EEPROM Storage Failure None Manual 174
A156 Alarm Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Unit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 174
Failure Error
A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure Unit is shut down or is not allowed to start Manual 174
Loss of Communication with the Compressor Expansion Module functions
T170 Alert Automatic 174
Compressor Expansion Module are disabled
T173 Alert Loss of Communication with the Energy Managemet Module functions are Automatic 174
Energy Management Module disabled
For ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=7
without Return Air and Supply Air Thermis-
tors, unit is shut down or not allowed to
start.
For ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=9,
4-20 mA Cooling Setpoint 4-20 mA set point function is disabled.
T174 Alert Input Failure For ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=7 with
Automatic 174
Return Air and Supply Air Thermistors, or
C.TYP=9, unit operates with Cooling Set
Point 1 SetpointsCOOLCSP.1 as the
Active Set Point Run StatusVIEW
SETP
Loss of Communication with AUX Board functions, digital compressor
A175 Alarm Automatic 175
AUX Board and Motormaster® operations are disabled
4-20 mA Cooling Temperature Reset
T176 Alert 4-20 mA Reset Input Failure Automatic 175
function is disabled
4-20 mA Cooling Demand Limit
T177 Alert 4-20 mA Demand Limit Failure Automatic 175
function is disabled
Indoor Fan Status Failure — Fan Not
A200 Alarm Unit is shut down or is not allowed to start Automatic 175
Running
Circuit A Indoor Fan Status Failure — Circuit is shut down or is not allowed
T201 Alert Fan Not Running to start Automatic 175

T202 Alert Circuit B Indoor Fan Status Failure — Circuit is shut down or is not allowed Automatic 175
Fan Not Running to start
T303 Alert Coil — Scheduled Maintenance Due None Manual 175
T500 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — A1 Compressor A1 is shut down Automatic 175
T501 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — A2 Compressor A2 is shut down Automatic 175
T502 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — A3 Compressor A3 is shut down Automatic 175
T503 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — B1 Compressor B1 is shut down Automatic 175
T504 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — B2 Compressor B2 is shut down Automatic 175
T505 Alert Current Sensor Board Failure — B3 Compressor B3 is shut down Automatic 175
LEGEND
A/D — Analog/Digital
AUX — Auxiliary
EEPROM — Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

165
ALARM AND ALERT DETAILS Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
COMM FAIL — Communication Failure following items:
• Check for a welded compressor contactor.
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated any time the LEN • Check for a faulty Current Sensing Board.
(Local Equipment Network) communication is lost. An A152 • Check the Main Base Board relay output for the com-
alarm may be generated also. pressor command.
Action To Be Taken: If communication between the scrolling • Check for a wiring error.
marquee and Main Base Board is lost, the unit may continue to T051 — Circuit A, Compressor 1 Chattering Failure
run. If problem is internal to the Main Base Board, the
machine shuts down or is not allowed to start. T052 — Circuit A, Compressor 2 Chattering Failure
Reset Method: Automatic once communication is restored. T053 — Circuit A, Compressor 3 Chattering Failure
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the T055 — Circuit B, Compressor 1 Chattering Failure
following items: T056 — Circuit B, Compressor 2 Chattering Failure
• Check the MBB Instance Jumper. It should be set to “1.” T057 — Circuit B, Compressor 3 Chattering Failure
If it is missing or installed on “2,” this alarm will be gen-
erated. Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true:
• Check the LEN for a wiring error or short to ground. 1. The compressor is commanded ON.
• Check all Input connections for a short to ground. 2. The current sensor does not detect steady compressor cur-
• Check the machine grounding. rent while the compressor is commanded ON.
• Check the power supply for the Main Base Board. It
Action To Be Taken: The compressor is turned OFF.
should be 24 vac. Voltages less than 18 vac can cause
this problem. Reset Method: Manual
• If the unit has an AUX Board installed and is not Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
addressed correctly, it will cause a COMM FAIL alarm. following items:
Check the AUX Board address. • Check refrigerant charge. A chattering high pressure
T048 — Circuit A Compressor Availability Alert switch can cause this alarm.
• Check compressor contactor wiring.
T049 — Circuit B Compressor Availability Alert • Check control voltage.
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated any time another • Check for a wiring error.
alarm has locked out at least one compressor on 2-compressor T051 — Circuit A, Compressor 1 Failure
circuits or 2 compressors in a 3-compressor circuit. As a result,
the unit will not have enough compressors available to perform T052 — Circuit A, Compressor 2 Failure
the oil management routine. The control will shut the circuit T053 — Circuit A, Compressor 3 Failure
down. T055 — Circuit B, Compressor 1 Failure
Action To Be Taken: The circuit shuts down or is not allowed T056 — Circuit B, Compressor 2 Failure
to start.
T057 — Circuit B, Compressor 3 Failure
Reset Method: Manual
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true:
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items: 1. The compressor is commanded ON.
• See the offending alarm. 2. The current sensor does not detect compressor current
• For 2-compressor circuit units, the routine will require while the compressor is commanded ON.
both compressors to operate for the oil management rou- Action To Be Taken: The compressor is turned OFF.
tine. If one compressor fails, the T048/T049 alert will be
generated. This feature can be disabled by changing the Reset Method: Manual
value of TCOM, Two Comp Ckt Oil Mgmt (Configura- Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
tionSERV) from ENBL to DSBL. Caution must be following items:
exercised when making this change to ensure oil return at • Check for a Compressor Overload trip. Either the com-
all loading conditions. pressor internal overload protector is open or the external
A051 — Compressor A1 Stuck On Failure overload protector (Kriwan/CoreSense module) has acti-
vated.
A052 — Compressor A2 Stuck On Failure • If the unit is a 208/230 volt unit, be sure that the control
A053 — Compressor A3 Stuck On Failure transformer is wired to the correct voltage tap. Low volt-
A055 — Compressor B1 Stuck On Failure age to the Current Sensing Board can cause this alarm.
• Check the unit for low refrigerant charge. If the compres-
A056 — Compressor B2 Stuck On Failure sor operates for an extended period of time with low
A057 — Compressor B3 Stuck On Failure refrigerant charge, the compressor advanced scroll tem-
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true: perature protection (ASTP) device will open, which will
cause the compressor to trip on its overload protection
1. A compressor OFF command must be called for by the device.
MBB 10 seconds prior.
• Check for a compressor circuit breaker trip.
2. The compressor Current Sensing Board (CS) detects • Check the Current Sensing Board to be sure that it is
compressor current for a period of 4 continuous seconds operating correctly.
while the compressor is commanded OFF. • Check for a wiring error.
Action To Be Taken: The affected compressor is commanded • For compressors that use the Kriwan/CoreSense com-
OFF. The head pressure control algorithm will be activated to pressor protection module, check the following items:
energize fans to maintain proper head pressure. All other com- -Check the motor temperature lead connection.
pressors will be commanded OFF. -If the compressor is a replacement compressor, verify
Reset Method: Manual that the correct Kriwan/CoreSense module is installed.
Replacement compressors are shipped with a 115-volt
module. The 38AP units operate with a 24-volt module

166
 that is shipped with the compressor, but not installed. with the Control Mode, Run StatusVIEWSTAT=9 (SPT
The 115-volt module must be removed and replaced with Satisfied) and Space Temp Control Mode, Run Status
the 24-volt module shipped with the compressor. Failure VIEWSPT.M=0 (Cool Off). If the sensor fails closed or
to do so will not allow the M1-M2 contacts to close, re- shorted, the unit will be ON and Space Temp Control Mode,
sulting in this alarm. Run StatusVIEWSPT.M=2 (Hi Cool).
A060 — Supply Air Thermistor Failure If the sensor is being used to support space temperature re-
A060 — Supply Air Temperature Update Not Received set, the function will be disabled and the unit will continue to
run.
A061 — Return Air Thermistor Failure
Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
A061 — Return Air Temperature Update Not Received
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
Criteria for Trip: Two alarm criteria are used: following items:
• The sensor is required for the Control Type (Configura- • Check for a faulty thermistor.
tionOPT2C.TYP=1, 3, 5, or 9) and the sensor read- • Check for a wiring error.
ing is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). If • Check to see that the override button has not perma-
this condition is true, the thermistor failure alarm will be nently shorted the sensor. Holding the button down too
generated. long for an override period will cause this alarm.
• If the sensor is required for the Control Type (C.TYP=1,
3, 5, or 9) and the sensor is being written to by CCN or a T082 — Space Temperature Offset Sensor Failure
third-party control, the sensor must be updated every 3 Criteria for Trip: This alert occurs when the space temperature
minutes. If it is not updated, then the Update Not offset potentiometer is outside the range of –40 to 356 F (–40
Received alarm will be generated. to 180 C).
Action To Be Taken: The unit will be shut down. Action To Be Taken: Space temperature offset function will be
Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition is resolved disabled. The unit will run under normal control without the
space temperature offset.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items: Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
• Check for a faulty thermistor. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
• Check for a wiring error. following items:
• If temperatures are being transmitted, check transmission • Check for a faulty offset potentiometer.
timing and communication wiring. • Check for a wiring error.
T068 — Circuit A Compressor Return Gas Temperature T090 — Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure
Thermistor Failure T091 — Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure
T069 — Circuit B Compressor Return Gas Temperature Criteria for Trip: Transducer reading is outside the range of
Thermistor Failure 0.0 to 667.0 psig (0.0 to 4599 kPa).
Criteria for Trip: This alert occurs when the compressor return Action To Be Taken: Circuit is shut down.
gas temperature thermistor is outside the range of –40 to
245 F (–40 to 118 C). Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
Action To Be Taken: Circuit is shut down. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items:
Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves • Check for a faulty transducer.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the • Check for a wiring error.
following items: • Check the Main Base Board transducer channel for
• Check for a faulty thermistor. proper operation.
• Check for a wiring error. T092 — Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure
T073 — Outside Air Thermistor Failure T093 — Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure
Criteria for Trip: This alert occurs when the outdoor air tem- Criteria for Trip: Transducer reading is outside the range of
perature thermistor is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 0.0 to 420.0 psig (0.0 to 2896 kPa).
118 C).
Action To Be Taken: Circuit is shut down.
Action to be taken: If the unit is set for outdoor air temperature
reset, reset will be disabled and the unit will run under normal Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
set point control. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
If the unit is configured to use outdoor ambient lockout, the following items:
unit will be shut down or not allowed to start. If the unit is re- • Check for a faulty transducer.
quired to be operating, disable Low Ambient Lockout, Set • Check for a wiring error.
PointsCOOLOAT.L= 20 F (–28.9 C). • Check the Main Base Board transducer channel for
proper operation.
Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
T094 — Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items: Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true:
• Check for a faulty thermistor. 1. The unit must have a digital compressor installed and en-
• Check for a wiring error. abled on circuit A.
T074 — Space Temperature Thermistor Failure 2. Discharge gas temperature is outside the range of –40 to
Criteria for Trip: This alert occurs when the Space Tempera- 350 F (–40 to 177 C).
ture Thermistor is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to Action To Be Taken: The digital compressor operation is dis-
118 C). continued.
Action To Be Taken: If the sensor is being used as the control Reset Method: Automatic, once the condition resolves.
input to determine capacity ConfigurationOPT2
C.TYP=5 (SPT Multi), the control’s response depends on the
failure mode. If the sensor fails open, the unit will be OFF

167
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the average or the lowest suction pressure readings over the period
following items: of time. This has the tendency to artificially increase the
• Check the wiring for the discharge temperature thermis- reported superheat, since the lowest suction pressure (saturated
tor (DTT). suction temperature) is used.
• Check the discharge temperature thermistor for accuracy. Action To Be Taken: The circuit is shut down.
• Check the unit refrigerant charge.
• If the unit does not include a digital compressor, check Reset Method: Manual.
the configuration to be sure that a digital compressor is Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
not enabled, ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=NO following items:
• If the unit has been configured for a digital compressor • Check the charge for the system.
and communication with the AUX Board has been lost • Check the TXV for proper installation and operation.
(T175 — Loss of Communication with AUX Board), • Check the TXV for proper sizing.
this alarm will be generated. Resolve the T175 issue and • Check the evaporator coil for a refrigerant restriction.
the alarm should clear. • Check for airflow during operation.
T110 — Circuit A Loss of Charge • Check the suction pressure transducer for accuracy.
• Check the return gas thermistor for accuracy.
T111 — Circuit B Loss of Charge • Check to be sure the return gas thermistor for the circuit
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true: is insulated with cork insulation tape to obtain a more
1. The circuit is OFF. accurate reading.
2. The circuit’s discharge pressure is less than 26 psi P118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature
(179.3 kPa). T118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature
The alert criteria are ignored during the following conditions: Criteria for Trip: This alert is part of the compressor protection
1. The first minute following power-up algorithm for digital compressor units. The following condi-
tions must be true:
2. If the outdoor air temperature is less than –5 F (–20.6 C)
1. This alert will be triggered if the unit has a digital com-
3. For 1 minute following the outdoor air temperature rising pressor and it is enabled (ConfigurationUNIT
above –5 F (–20.6 C) A1.TY=YES).
Action To Be Taken: The circuit is not allowed to start. 2. The discharge gas temperature (Temperatures
Reset Method: Manual CIR.AD.GAS) is greater than 268 F (131.1 C).
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the Action To Be Taken: Compressor A1 is shut down. If this is the
following items: first or second occurrence within a 32-minute window, the pre-
• Check the refrigerant charge for the circuit. alert P118 will be generated. This is a non-broadcast alert. If
• Check the discharge pressure transducer for the circuit this is the third occurrence within the 32-minute window, the
for accuracy. alert T118 is generated.
• Check the discharge pressure transducer wiring. Reset Method: The first two times compressor A1 is shut down
• Check the outside air thermistor (OAT) sensor for accu- due to the pre-alert P118, the pre-alert will automatically reset
racy. after the discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C) and
• Check the outside air thermistor (OAT) sensor wiring. the compressor will restart. The third occurrence will result in
T112 — Circuit A High Suction Temperature the alert T118 and will require a manual reset.
T113 — Circuit B High Suction Temperature Multiple P118 pre-alerts may be stored in the alarm history.
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true: If there are 1 or 2 strikes on the circuit and the circuit recovers
for a period of time, it is possible to clear out the strikes, there-
1. The circuit is ON. by resetting the strike counter automatically.
2. The circuit’s saturated suction temperature is greater than Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
70 F (21.1 C) after 5 minutes of operation. following items:
Action To Be Taken: The circuit is shutdown. • Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a
Reset Method: Manual leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the • Check the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) for
following items: accuracy.
• Check the TXV operation. • Check the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) con-
• Check to be sure the TXV bulb is correctly located. nections.
• Check TXV equalizer line if properly installed A120 — Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature
• Check TXV capacity is proper for the application. Alarm
• Check for high return air temperatures. A121 — Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature
• Check the suction pressure transducer for the circuit for Alarm
accuracy.
P120 — Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature Pre-
T114 — Circuit A Low Suction Superheat Alert
T115 — Circuit B Low Suction Superheat P121 — Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature Pre-
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true: Alert
1. The circuit is ON. T120 — Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature
2. The circuit superheat is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for 5 contin- Alert
uous minutes. T121 — Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature
Superheat is a calculated value based on saturated suction tem- Alert
perature converted from the circuit suction pressure and return Criteria for Trip: This alert or alarm is used to keep the evapo-
gas temperature. In units with a digital compressor, the com- rator from freezing and the saturated suction temperature
pressor’s operation will cause the suction pressure to rise and above the low limit for the compressors.
fall when operating. In this case, suction pressure is an

168
At least one compressor in the circuit must be ON and one of • Check the operation of the liquid line solenoid valves, if
the following conditions must be true: equipped. Be sure that the correct valve operates for the
1. The circuit’s saturated suction temperature is less than circuit.
20 F (–6.7 C) for 4 minutes continuously, • Be sure that the liquid line solenoid valve is installed cor-
rectly (flow), if equipped.
2. The circuit’s saturated suction temperature is less than • For the circuit TXV(s):
10 F (–12.2 C) for 2 minutes continuously,
- Check the superheat setting of the TXV. A very high set-
3. The circuit’s saturated suction temperature is less than ting will cause low saturated suction condition.
0° F (–17.8 C) for 1 minute continuously,
- Check to be sure the proper TXV is installed.
4. The circuit’s saturated suction temperature is less than
–20 F (–28.9 C) for 20 seconds continuously. - Check the operation of the TXV.
Action To Be Taken: If the circuit contains more than one oper- - Check the location of the TXV bulb and that it is properly
ating compressor and the operating conditions meet the criteria installed on the correct suction line.
above, one compressor in the affected circuit will be shut down - Check the TXV equalizer line to be sure that it is properly
with an appropriate local alert (P120/P121) generated. This is a connected to the correct suction line and open to suction
non-broadcast alert/alarm. The alarm LED will not be lit, nor pressure.
will the pre-alert be broadcast on a network. A 15-minute time • Check for a low airflow condition. Low airflow can
guard will be added to the compressor. If the saturated suction cause a low saturated suction condition.
temperature continues to be less than the criteria listed above, • Check for dirty air filters causing an airflow restriction.
then another compressor will be shut down until the last com- • Check the nozzle in the distributor to be sure it is correct.
pressor on the circuit is shut down at which time the appropri- • Check for a blocked or mis-circuited evaporator coil.
ate alert or alarm will be issued (T120, T121, A120, A121). P122 - Circuit A High Pressure Switch Chattering Pre-Alert
If the circuit contains one operating compressor and the op- P123 - Circuit B High Pressure Switch Chattering Pre-Alert
erating conditions meet the criteria above, the affected circuit
will be shut down and the appropriate alert (T120, T121) gen- T122 - Circuit A High Pressure Switch Chattering
erated. A 15-minute time guard will be added to the T123 - Circuit B High Pressure Switch Chattering
compressor. Criteria for Trip: This alert has multiple criteria. The Main
Reset Method: The first two occurrences that a circuit is shut Base Board (MBB) monitors the HPS. The 38AP units employ
down entirely due to this condition, an alert will be generated one HPS for each circuit. For High Pressure Switch Chattering
(T120, T121) which keeps the circuit off for 15 minutes before Alert the following conditions must be true:
allowing the circuit to try again. The third time this occurs, an 1. The circuit is ON or OFF.
alarm (A120, A121) will be generated which will necessitate a
2. The Main Base Board (MBB) detects a Closed-Open-
manual reset to get the circuit back running.
Closed-Open pattern of the high pressure switch circuit
To recover from these alerts, a 15-minute off timer must within a 16-second window.
elapse and the saturated suction temperature must rise above
If all of the conditions listed above are true, a pre-alert
29.32 F (–1.5 C). If recovery occurs, staging will be allowed on
the circuit again. Therefore, it is possible that multiple P120 or (P122/P123) will be generated for the first two occurrences.
P121 as well as T120 or T121 alerts may be stored in the alarm This is a non-broadcast alert. The third occurrence will result in
the alert (T122/T123). If the circuit runs for 15 minutes with-
history. If there are 1 or 2 strikes on the circuit and the circuit
recovers for a period of time, it is possible to clear out the out tripping the pre-alert condition or if the circuit has cycled
strikes thereby resetting the strike counter automatically. The three times, the strike counter is reset.
control must have saturated suction temperature greater than or Action To Be Taken: The circuit shuts down immediately or is
equal to 34 F (1.1 C) for 60 minutes in order to reset the strike not allowed to start.
counters. Reset Method: The pre-alerts (P122/P123) will automatically
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the reset for the first two occurrences of this condition. After the
following items: pre-alert is generated, there is a 15-minute time delay and the
• Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a high pressure switch must reset before the circuit will attempt
leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit. to restart. Following the second automatic reset of the pre-alert,
• Check for proper air flow for the evaporator coil. the next occurrence (T122/T123) will require a manual reset.
• If the alarms are occurring during cold ambient condi- Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
tions, consider installing Motormaster® head pressure following items:
control. • Check the wiring of the high pressure switch circuit.
• If wind baffles are required, check to see if they are • Check the wiring of the liquid line solenoid valve, if
installed. equipped. Be sure that the correct valve operates for the
• Check the suction pressure transducer accuracy. circuit.
• Check for a low load condition (low return air tempera- • Check for non-condensables in the refrigerant circuit.
ture). Check the control system to see if the unit should • Check for condenser air re-circulation.
be operating. • Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).
• In control systems which rely on the supply air tempera- • Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.
ture: • Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.
- Check the accuracy of the supply air sensor. • Check the evaporator coil for a refrigerant restriction.
• For the TXV(s) (thermostatic expansion valves):
- Check the supply air temperature sensor to be sure that it
- Check for the proper TXV. The 38AP units require bleed
is correctly sensing the mixed supply air temperature, port TXVs. Failure to use this type of valve may result in
especially in a face split coil. high pressure switch trips at start-up.
• Check for restrictions in the liquid line. Be sure all ser-
- Check the TXV for proper operation.
vice valves are open. • Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation
• Check the filter drier. Change the core(s) if necessary. and operation.
• Check the liquid line service valve to be sure that it is
open.

169
• Check to be sure that the long line check valve assembly calculations. These are shown graphically in Fig. 187 and
is mounted correctly. The arrows indicate direction of 188.
flow. a. If circuit saturated suction temperature is greater
• Check the Discharge Pressure Transducer for accuracy. than or equal to –20.0 F (–28.9 C) but less than
P122 - Circuit A High Pressure Trip Pre-Alert –10.0 F (–23.3 C) and circuit saturated condensing
P123 - Circuit B High Pressure Trip Pre-Alert temperature is greater than 2.5 times circuit satu-
rated suction temperature + 140.0 F (104.4 C).
T122 - Circuit A High Pressure Trip
b. If circuit saturated suction temperature is greater
T123 - Circuit B High Pressure Trip than or equal to –10.0 F (–23.3 C) but less than
Criteria for Trip: This alert has multiple criteria. The Main 15.0 F (–9.4 C) and circuit saturated condensing
Base Board (MBB) monitors the HPS (high pressure switch). temperature is greater than circuit saturated suction
The 38AP units employ one HPS for each circuit. For High temperature + 125.0 F (69.4 C).
Pressure Trip Pre-Alert and Alert: c. If circuit saturated suction temperature is greater
1. The alarm criterion is checked when the circuit is ON or than or equal 15.0 F (–9.4 C) but less than 40.0 F
OFF. (4.4 C) and circuit saturated condensing tempera-
2. The circuit HPS opens for 4 seconds or more. ture is greater than 0.4 times circuit saturated suc-
tion temperature + 134.0 F (63.8 C).
If all of the conditions listed above are true a pre-alert (P122/
P123) will be generated for the first two occurrences. This is a d. If circuit saturated suction temperature is greater
non-broadcast alert. The third occurrence will result in the alert than or equal 40.0 F (4.4 C) but less than 45.0 F
(T122/T123). If the circuit runs for 15 minutes without tripping (7.3 C) and circuit saturated condensing tempera-
the pre-alert condition or if the circuit has cycled three times, ture is greater than circuit saturated suction tem-
the strike counter is reset. perature + 110.0 F (61.1 C).
Action To Be Taken: The circuit shuts down immediately or is e. If circuit saturated suction temperature is greater
not allowed to start. than or equal 45.0 F (7.3 C) and circuit saturated
condensing temperature is greater than 155.0 F
Reset Method: The pre-alerts (P122/P123) will automatically
(68.3 C).
reset for the first two occurrences of this condition. After the
pre-alert is generated, there is a 15-minute time delay and the The first four daily occurrences of these conditions will gen-
high pressure switch must reset before the circuit will attempt erate a T126 or T127 alert for the appropriate circuit. With the
to restart. Following the second automatic reset of the pre-alert, fifth daily occurrence, the condition will generate the A126 or
the next occurrence (T122/T123) will require a manual reset. A127 alarm for the appropriate circuit.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the Action To Be Taken: The circuit shuts down immediately.
following items: Reset Method: For T126/T127, the alert will automatically
• Check the wiring of the high pressure switch circuit. reset for the first 4 daily occurrences once the circuit saturated
• Check the wiring of the liquid line solenoid valve, if condensing temperature falls below the trip criteria. The cir-
equipped. Be sure that the correct valve operates for the cuit will restart once the time guard has been satisfied. For
circuit. A126/A127, the alarm requires a manual reset.
• Check for non-condensables in the refrigerant circuit. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
• Check for condenser air re-circulation. following items:
• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). • Check for non-condensables in the refrigerant circuit.
• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. • Check for condenser air re-circulation.
• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. • Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).
• Check the evaporator coil for a refrigerant restriction. • Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.
• For the TXV(s) (thermostatic expansion valves): • Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.
- Check for the proper TXV. The 38AP units require bleed • Check the evaporator coil for a refrigerant restriction.
port TXVs. Failure to use this type of valve may result in • Check the TXV for proper operation.
High Pressure Switch Trips at start-up. • Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation
- Check the TXV for proper operation. and operation.
• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation • Check the liquid line service valve to be sure that it is
and operation. open.
• Check the liquid line service valve to be sure that it is • Check the suction and discharge pressure transducers for
open. accuracy.
• Check to be sure that the long line check valve assembly • Confirm unit configuration.
is mounted correctly. The arrows indicate direction of
flow.
• Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy.
A126 - Circuit A High Head Pressure
T126 - Circuit A High Head Pressure
A127 - Circuit B High Head Pressure
T127 - Circuit B High Head Pressure
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true:
1. The circuit is ON.
2. All outdoor fans for the circuit or all common outdoor
fans must be ON.
3. The compressor’s operation is outside of the operating
envelope. See Fig. 156 and 157 on page 138 for the
compressor operating envelope, or see the following

170
 a38-7400
Fig. 187 — Maximum Saturated Condensing Temperature ( °F)

a38-7401

Fig. 188 — Maximum Saturated Condensing Temperature ( °C)

A140 — Reverse Rotation Detected The example below lists sample suction pressures of a starting
Criteria for Trip: The alarm criterion is checked when the first circuit. Figures 189 and 190 show reverse rotation detection
compressor in a circuit is started. The control writes the value for this example.
of the suction pressure 5 seconds before starting the first com-
pressor in the circuit. At the time the compressor is started,
another reading is obtained. A rate of change is calculated SUCTION
SATURATED
SUCTION
based on the two values and extrapolated to the expected value TIME PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
5 seconds later. The suction pressure is obtained 5 seconds psig (kPa)
°F (°C)
after the compressor has been started. If the suction pressure is t=–5 (5 seconds before
not at least 1.25 psig (8.62 kPa) lower than the expected value 200.4 (1382) 70 (21.1)
compressor start)
or the upper limit for proof of proper rotation, a reverse rota- t=0 (compressor start) 197.1 (1359) 69 (20.6)
tion alarm is declared. t=5 (5 seconds after 169.6 (1169) 60 (15.6)
compressosr start)

171
 195

Suction Pressure (psig)

190

185

180

175

170

a38-7402
165
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Time (sec)
LEGEND
Suction Pressure (psig)
Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig)
Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)
Fig. 189 — Reverse Rotation Detection (psig)

1350
Suction Pressure (psig)

1300

1250

1200

1150 a38-7403
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Time (sec)
LEGEND
Suction Pressure (psig)
Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig)
Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)
Fig. 190 — Reverse Rotation Detection (kPa)

172
 Using the rate of change of the suction from the example, EMSTOP in the CCN Status Table is set to “Emstop,” the unit
five (5) seconds after t=0, the suction pressure should be 193.8 will shut down and generate this alarm.
psig (1336 kPa), if the compressor did not start. Subtracting Action To Be Taken: The unit is shut down or not allowed to
the 1.25 psig (8.62 kPa) from extrapolated suction pressure, start.
192.55 psig (1328 kPa) determines the upper limit that if the
suction pressure is above this level the unit will fault on reverse Reset Method: Automatic, once the Emergency Stop command
rotation. This point is denoted by a black dot in Fig. 189 and is revoked. This alarm will clear when the EMSTOP point
190. In the example, the suction pressure is lower than the up- value is returned to “Enable.”
per limit, and therefore is allowed to continue operation. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
Action To Be Taken: The unit shuts down immediately. value of the CCN point, EMSTOP. If it is “Emstop,” change it
to “Enable.”
Reset Method: Manual.
A151 — Illegal Configuration Alarm
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items: Criteria for Trip: This alarm is indicated when an illegal con-
• Check the wiring of the incoming power for proper phas- figuration has been entered. There are several different config-
ing. This alarm may be disabled once the reverse rota- uration alarms. When expanding the alarm, the control will
tion check has been verified by setting Reverse Rotation indicate which configuration is incorrect. For example, if the
Enable ConfigurationSERVREV.R=DSBL. wrong size is configured, the A151 expansion will indicate
• Check Control Type (ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP) “ILLEGAL CONFIG - INVALID UNIT SIZE.”
setting. If the A1 compressor is a digital compressor and Action To Be Taken: The unit is not allowed to start.
is enabled (ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=YES), Reset Method: Automatic, once the illegal configuration is cor-
C.TYP must be selected for a digital compressor compat- rected.
ible control option, 1 (VAV), 3 (TSTAT MULTI), 5 (SPT Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
MULTI), 7 (PCT CAP), or 9 (VAV SETPOINT). items shown in Table 80 based on the illegal configuration.
A150 — Unit is in Emergency Stop
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is indicated when a CCN Emer-
gency Stop command is received. If the CCN point name
Table 80 — Illegal Configurations (Alarm A151)
ILLEGAL CONFIGURATION POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software.
Check the red LED on the AUX Board to be sure that it is blinking in unison with the other
boards in the unit. If it is not, it is not communicating:
AUX BOARD INCORRECT REVISION - Check the LEN Communication wiring for continuity to the Main Base Board.
- Check the AUX Board DIP Switch settings for the address.
For 208 volt systems, check the control transformer to be sure that it is tapped correctly.
Consider cycling power to the AUX Board.
AUX BOARD SOFTWARE REV Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software.
The AUX Board software revision can be found in the vendor part number, CEPL130567-03.
MUST BE 3 OR HIGHER The -03 indicates Revision 03.
Check the part number of the AUX Board. It should have the Carrier Part Number
32GB500442EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130567-03). This board is required for the digital
AUX BOARD SHOULD BE AUX1, NOT AUX2 compressor output as well as the Motormaster drive signal. An AUX2 Board, Carrier Part
Number 332GB500432EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130568-02) does not have the capability
to supply these outputs.
CONTROL TYPE SET TO INVALID TYPE FOR Check ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP for a valid control type.
SPLIT
DUAL THERMOSTAT TYPE ON Check to see if ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP = 8 (DUAL TSTAT) control type is configured
SINGLE CKT UNIT for a single circuit machine, ConfigurationUNITNCKT = 1 (Single Circuit)
DUAL THERMOSTAT AND Check to see if ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP = 8 (DUAL TSTAT) control type is configured
SWITCH DEMAND LIMIT with switch control demand limit enabled, ConfigurationRSETDMDC = 1 (Switch).
INVALID UNIT SIZE HAS BEEN ENTERED Check to be sure that a valid unit size ConfigurationUNITSIZE has been entered.
UNIT CONFIGURATION SET TO Digital compressor, ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=YES, and hot gas Configuration
INVALID TYPE OPT1MLV=YES are both enabled. Only one can be enabled.

173
A152 — Unit Down Due to Failure T170 — Loss of Communication with the Compressor
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated if both circuits are off Expansion Module
due to alerts and/or alarms. Criteria for Trip: This alert is generated when the Main Base
Action To Be Taken: The unit is not allowed to start. Board (MBB) cannot establish communication with the Com-
pressor Expansion Module (CXB). This board is found on the
Reset Method: Automatic, once the other alerts/alarms are cor- 38APD070-130 units only.
rected
Action To Be Taken: All CXB functions are disabled.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, see the
appropriate alert/alarm information in Table 79 on page 163. Reset Method: Automatic once communication is re-estab-
lished.
T153 — Real Time Clock Hardware Failure Alert
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
Criteria for Trip: This alert is indicated when the Main Base following items:
Board (MBB) time clock is not initialized or fails to increment. • Confirm unit configuration, ConfigurationUNIT
Action To Be Taken: Occupancy defaults to Occupied. Unit SIZE.
defaults to Local On mode, ignoring any schedules. • Check LEN communication wiring.
Reset Method: Automatic, when the time is initialized or starts • Check CXB DIP Switch settings.
incrementing again. • Check for control power to the CXB.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the T173 — Loss of Communication with the Energy Manage-
following items: ment Module
• Check the Hour and Minute (Time Clock Criteria for Trip: This alert is generated when the Main Base
TIMEHH.MM), and reset the time. If the error Board (MBB) cannot establish communication with the
returns, replace the board. Energy Management Module (EMM).
• If the unit is connected to a CCN network, and time Action To Be Taken: All EMM functions, Switch Controlled
broadcast is enabled, repeated broadcasts of time behind Demand Limit, Y3/Y4 Thermostat Input, 4-20 mA Demand
that of the controller will cause this alarm to be gener- Limit, 4-20 mA Temperature Reset, 4-20 mA Percent Capac-
ated. Disconnect the unit from the network to trouble- ity, and 4-20 mA Cooling Set Point, are disabled.
shoot the time clock. Check the network settings and
clock. Reset Method: Automatic once communication is re-estab-
lished.
A154 — Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is indicated when a problem with following items:
the Serial EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable • Confirm unit configuration, EMM Module Installed
Read-Only Memory) on the Main Base Board (MBB) has (ConfigurationOPT1EMM). If a feature requiring
been detected. the EMM is enabled, the control will automatically start
Action To Be Taken: The unit is shut down or not allowed to searching for the board. If it is not installed, disable the
start. feature requiring the EMM.
Reset Method: Manual. • Check LEN communication wiring.
• Check EMM DIP switch settings.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, reset the
power to the unit. If the error returns, replace the board. • Check for control power to the EMM.
T155 — Serial EEPROM Storage Failure T174 — 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure
Criteria for Trip: The following conditions must be true:
Criteria for Trip: Configuration data in the serial EEPROM
cannot be verified which may mean Main Base Board replace- 1. The unit must be configured for either Control Type Con-
ment. It is possible a re-initialization of the database or particu- figurationOPT2C.TYP=7 [PCT CAP] or 9 [VAV
lar storage area(s) by cycling power may correct this problem. SETPOINT].
Action To Be Taken: None. 2. The Energy Management Module is required and must be
Reset Method: Manual. configured, EMM Module Installed, Configuration
OPT1EMM=YES.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, reset the
3. The signal is less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.
power to the unit. If the error returns, replace the board.
A156 — Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Action To Be Taken: For ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=7
(PCT CAP) without return air and supply air thermistors, the
Criteria for Trip: Critical configuration data in the serial function is disabled and the unit is not allowed to start or run.
EEPROM chip cannot be verified which may mean MBB For ConfigurationOPT2C.TYP=9 (VAV SETPOINT),
replacement. Recovery is automatic but typically board the function is disabled. For C.TYP=7 with return air and sup-
replacement is necessary. ply air thermistors and C.TYP=9, the unit controls will use
Action To Be Taken: Unit shuts down or is not allowed to start. Cooling Set Point 1 (SetpointsCOOLCSP.1) as the Active
Reset Method: Manual. Set Point (Run StatusVIEWSETP).
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, reset the Reset Method: Automatic once signal is restored.
power to the unit. If the error returns, replace the board. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
A157 — A/D Hardware Failure following items:
• Confirm the input signal the control is reading. Check
Criteria for Trip: A problem with the analog to digital conver- the value of 4-20 Cooling Demand (Inputs Mode4-
sion chip on the Main Base Board has caused the chip to fail. 20CL.MA). Compare this to expected signal strength.
Action To Be Taken: Unit shuts down or is not allowed to start. • Confirm that the signal wiring polarity, LVT-8 (–) and
Reset Method: Manual LVT-10 (+), is correct.
• Confirm Energy Management Module configuration,
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, reset the EMM Module Installed, ConfigurationOPT1
power to the unit. If the error returns, replace the board. EMM=YES.

174
A175 — Loss of Communication with AUX board • Check airflow switch circuit wiring.
Criteria for Trip: A communication problem with the AUX • If no airflow switch is used, confirm the jumper is in
Board has been detected by the Main Base Board. The AUX place between LVT-16 and LVT-18.
Board is required for digital compressor operation and low T201 — Circuit A Indoor Fan Status Failure - Fan Not
ambient head pressure control (Motormaster®) operation. Running
Action to be taken: Functions associated with the AUX Board, T202 — Circuit B Indoor Fan Status Failure - Fan Not
digital compressor and Motormaster controller operation are Running
stopped. Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated when the following
Reset Method: Automatic once the condition is resolved. conditions are true:
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the 1. 38AP unit is Enabled (InputsGEN.ISTST=STRT).
following items: 2. Control Type is Dual Thermostat (Configuration
• Check the configurations. If Compressor A1 Digital OPT2C.TYP=8).
ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=YES and no AUX
Board is installed, this alarm will be generated. Simi- 3. Airflow switch 1 is open (InputsGEN.I ID.F.A=
larly, if Motormaster Select ConfigurationM.MST OFF) (T201) or airflow switch 2 is open (Inputs
MMR.S=YES and no AUX Board is installed, this alarm GEN.IID.F.B=OFF) (T202).
will be generated. Action To Be Taken: For T201, circuit A is not allowed to start,
• Check the address of the AUX Board. or is shut down. For T202, circuit B is not allowed to start, or
• Check the LEN wiring to the AUX Board. is shut down.
• Check the power supply to the AUX Board. Reset Method: Automatic once the condition is resolved.
T176 — 4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
Criteria for Trip: This alert indicates a problem has been following items:
detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either • Confirm that airflow is present in the air handler if an air-
less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. flow switch is used.
Action to be taken: The cooling reset function will be disabled • Check airflow switch circuit wiring.
when this occurs. • If no airflow switch 1 is used, confirm the jumper is in
place between LVT-16 and LVT-18 for T201.
Reset Method: Manual • If no airflow switch 2 is used, confirm the jumper is in
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the place between LVT-17 and LVT-18 for T202.
following items: T303 — Coil - Scheduled Maintenance Due
• Confirm the input signal the control is reading. Check
the value of 4-20 Reset Signal (Inputs Mode4-20 Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated when the Coil Ser-
RSET). Compare this to expected signal strength. vice Countdown (Run StatusPMCOILC.L.DN) has
• Confirm signal polarity, LVT-8 (–) and LVT-9 (+) expired.
• Confirm Energy Management Module configuration, Action To Be Taken: None, service alert only.
EMM Module Installed, ConfigurationOPT1 Reset Method: Manual. Perform coil maintenance. Before the
EMM=YES. alert can be cleared, Coil Cleaning Maint Done (Run Status
T177 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure PMCOILC.L.MN) must be toggled from NO to YES.
Criteria for Trip: This alert indicates that a problem has been Reset the alert.
detected with demand limit 4 to 20 mA input. The input value Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check Coil
is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. Service Countdown.
Action to be taken: The cooling demand limit function will be T500 — Current Sensor Board A1 Failure
disabled when this occurs. T501 — Current Sensor Board A2 Failure
Reset Method: Manual. T502 — Current Sensor Board A3 Failure
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the T503 — Current Sensor Board B1 Failure
following items:
• Confirm the input signal the control is reading. Check T504 — Current Sensor Board B2 Failure
the value of 4-20 Demand Signal (Inputs Mode4-20 T505 — Current Sensor Board B3 Failure
DMND). Compare this to expected signal strength. Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated when the Current
• Confirm signal polarity, LVT-8 (–) and LVT-7 (+) Sensing Board (CSB) output read by the Main Base Board
• Confirm Energy Management Module configuration, (MBB) or Compressor Expansion Module (CXB) is at a con-
EMM Module Installed, ConfigurationOPT1 stant high value.
EMM=YES. Action To Be Taken: Affected compressor is shut down.
A200 — Indoor Fan Status Failure - Fan Not Running Reset Method: Automatic, when signal returns to normal.
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is generated when the following Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
conditions are true: following items:
1. 38AP unit is Enabled (InputsGEN.ISTST=STRT). • Check the CSB to be sure that it is wired properly.
2. Airflow switch is open (InputsGEN.IID.F.A= • On 208 volt systems, be sure that the control transformer
OFF). is wired for 208 volts. It has been noted with some sys-
tems that operate on 208 volts, when the wire is located
Action To Be Taken: Unit is not allowed to start, or is shut on the 230 volt tap, nuisance T500-T505 alarms have
down. been generated.
Reset Method: Automatic once the condition is resolved. • Consider replacing the CSB.
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the
following items:
• Confirm that airflow is present in the air handler if an air-
flow switch is used.

175
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES
Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure
MENU ITEM
VIEW (Auto Display)
RUN (Unit Run Hours and Start)
HOUR (Circ and Comp Run Hours)
RUN STATUS
STRT (Compressor Starts)
PM (Preventative Maintenance)
VERS (Software Version Numbers)
TEST (Service Test Mode)
OUTS (Outputs)
SERVICE TEST
CMPA (Circuit A Compressor Test)
CMPB (Circuit B Compressor Test)
UNIT (Entering and Leaving Unit Temperatures)
TEMPERATURES CIR.A (Temperatures Circuit A)
CIR.B (Temperatures Circuit B)
PRC.A (Pressures Circuit A)
PRESSURES
PRC.B (Pressure Circuit B)
COOL (Cooling Setpoints)
SETPOINTS
HEAD (Head Pressure Setpoints)
GEN.I (General Inputs)
INPUTS CRCT (Circuit Inputs)
4-20 (4-20 mA Inputs)
GEN.O (General Outputs)
OUTPUTS CIR.A (Outputs Circuit A)
CIR.B (Outputs Circuit B)
DISP (Display Configuration)
UNIT (Unit Configuration)
CCN (CCN Network Configs)
OPT1 (Unit Options 1 Hardware)
OPT2 (Unit Options 2 Controls)
CONFIGURATION
M.MST (Motormaster)
RSET (Reset Cool Temp)
SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load)
SERV (Service Configuration)
BCST (Broadcast Configuration)
TIME (Time of Day)
DATE (Month, Date, Day, and Year)
DST (Daylight Savings Time)
TIME CLOCK HOL.L (Local Holiday Schedules)
SCH.N (Schedule Number)
SCH.L (Local Occupancy Schedule)
OVR (Schedule Override)
OPERATING MODES MODE (Modes)
CRNT (Current Active Alarms)
ALARMS RCRN (Reset All Current Alarms)
HIST (Alarm History)

176
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS
RAT XXX.X °F (°C) Return Air Temperature
SAT XXX.X °F (°C) Supply Air Temperature
SETP XXX.X °F (°C) Active Set Point
CTPT XXX.X °F (°C) Control Point
LOD.F XXX Load/Unload Factor
Range: 1 to 9
1=Off Local
2=Off CCN
3=Off Time
4=Off Emrgcy
STAT X Control Mode
5=On Local
6=On CCN
7=On Time
8=IDFS Not On
9=SPT Satisfied
VIEW Range: 0 to 3
0=COOL OFF
SPT.M X Space Temp Control Mode 1=LO COOL
2=HI COOL
3=COOL ON
OCC YES/NO Occupied
MODE YES/NO Override Modes in Effect
CAP XXX% Percent Total Capacity
STGE X Requested Stage
ALRM XXX Current Alarms & Alerts
TIME HH:MM Time of Day 00:00-23:59
Range: 1 to 12
MNTH XX Month of Year 1=January
2=February
etc.
DATE XX Day of Month Range: 1 to 31
YEAR XXXX Year of Century
UNIT RUN HOUR AND START
RUN HRS.U XXXX HRS Machine Operating Hours
STR.U XXXX Machine Starts
CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS
HRS.A XXXX HRS Circuit A Run Hours
HRS.B XXXX HRS Circuit B Run Hours
HR.A1 XXXX HRS Compressor A1 Run Hours
HOUR HR.A2 XXXX HRS Compressor A2 Run Hours
HR.A3 XXXX HRS Compressor A3 Run Hours
HR.B1 XXXX HRS Compressor B1 Run Hours
HR.B2 XXXX HRS Compressor B2 Run Hours
HR.B3 XXXX HRS Compressor B3 Run Hours

177
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB- SUB-
SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
COMPRESSOR STARTS
ST.A1 XXXX Compressor A1 Starts
ST.A2 XXXX Compressor A2 Starts
STRT ST.A3 XXXX Compressor A3 Starts
ST.B1 XXXX Compressor B1 Starts
ST.B2 XXXX Compressor B2 Starts
ST.B3 XXXX Compressor B3 Starts
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
COIL MAINTENANCE
SI.CL XXXX HRS Coil Cleaning Srvc Int Range: 0 to 65,500 hrs
Default: 8760 hrs
C.L.DN XXXX HRS Coil Service Countdown
C.L.MN YES/NO Coil Cleaning Maint.Done User Input
PM
COIL COIL MAINTENANCE DATES
C.L.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
CL.DT
C.L.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS
MBB CESR131466-XXXXX
AUX CESR131333-XXXXX
VERS CXB CESR131173-XXXXX
EMM CESR131174-XXXXX
MARQ CESR131171-XXXXX
NAVI CESR130227-XXXXX

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
To enable Service Test mode, move
TEST ON/OFF Service Test Mode Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to
OFF. Change TEST to ON and move
switch to ENABLE
OUTPUTS
FAN1 OFF/ON Fan 1 Relay
FAN2 OFF/ON Fan 2 Relay
FAN3 OFF/ON Fan 3 Relay
FAN4 OFF/ON Fan 4 Relay
FAN5 OFF/ON Fan 5 Relay
V.HPA XXX% Var Head Press % Cir A
OUTS
V.HPB XXX% Var Head Press % Cir B
DIG.S XX sec Comp A1 Unload Time Range: 0 to 15 sec.
LSV.A OFF/ON Liquid Line Solenoid A
LSVA2 OFF/ON Liquid Line Solenoid A2
LSV.B OFF/ON Liquid Line Solenoid B
LSVB2 OFF/ON Liquid Line Solenoid B2
RMT.A OFF/ON Remote Alarm Relay
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST
CC.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Relay
Based on Unit Model
Range:
UL.TM XX sec Comp A1 Unload Time
CMPA 0 to 10 = 38AP025-030
0 to 8 = 38AP040-130
CC.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Relay
CC.A3 OFF/ON Compressor A3 Relay
MLV OFF/ON Minimum Load Valve Relay
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST
CC.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Relay
CMPB
CC.B2 OFF/ON Compressor B2 Relay
CC.B3 OFF/ON Compressor B3 Relay

178
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Temperatures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES
RAT XXX.X °F (°C) Return Air Temperature See Note 1
UNIT SAT XXX.X °F (°C) Supply Air Temperature See Note 1
OAT XXX.X °F (°C) Outside Air Temperature See Note 1
SPT XXX.X °F (°C) Space Temperature See Notes 1 and 2
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
SCT.A XXX.X °F (°C) Saturated Condensing Tmp
SST.A XXX.X °F (°C) Saturated Suction Temp
CIR.A
RGT.A XXX.X °F (°C) Compressor Return Gas Temp See Note 1
D.GAS XXX.X °F (°C) Discharge Gas Temp
SH.A XXX.X ΔF (ΔC) Suction Superheat Temp
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B
SCT.B XXX.X °F (°C) Saturated Condensing Tmp
CIR.B SST.B XXX.X °F (°C) Saturated Suction Temp
RGT.B XXX.X °F (°C) Compressor Return Gas Temp See Note 1
SH.B XXX.X ΔF (ΔC) Suction Superheat Temp
NOTES:
1. Normal scrolling marquee rotation is Item, Value, and Units; for
example, OAT, 72.5, °F. In case of a fault, the normal rotation is
modified to indicate the fault; for example, OAT, 72.5, °F, FAIL.
2. If ConfigurationOPT1SPT.S=DSBL, the display will read
0.0 °F (–17.8 °C).

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
PRESSURES CIRCUIT A
PRC.A DP.A XXX.X psig (kPa) Discharge Pressure See Note
SP.A XXX.X psig (kPa) Suction Pressure See Note
PRESSURES CIRCUIT B
PRC.B DP.B XXX.X psig (kPa) Discharge Pressure See Note
SP.B XXX.X psig (kPa) Suction Pressure See Note
NOTE: Normal scrolling marquee rotation is Item, Value, and Units;
for example, DP.A, 238.4, PSIG. In case of a fault, the normal rota-
tion is modified to indicate the fault; for example, DP.A, 238.4, PSIG,
FAIL.

179
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Setpoints Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
COOLING SET POINTS
Range: 40 to 80 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
CSP.1 XX.X °F (°C) Cooling Set Point 1
Default: 60 F (15.6 C)
Range: 40 to 80 F (4.4 to 26.7 C)
CSP.2 XX.X °F (°C) Cooling Set Point 2 Default: 55 F (12.8 C)
Range: 65 to 80 F (18.3 to 26.7 C)
SPS.P XXX.X °F (°C) Space T Cool Set Point Default: 78 F (25.6 C)
Recommended Setting: 78 F (25.6 C)
SPT.O XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Space Temperature Offset See Note
ST.P.O XXX.X °F (°C) Space T SP Plus Offset See Note
COOL P.CAP XXX.X % Percent Cap. Requested See Note
L.C.ON X.X ΔF (ΔC) Lo Cool On Set Point Range: –1.0 to 2.0 ΔF (–0.6 to 1.1 ΔC)
Default: 1.0 ΔF (0.6 ΔC)
Range: 0.5 to 20.0 ΔF (0.3 to 11.1 ΔC)
H.C.ON XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Hi Cool On Set Point Default: 3.0 ΔF (1.7 ΔC)
Recommended Setting: 3.0 ΔF (1.7 ΔC)
Range: 0.5 to 2.0 ΔF (0.3 to 1.1 ΔC)
L.C.OF X.X ΔF (ΔC) Lo Cool Off Set Point Default: 0.5 ΔF (0.3 ΔC)
Recommended Setting: 0.5 ΔF (0.3 ΔC)
Range: –20.0 to 80.0 F (-28.9 to 26.7 C)
OAT.L XX.X °F (°C) OAT Lockout Temperature
Default: 30.0 F (–1.1 C)
HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS
Range: 85 to 120 F (29.4 to 48.9 C)
H.SP XXX.X °F (°C) Head Set Point On
Default: 115 F (46.1 C)
Range: 45 to 90 F (7.2 to 32.2 C)
H.SP.F XX.X °F (°C) Head Set Point Off Default: 72.0 F (22.2 C)
HEAD F.ON XXX.X °F (°C) Fan On Set Point See Note
F.OFF XXX.X °F (°C) Fan Off Set Point See Note
F.DLT XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Fan Stage Delta Range: 0.0 to 50.0 ΔF (0.0 to 27.8 ΔC)
Default: 15.0 ΔF (8.3 ΔC)
Range: 0 to 300 seconds
F.TME XXX sec Fan Delta Active Time
Default: 60 seconds
NOTE: These values are values read or calculated by the controller
and cannot be changed from this item.

180
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
GENERAL INPUTS
STST STRT/STOP Start/Stop Switch
ID.F.A ON/OFF Indoor Fan Status-CIRA
Y.1 ON/OFF Y1 Thermostat Input
Y.2 ON/OFF Y2 Thermostat Input
GEN.I
ID.F.B ON/OFF Indoor Fan Status-CIRB
Y.3 ON/OFF Y3 Thermostat Input
Y.4 ON/OFF Y4 Thermostat Input
DLS1 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 1
DLS2 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 2
CIRCUIT INPUTS
FKA1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Feedback
FKA2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Feedback
FKA3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Feedback
CRCT HPSA OPEN/CLSE High Pressure Switch A
FKB1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Feedback
FKB2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Feedback
FKB3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Feedback
HPSB OPEN/CLSE High Pressure Switch B
4-20 MA INPUTS
DMND XX.X mA 4-20 ma Demand Signal
4-20
RSET XX.X mA 4-20 ma Reset Signal
CL.MA XX.X mA Cap Req/Setpoint Signal

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
GENERAL OUTPUTS
FAN1 ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay
FAN2 ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay
FAN3 ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay
GEN.O FAN4 ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay
FAN5 ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay
MLV.R ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay
V.HPA XXX.X % Var Head Press Out Cir A
V.HPB XXX.X % Var Head Press Out Cir B
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
CC.A1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay
DPE.R XXX Comp A1 Load Percent
CIR.A CC.A2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay
CC.A3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Relay
LSV.A ON/OFF Liquid Line Solenoid A
L.V.A2 ON/OFF Liquid Line Solenoid A2
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B
CC.B1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay
CC.B2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay
CIR.B
CC.B3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Relay
LSV.B ON/OFF Liquid Line Solenoid B
L.V.B2 ON/OFF Liquid Line Solenoid B2

181
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
DISPLAY COMMENT
SUB-MODE ITEM METR=OFF ITEM DESCRIPTION METR=OFF
(METR=ON) (METR=ON)
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs Default: OFF
METR ON/OFF Metric Display Default: OFF
Range: 0 to 3
0 = English
DISP LANG X Language Selection
1 = Espanol
2 = Francais
3 = Portuguese
Default: 0
PAS.E ENBL/DSBL Password Enable Default: ENBL
PASS XXXX Service Password
Range: 0 to 9999
Default: 1111
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Based on Unit Model
Range: 025 to 130 (23 to 118)
25 (23) = 38APD,APS025
27 (24) = 38APD,APS027
30 (27) = 38APD,APS030
40 (36) = 38APD,APS040
50 (45) = 38APD,APS050
SIZE XXX TONS* (tons) Unit Size 60 (54) = 38APD060
65 (59) = 38APS065
70 (63) = 38APD070
80 (73) = 38APD080
90 (82) = 38APD090
100 (91) = 38APD100
115 (104) = 38APD115
130 (118) = 38APD130
Based on Unit Model
NCKT X Number of Refrigerant Circuits
Range 1 to 2
UNIT 1=38APS
2=38APD
SZ.A1 XX TONS (tons) Compressor A1 Size
SZ.A2 XX TONS (tons) Compressor A2 Size
SZ.A3 XX TONS (tons) Compressor A3 Size These values are set by SIZE.
SZ.B1 XX TONS (tons) Compressor B1 Size
and are not field-configurable.
See ConfigurationUNIT Data
SZ.B2 XX TONS (tons) Compressor B2 Size Table on page 185.
SZ.B3 XX TONS (tons) Compressor B3 Size
FAN.S X Fan Sequence Number
Based on Unit Model
A1.TY YES/NO Compressor A1 Digital
Default:
YES = Factory Equipped
NO = Not Equipped
Based on Unit Model
MAX.T XX SECS Maximum A1 Unload Time
Range:
0 to 10 = 38AP025-030
0 to 8 = 38AP040-130
CCN NETWORK CONFIGS
CCNA XXX CCN Address
Range: 0 to 239
Default: 1
CCNB XXX CCN Bus Number
Range: 0 to 239
Default: 1
CCN Range: 1 to 5
1 = 2400
2 = 4800
BAUD X CCN Baud Rate 3 = 9600
4 =19,200
5 =38,400
Default: 3
*The Navigator™ display always uses capital letters, regardless of
the METR setting.

182
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
Default:
MLV.S YES/NO Minimum Load Valve Select YES = Factory Equipped
NO = Not Equipped
CSB.E ENBL/DSBL CSB Boards Enable Default: ENBL
SPT.S ENBL/DSBL Space Temp Sensor Default: DSBL
SP.O.S ENBL/DSBL Space Temp Offset Enable Default: DSBL
SP.O.R XX ΔF (ΔC) Space Temp Offset Range
Range: 1 to 10 ΔF (0.6 to 5.6 ΔC)
Default: 5 ΔF (2.8 ΔC)
Range 0 to 2
OPT1 0 = 5 k
RAT.T X RAT Thermistor Type 1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 0
Range 0 to 2
0 = 5 k
SAT.T X SAT Thermistor Type 1 = 10 k
2 = None
Default: 0
Default:
EMM YES/NO EMM Module installed YES = Factory Equipped
NO = Not Equipped
UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
Range: 1 to 9
1 = VAV
2 = Invalid
3 = Tstat Multi
4 = Tstat 2 Stg
C.TYP X Machine Control Type 5 = SPT Multi
6 = Invalid
7 = Pct Cap
8 = Dual Tstat
9 = VAV Setpoint
Default: 4
Range: 0 to 3
0 = Switch
OPT2 CTRL X Control Method
1 = Occupancy
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN Control
Default: 0
Range: 1 to 2
LOAD X Loading Sequence Select
1 = Equal
2 = Staged
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 3
1 = Automatic
LLCS X Lead/Lag Circuit Select 2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads
Default: 1
DELY XX MIN Minutes Off Time
Range: 0 to 15 Minutes
Default: 0

183
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
MOTORMASTER
Default:
MMR.S YES/NO Motormaster Select YES = Factory Equipped
NO = Not Equipped
P.GAN XX Head Pressure P Gain
Range: –20 to 20
Default: 1.0
M.MST
I.GAN XX.X Head Pressure I Gain
Range: –20 to 20
Default: 1.0
D.GAN XX.X Head Pressure D Gain
Range: –20 to 20
Default: 1.0
MIN.S XXX.X% Minimum Fan Speed
Range 0 to 100%
Default: 8%
RESET COOL TEMP
Range: 0 to 4
0 = No Reset
1 = 4-20 Input
CRST X Cooling Reset Type 2 = Out Air Temp
3 = Return (Not Supported)
4 = Space Temp
Default: 0
MA.DG XX.X ΔF (ΔC) 4-20 – Degrees Reset
Range: –30 to 30 ΔF (–16.7 to 16.7 ΔC)
Default: 10.0 ΔF (5.6 ΔC)
RM.NO XXX.X °F (°C) Remote – No Reset Temp
Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F (17.8 to 51.7 C)
Default: 10.0 F (–12.2 C)
RM.F XXX.X °F (°C) Remote – Full Reset Temp
Range: 0.0 to 125.0 F (17.8 to 51.7 C)
Default: 10.0 F (–12.2 C)
RM.DG XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Remote – Degrees Reset
Range: –30 to 30 ΔF (–16.7 to 16.7 ΔC)
Default: 0.0 ΔF (0.0 ΔC)
Feature Not Supported
RT.NO XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Return – No Reset Temp Range: 0.0 to 30.0 ΔF (0.0 to 16.7 ΔC)
Default: 10.0 ΔF (5.6 ΔC)
Feature Not Supported
RT.F XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Return – Full Reset Temp Range: 0.0 to 10.0 ΔF (0.0 to 5.6 ΔC)
RSET Default: 0.0 ΔF (0.0 ΔC)
Feature Not Supported
RT.DG XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Return – Degrees Reset Range: –30.0 to 30.0 ΔF (–16.7 to 16.7 ΔC)
Default: 0.0 ΔF (0.0 ΔC)
Range: 0 to 3
0 = None
DMDC X Demand Limit Select
1 = Switch
2 = 4-20 Input
3 = CCN Loadshed
Default: 0
DM20 XXX% Demand Limit at 20 mA
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 100%
SHNM XX Loadshed Group Number
Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
SHDL XX% Loadshed Demand Delta
Range: 0 to 60%
Default: 0%
SHTM XXX min Maximum Loadshed Time
Range: 0 to 120 Minutes
Default: 60 Minutes
DLS1 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 1
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 80%
DLS2 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 2
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 50%
SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD
RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select Default: Enable
CRMP ENBL/DSBL Cooling Ramp Loading
Default: 1.0
Range: 0.3 to 2
SLCT
SCHD XX Schedule Number
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 99
Z.GN X.X Deadband Multiplier
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 4

184
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SERVICE CONFIGURATION
EN.A1 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor A1
EN.A2 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor A2
EN.A3 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor A3 Factory default is based on SIZE. If com-
pressor size >0, item default is ENBL. See
SERV EN.B1 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor B1 ConfigurationUNIT Data Table below.
EN.B2 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor B2
EN.B3 ENBL/DSBL Enable Compressor B3
REV.R ENBL/DSBL Reverse Rotation Enable Default: ENBL
TCOM ENBL/DSBL Two Comp Ckt Oil Mgmt Default: ENBL
BROADCAST CONFIGURATION
T.D.B ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast Default: OFF
BCST OAT.B ON/OFF CCN OAT Broadcast Default: OFF
G.S.B ON/OFF Global Schedule Broadcst Default: OFF
BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er Default: OFF

ConfigurationUNIT Data
ConfigurationUNIT
MODEL METR=OFF (ON)
SZ.A1 SZ.A2 SZ.A3 SZ.B1 SZ.B2 SZ.B3 FAN.S
12 TONS 12 TONS
38APD025 (11 tons) 0 0 (11 tons) 0 0 1

38APD027 13 TONS 0 0 13 TONS 0 0 1

(12 tons) (12 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS
38APD030 0 0 0 0 1
(14 tons) (14 tons)
10 TONS 10 TONS 9 TONS 9 TONS
38APD040 (9 tons) (9 tons) 0 (8 tons) (8 tons) 0 2

38APD050 12 TONS 12 TONS 0 13 TONS 13 TONS 0 2

(11 tons) (11 tons) (12 tons) (12 tons)
13 TONS 13 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS
38APD060 0 0 3
(12 tons) (12 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS 11 TONS 11 TONS 11 TONS
38APD070 (14 tons) (14 tons) 0 (10 tons) (10 tons) (10 tons) 8

38APD080 15 TONS 15 TONS 0 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 4

(14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons)
13 TONS 13 TONS 13 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS
38APD090 5
(12 tons) (12 tons) (12 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS
38APD100 (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) 5

38APD115 15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 20 TONS 20 TONS 20 TONS 6

(14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (18 tons) (18 tons) (18 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS 25 TONS 25 TONS 25 TONS
38APD130 7
(14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) (23 tons) (23 tons) (23 tons)
12 TONS 12 TONS
38APS025 (11 tons) (11 tons) 0 0 0 0 1

38APS027 13 TONS 13 TONS 0 0 0 0 1

(12 tons) (12 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS
38APS030 0 0 0 0 1
(14 tons) (14 tons)
13 TONS 13 TONS 13 TONS
38APS040 0 0 0 2
(12 tons) (12 tons) (12 tons)
15 TONS 15 TONS 15 TONS
38APS050 (14 tons) (14 tons) (14 tons) 0 0 0 2

38APS065 0 0 0 20 TONS 20 TONS 20 TONS 9

(18 tons) (18 tons) (18 tons)

185
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
TIME OF DAY
TIME 24-Hour Format
HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute
Range 00:00 - 23:59
MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR
Range: 1 to 12
MNTH XX Month of Year 1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
DATE DOM XX Day of Month Range: 01 -31
Range 1 to 7
DAY X Day of Week 1 - 7 (1 = Sunday,
2 = Monday, etc.)
YEAR XXXX Year of Century
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
Range: 1 to 12
STR.M XX Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 4 (April)
STR.W X Week Range: 1 to 5
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 7
STR.D X Day 1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday, etc.
Default: 7
MIN.A XX Minutes to Add Range: 0 to 90
DST Default: 60
Range: 1 to 12
STP.M XX Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc Default:
10 (October)
Range: 1 to 5
STP.W X Week Default: 5
Range: 1 to 7
1 = Monday
STP.D X Day 2 = Tuesday, etc.
Default: 7
Range: 0 to 90
MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract Default: 60
HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.01
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days)
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.02
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days)
Default: 0

186
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.03
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days)
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.04
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days)
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.05
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.06
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.07
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.08
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0

187
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.09
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.10
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.11
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.12
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.13
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.14
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0

188
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.15
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.16
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.17
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.18
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.19
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0

189
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.20
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.21
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.22
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.23
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.24
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.25
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0

190
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.26
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.27
Range: 0 to 31
DAY XX Start Day 0 = No Holiday
1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
LEN Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.28
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.29
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30
Range: 0 to 12
0 = No Holiday
MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 = January
2 = February, etc.
Default: 0
HD.30
Range: 0 to 31
0 = No Holiday
DAY XX Start Day 1 to 31 ( Day of Month)
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN Duration (days) Default: 0

191
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE SUB-SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
Range: 0 to 99
0=No Schedule
SCH.N XX Schedule Number 1 to 64=Local Schedule
65 to 99=CCN Global Schedule
Default: 0
LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1
24-Hour Format
OCC.1 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.1 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.1 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.1
TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.1 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.1 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2
24-Hour Format
OCC.2 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.2 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.2 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.2 TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.2 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.2 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
SCH.L HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3
24-Hour Format
OCC.3 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.3 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.3 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.3 TUE.3 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.3 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.3 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.3 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.3 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.3 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.3 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4
24-Hour Format
OCC.4 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.4 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.4 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.4 TUE.4 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.4 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.4 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.4 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.4 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.4 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.4 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO

192
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE SUB-SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5
24-Hour Format
OCC.5 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.5 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.5 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.5
TUE.5 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.5 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.5 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.5 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.5 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.5 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.5 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6
24-Hour Format
OCC.6 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.6 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.6 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.6
TUE.6 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.6 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.6 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.6 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.6 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.6 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.6 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
SCH.L (cont)
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7
24-Hour Format
OCC.7 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.7 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.7 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.7
TUE.7 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.7 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.7 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.7 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.7 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.7 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.7 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8
24-Hour Format
OCC.8 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
24-Hour Format
UNC.8 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Default: 00.00
MON.8 YES/NO Monday In Period Default: NO
PER.8
TUE.8 YES/NO Tuesday In Period Default: NO
WED.8 YES/NO Wednesday In Period Default: NO
THU.8 YES/NO Thursday In Period Default: NO
FRI.8 YES/NO Friday In Period Default: NO
SAT.8 YES/NO Saturday In Period Default: NO
SUN.8 YES/NO Sunday In Period Default: NO
HOL.8 YES/NO Holiday In Period Default: NO

193
 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE SUB-SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SCHEDULE OVERRIDE
OVR.T X hrs Timed Override Hours Range: 0 to 4
Default: 0
OVR Range: 0 to 4
OVR.L X hrs Override Time Limit
Default: 0
SPT.O XX.X ΔF (ΔC) Space Temperature Offset See Note
T.OVR YES/NO Timed Override
NOTE: This value is read or calculated by the controller and cannot
be changed from this item.
Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
MODES CONTROLLING UNIT
MD05 ON/OFF Ramp Load Limited
MD06 ON/OFF Timed Override in effect
MD09 ON/OFF Slow Change Override
MD10 ON/OFF Minimum OFF time active
MD14 ON/OFF Temperature Reset
MD15 ON/OFF Demand Limited
MD17 ON/OFF Low Temperature Cooling
MODE
MD18 ON/OFF High Temperature Cooling
MDTG ON/OFF Time Guard Active
MD21 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit A
MD22 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit B
MD23 ON/OFF Minimum Comp. On Time
MD25 ON/OFF Low Sound Mode
D.OIL ON/OFF Digital Oil Recover Mode
L.OUT ON/OFF OAT Below Lockout Temp

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS
Alarms are shown as AXXX.
CRNT AXXX Expansion of the Pre-alert, Alert Pre-Alerts are shown as PXXX.
TXXX
PXXX or Alarm only Alerts are shown as TXXX.
Up to 20 Alarms will be displayed.
RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS
RCRN NO/YES Reset current alarms
ALARM HISTORY
Alarms are shown as AXXX.
HIST AXXX Expansion of the Pre-alert, Alert
TXXX or Alarm with Time and Date Pre-Alerts are shown as PXXX.
Alerts are shown as TXXX.
PXXX Stamp Up to 20 Alarms will be displayed.

194
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES
Status Tables
A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
N
0 = SERVICE
1 = OFF Local
2 = OFF CCN
3 = OFF Time
Control Mode 4 = Emergency STAT Read Only
5 = ON Local
6 = ON CCN
7 = ON Time
8 = IDF OFF
9 = SPT SATIS
N
0 = Cool Off
Space Temp Control Mode 1 = Lo Cool SPTMODE Read Only
2 = Hi Cool
3 = Cool On
Occupied NO/YES OCC Read Only
CCN Chiller STOP/START CHIL_S_S Read/Write
N
0 = Normal
Alarm State ALM Read Only
1 = Alert
2 = Alarm
Cap Req/Setpoint Signal NN.n mA COOL_MA Read Only
Active Demand Limit NNN % DEM_LIM Read/Write
Override Modes in Effect NO/YES MODE Read Only
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAP_T Read Only
Requested Stage NN STAGE Read Only
Active Setpoint NNN.n °F (°C) SP Read Only
Control Point NNN.n °F (°C) CTRL_PNT Read/Write
Return Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) RETURN_T Read/Write
Supply Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) SUPPLY_T Read/Write
Emergency Stop Enable/EMStop EMSTOP Read/Write
Minutes Left for Start 5 Character ASCII MIN_LEFT Read Only

CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPA_T Read Only
Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPA_A Read Only
Discharge Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) DP_A Read Only
Suction Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) SP_A Read Only
Head Setpoint ON NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_ON Read/Write
Head Setpoint OFF NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_OFF Read/Write
Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n °F (°C) SCTA Read Only
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F (°C) SSTA Read Only
Var Head Press Out Cir A NNN.n % VHPA_ACT Read Only
Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) RGTA Read Only
Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) DIGCMPDT Read Only
Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n F (C) SH_A Read Only

195
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Status Tables (cont)
CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
CIRC.A DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON K_A1_RLY Read Only
Comp A1 Load Percent NNN.n % DIGITAL% Read Only
Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON K_A2_RLY Read Only
Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON K_A3_RLY Read Only
Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid A OFF/ON LLSV_A Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid A2 OFF/ON LLSV_A2 Read Only
CIRC.A DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor A1 Feedback OFF/ON K_A1_FBK Read Only
Compressor A2 Feedback OFF/ON K_A2_FBK Read Only
Compressor A3 Feedback OFF/ON K_A3_FBK Read Only
High Pressure Switch A OPEN/CLOSE HPSA Read Only

CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
CIRC.B ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPB_T Read Only
Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPB_A Read Only
Discharge Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) DP_B Read Only
Suction Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) SP_B Read Only
Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n °F (°C) SCTB Read Only
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F (°C) SSTB Read Only
Var Head Press Out Cir B NNN.n % VHPB_ACT Read Only
Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) RGTB Read Only
Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n F (C) SH_B Read Only

CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
CIRC.B DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON K_B1_RLY Read Only
Compressor B2 Relay OFF/ON K_B2_RLY Read Only
Compressor B3 Relay OFF/ON K_B3_RLY Read Only
Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid B OFF/ON LLSV_B Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid B2 OFF/ON LLSV_B2 Read Only
CIRC.B DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor B1 Feedback OFF/ON K_B1_FBK Read Only
Compressor B2 Feedback OFF/ON K_B2_FBK Read Only
Compressor B3 Feedback OFF/ON K_B3_FBK Read Only
High Pressure Switch B OPEN/CLOSE HPSB Read Only

196
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Status Tables (cont)
OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
FANS
Fan Stage Circuit A NNN FANSTGEA Read Only
Fan Stage Circuit B NNN FANSTGEB Read Only
Fan 1 Relay OFF/ON FAN_1 Read Only
Fan 2 Relay OFF/ON FAN_2 Read Only
Fan 3 Relay OFF/ON FAN_3 Read Only
Fan 4 Relay OFF/ON FAN_4 Read Only
Fan 5 Relay OFF/ON FAN_5 Read Only
UNIT ANALOG VALUES
Return Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) RETURN_T Read/Write
Supply Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) SUPPLY_T Read/Write
TEMPERATURE RESET
4-20 mA Reset Signal NN.n mA RST_MA Read Only
Outside Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) OAT Read/Write
Space Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) SPT Read/Write
DEMAND LIMIT
4-20 mA Demand Signal NN.n mA LMT_MA Read Only
Demand Limit Switch 1 OFF/ON DMD_SW1 Read Only
Demand Limit Switch 2 OFF/ON DMD_SW2 Read Only
CCN Loadshed Signal N DL_STAT Read Only
MISCELLANEOUS
Supply Air Setpoint NNN.n °F (°C) SAT_SP Read Only

TSTAT_IN (Thermostat Input)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
Indoor Fan Status-CIRA OFF/ON IDFA_FS Read Only
Y1 Thermostat Input OFF/ON Y1 Read Only
Y2 Thermostat Input OFF/ON Y2 Read Only
indoor Fan Status-CIRB OFF/ON IDFB_FS Read Only
Y3 Thermostat Input OFF/ON Y3 Read Only
Y4 Thermostat Input OFF/ON Y4 Read Only

197
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Maintenance Tables
ALARMS (Active Alarms)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
Active Alarm #1 ALARM01C Read Only
Active Alarm #2 ALARM02C Read Only
Active Alarm #3 ALARM03C Read Only
Active Alarm #4 ALARM04C Read Only
Active Alarm #5 ALARM05C Read Only
Active Alarm #6 ALARM06C Read Only
Active Alarm #7 ALARM07C Read Only
Active Alarm #8 ALARM08C Read Only
Active Alarm #9 ALARM09C Read Only
Active Alarm #10 ALARM10C Read Only
Active Alarm #11 ALARM11C Read Only
Active Alarm #12 4 Character ASCII ALARM12C Read Only
Axxx
Active Alarm #13 ALARM13C Read Only
Pxxx
Active Alarm #14 Txxx ALARM14C Read Only
Active Alarm #15 ALARM15C Read Only
Active Alarm #16 ALARM16C Read Only
Active Alarm #17 ALARM17C Read Only
Active Alarm #18 ALARM18C Read Only
Active Alarm #19 ALARM19C Read Only
Active Alarm #20 ALARM20C Read Only
Active Alarm #21 ALARM21C Read Only
Active Alarm #22 ALARM22C Read Only
Active Alarm #23 ALARM23C Read Only
Active Alarm #24 ALARM24C Read Only
Active Alarm #25 ALARM25C Read Only

CURRMODS (Current Operating Modes)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
Ramp Load Limited OFF/ON MODE_5 Read Only
Timed Override in effect OFF/ON MODE_6 Read Only
Slow Change Override OFF/ON MODE_9 Read Only
Minimum OFF time active OFF/ON MODE_10 Read Only
Temperature Reset OFF/ON MODE_14 Read Only
Demand Limited OFF/ON MODE_15 Read Only
Low Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_17 Read Only
High Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_18 Read Only
High SCT Circuit A OFF/ON MODE_21 Read Only
High SCT Circuit B OFF/ON MODE_22 Read Only
Minimum Comp. On Time OFF/ON MODE_23 Read Only
Low Sound Mode OFF/ON MODE_25 Read Only
Digital Oil Recover Mode OFF/ON MODE_DFL Read Only
Time Guard Active OFF/ON MODE_TG Read Only
OAT Below Lockout Temp OFF/ON OATLMODE Read Only

198
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Maintenance Tables (cont)

LEARNFNS
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
SCT Delta for Comp A1 NNN.N F (C) A1SCTDT Read Only
SCT Delta for Comp A2 NNN.N F (C) A2SCTDT Read Only
SCT Delta for Comp B1 NNN.N F (C) B1SCTDT Read Only
SCT Delta for Comp B2 NNN.N F (C) B2SCTDT Read Only

LOADFACT (Capacity Control)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
CAPACITY CONTROL
Load/Unload Factor NNN SMZ Read Only
Control Point NNN.n °F (°C) CTRL_PNT Read/Write
Return Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) RETURN_T Read/Write
Supply Air Temperature NNN.n °F (°C) SUPPLY_T Read/Write
Ramp Load Limited OFF/ON MODE_5 Read Only
Slow Change Override OFF/ON MODE_9 Read Only
Low Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_17 Read Only
High Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_18 Read Only
Minimum Comp. On Time OFF/ON MODE_23 Read Only

PM-COIL (Condenser Coil Preventative Maintenance)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
NNNNN
Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter Range: 0 to 65,500 hours SI_COIL Read/Write
Default: 8760
Coil Service Countdown NNNNN hours CL_CDOWN Read Only
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done NO/YES CL_MAINT Read Write
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date 00/00/00 00:00 COIL_PM0 Read Only
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date 00/00/00 00:00 COIL_PM1 Read Only
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date 00/00/00 00:00 COIL_PM2 Read Only
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date 00/00/00 00:00 COIL_PM3 Read Only
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date 00/00/00 00:00 COIL_PM4 Read Only

199
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Maintenance Tables (cont)
RUNTEST
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPA_T Read Only
Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPA_A Read Only
Discharge Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) DP_A Read Only
Suction Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) SP_A Read Only
Head Setpoint ON NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_ON Read Only
Head Setpoint OFF NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_OFF Read Only
Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n °F (°C) SCTA Read Only
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F (°C) SSTA Read Only
Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) RGTA Read Only
Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) DIGCMPDT Read Only
Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n F (C) SH_A Read Only
Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON K_A1_RLY Read Only
Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON K_A2_RLY Read Only
Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON K_A3_RLY Read Only
Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY Read Only
Compressor A1 Feedback OFF/ON K_A1_FBK Read Only
Compressor A2 Feedback OFF/ON K_A2_FBK Read Only
Compressor A3 Feedback OFF/ON K_A3_FBK Read Only
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPB_T Read Only
Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPB_A Read Only
Discharge Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) DP_B Read Only
Suction Pressure NNN.n psig (kPa) SP_B Read Only
Head Setpoint ON NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_ON Read Only
Head Setpoint OFF NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_OFF Read Only
Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n °F (°C) SCTB Read Only
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F (°C) SSTB Read Only
Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F (°C) RGTB Read Only
Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n F (C) SH_B Read Only
Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON K_B1_RLY Read Only
Compressor B2 Relay OFF/ON K_B2_RLY Read Only
Compressor B3 Relay OFF/ON K_B3_RLY Read Only
Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY Read Only
Compressor B1 Feedback OFF/ON K_B1_FBK Read Only
Compressor B2 Feedback OFF/ON K_B2_FBK Read Only
Compressor B3 Feedback OFF/ON K_B3_FBK Read Only
Fan 1 Relay OFF/ON FAN_1 Read Only
Fan 2 Relay OFF/ON FAN_2 Read Only
Fan 3 Relay OFF/ON FAN_3 Read Only
Fan 4 Relay OFF/ON FAN_4 Read Only
Fan 5 Relay OFF/ON FAN_5 Read Only
Outside Air Temperature NNN.n OAT Read Only
Space Temperature NNN.n SPT Read Only
Return Air Temperature NNN.n RAT Read Only
Supply Air Temperature NNN.n SAT Read Only
Compressor A1 Size NNN TONS SIZE_A1 Read Only
Compressor A2 Size NNN TONS SIZE_A2 Read Only
Compressor A3 Size NNN TONS SIZE_A3 Read Only
Compressor B1 Size NNN TONS SIZE_B1 Read Only
Compressor B2 Size NNN TONS SIZE_B2 Read Only
Compressor B3 Size NNN TONS SIZE_B3 Read Only

200
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Maintenance Tables (cont)
STRTHOUR (Starts and Run Hours)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
Machine Operating Hours NNNNNN hours HR_MACH Read Only
Machine Starts NNNNNN CY_MACH Read Only
Circuit A Run Hours NNNNNN hours HR_CIRA Read Only
Compressor A1 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_A1 Read Only
Compressor A2 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_A2 Read Only
Compressor A3 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_A3 Read Only
Circuit B Run Hours NNNNNN hours HR_CIRB Read Only
Compressor B1 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_B1 Read Only
Compressor B2 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_B2 Read Only
Compressor B3 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_B3 Read Only
Circuit A Starts NNNNNN CY_CIRA Read Only
Compressor A1 Starts NNNNNN CY_A1 Read Only
Compressor A2 Starts NNNNNN CY_A2 Read Only
Compressor A3 Starts NNNNNN CY_A3 Read Only
Circuit B Starts NNNNNN CY_CIRB Read Only
Compressor B1 Starts NNNNNN CY_B1 Read Only
Compressor B2 Starts NNNNNN CY_B2 Read Only
Compressor B3 Starts NNNNNN CY_B3 Read Only

TESTMODE

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
Service Test Mode OFF/ON NET_CTRL Read Only
Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON S_A1_RLY Read Only
Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON S_A2_RLY Read Only
Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON S_A3_RLY Read Only
Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON S_B1_RLY Read Only
Compressor B2 Relay OFF/ON S_B2_RLY Read Only
Compressor B3 Relay OFF/ON S_B3_RLY Read Only
Fan 1 Relay OFF/ON S_FAN_1 Read Only
Fan 2 Relay OFF/ON S_FAN_2 Read Only
Fan 3 Relay OFF/ON S_FAN_3 Read Only
Fan 4 Relay OFF/ON S_FAN_4 Read Only
Fan 5 Relay OFF/ON S_FAN_5 Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid A OFF/ON S_LLSV_A Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid A2 OFF/ON S_LLSVA2 Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid B OFF/ON S_LLSV_B Read Only
Liquid Line Solenoid B2 OFF/ON S_LLSVB2 Read Only
Comp A1 Unload Time NN sec S_A1ULTM Read Only
Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON S_MLV Read Only
Remote Alarm Relay OFF/ON S_ALM Read Only
Var Head Press % Cir A NNN % S_VHPA Read Only
Var Head Press % Cir B NNN % S_VHPB Read Only

VERSIONS (Software Versions)

DESCRIPTION VALUE NETWORK ACCESS
MBB CESR131466- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
AUX CESR131333- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
CXB CESR131173- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
EMM CESR131174- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
Marquee CESR131171- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
Navigator CESR130227- 5 Character ASCII Read Only
MBB CESR131466- 5 Character ASCII Read Only

201
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Maintenance Tables (cont)
OCCDEFM/OCCPC01S
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
N
Range:
Current Mode (1=Occup.) MODE Read Only
0 = Unoccupied
1 = Occupied
N
Current Occup. Period # PER-NO Read Only
Range: 0 to 8
Timed-Override in Effect No/Yes OVERLAST Read Only
N
Timed-Override Duration hours OVR_HRS Read Only
Range: 0 to 4
Current Occupied Time 00:00 to 23:59 STRTTIME Read Only
Current Unoccupied Time 00:00 to 24:00 ENDTIME Read Only
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Next Occupied Day Thursday NXTOCDAY Read Only
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Next Occupied Time 00:00 to 23:59 NXTOCTIM Read Only
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Next Unoccupied Day Thursday NXTUNDAY Read Only
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Next Unoccupied Time 00:00 to 23:59 NXTUNTIM Read Only
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Previous Unoccupied Day Thursday PRVUNDAY Read Only
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Previous Unoccupied Time 00:00 to 24:00 PRVUNTIM Read Only

Configuration Tables
DISPLAY (Marquee Display Set Up)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
NNNN
Service Password Default: 1111 PASSWORD Read/Write
Range: 0000 to 9999
Password Enable Disable/Enable PASS_EBL Read/Write
Default: Enable
Off/On
Metric Display DISPUNIT Read/Write
Default: Off
N
Range:
0 = English
Language Selection 1 = Espanol LANGUAGE Read/Write
2 = Francais
3 = Portugues
Default: 0

HPA (Head Pressure Circuit A)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
SCT Delta for Comp A1 NNN.n F (C) A1SCTDT Configuration
SCT Delta for Comp A2 NNN.n F (C) A2SCTDT Configuration

202
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Configuration Tables (cont)
HPB (Head Pressure Circuit B)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
SCT Delta for Comp B1 NNN.n F (C) B1SCTDT Configuration
SCT Delta for Comp B2 NNN.n F (C) B2SCTDT Configuration

OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
Motormaster Select No/Yes MM_SLCT Configuration
Default: No/Yes*
No/Yes
Minimum Load Vlv Select MLV_FLG Configuration
Default: No
Disable/Enable
CSB Boards Enable Default: Enable CSB_ENA Configuration

Space Temp Sensor Disable/Enable SPTSENS Configuration

Default: Disable
Disable/Enable
Space Temp Offset Enable SPTOSENS Configuration
Default: Disable
NN
Space Temp Offset Range Range: 1 to 10 (0.6 to 5.6) F (C) SPTO_RNG Configuration
Default: 5 (2.8)
N
Range:
RAT Thermistor Type 0 = 5k RATTYPE Configuration
1 = 10k
2 = None
Default: 1
N
Range:
0 = 5k
SAT Thermistor Type 1 = 10k SATTYPE Configuration
2 = None
Default: 1
No/Yes
EMM Module installed EMM_BRD Configuration
Default: No/Yes*
*Based on unit model. If the unit is equipped with the option, the
default is Yes, otherwise, No.

203
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Configuration Tables (cont)
OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
N
Range:
1 = VAV
2 = Invalid
3 = Tstat Multi
Machine Control Type 4 = Tstat 2 Stg CTRLTYPE Configuration
5 = SPT Multi
6 = Invalid
7 = Pct Cap
8 = Dual Tstat
9 = VAV Setpoint
Default: 4
N
Range:
0 = Switch
Control Method 1 = Occupancy CONTROL Configuration
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN
Default: 0
N
Range:
Loading Sequence Select 1 = Equal SEQ_TYPE Configuration
2 = Staged
Default: 1
N
Range:
Lead/Lag Circuit Select 1 = Automatic LEAD_TYP Configuration
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads
Default: 1
Disable/Enable
Ramp Load Select RAMP_EBL Configuration
Default: Enable
NN
Minutes Off Time Range: 0 to 15 min DELAY Configuration
Default: 0
NN
Min Delay Between Stages Range: 30 to 90 sec STAGEDEL Configuration
Default: 90
N.n
Deadband Multiplier Range: 1.0 to 4.0 Z_GAIN Configuration
Default: 1.0

204
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Configuration Tables (cont)
RESTCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
COOLING RESET
N
Range:
0 = No Reset
1 = 4-20 mA Input
Cooling Reset Type CRST_TYP Configuration
2 = Out Air Temp
3 = Not Supported
4 = Space Temp
Default: 0
4-20 MA RESET
NNN.n
4-20 - Degrees Reset Range: –30 to 30 (–16.7 to 16.7) F (C) 420_DEG Configuration
Default: 10 (5.6)
REMOTE RESET
NNN.N
Remote - No Reset Temp Range: 0.0 to 125.0 (–17.8 to 51.7) °F (°C) REM_NO Configuration
Default: 10.0 ( 12.2)
NNN.N
Remote - Full Reset Temp Range: 0.0 to 125.0 (–17.8 to 51.7) °F (°C) REM_FULL Configuration
Default: 10.0 ( 12.2)
NNN.n
Remote - Degrees Reset Range: –30 to 30 (–16.7 to 16.7) F (C) REM_DEG Configuration
Default: 10 (5.6)
RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET
Feature Not Supported
Return - No Reset Temp NNN.n F (C) RTN_NO Configuration
Range: 0.0 to 30.0 (0.0 to 16.7)
Default: 10.0 (5.6)
Feature Not Supported
NNN.n
Return - Full Reset Temp Range: 0.0 to 10.0 (0.0 to 16.7) F (C) RTN_FULL Configuration
Default: 0.0 (0.0)
Feature Not Supported
NNN.n
Return - Degrees Reset F (C) RTN_DEG Configuration
Range: –30 to 30 (–16.7 to 16.7)
Default: 0.0 (0.0)
DEMAND LIMIT
N
Range:
0 = None
Demand Limit Select 1 = Switch DMD_CTRL
2 = 4-20 Input
3 = CCN Loadshed
Default: 0
NNN
Demand Limit at 20 mA Range: 0 to 100 % DMT20MA
Default: 100
NN
Loadshed Group Number Range: 0 to 99 SHED_NUM
Default: 0
NN
Loadshed Demand Delta Range: 0 to 60 % SHED_DEL
Default: 0
NNN
Maximum Loadshed Time Range: 0 to 120 min SHED_TIM
Default: 60
NNN
Demand Limit Switch 1 Range: 0 to 100 % DLSWSP1
Default: 80
NNN
Demand Limit Switch 2 Range: 0 to 100 % DLSWSP2
Default: 50

205
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Configuration Tables (cont)
SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Set Up)
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
NN
Range: 0 to 99
Schedule Number 0 = No Schedule SCHEDNUM Read/Write
1 to 64 = Local Schedule
65 to 99 = CCN Global Schedule
N
Override Time Limit Range: 0 to 4 hours OTL Read/Write
Default: 0
N
Timed Override Hours Range: 0 to 4 hours OVR_EXT Read/Write
Default: 0
Timed Override No/Yes TIMEOVER Read Only
Default: No

UNIT (Unit Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
NNN
Based on Unit Model
Range: 025 to 130
25 = 38APD,APS025
27 = 38APD,APS027
30 = 38APD,APS030
40 = 38APD,APS040
50 = 38APD,APS050
Unit Size 60 = 38APD060 TONS SIZE Configuration
65 = 38APS065
70 = 38APD070
80 = 38APD080
90 = 38APD090
100 = 38APD100
115 = 38APD115
130 = 38APD130
N
Based on Unit Model
Number of Refrig Ckts Range: NUMCKTS Configuration
1 = One (38APS)
2 = Two (38APD)
Compressor A1 Size TONS SIZE_A1 Read Only
Compressor A2 Size TONS SIZE_A2 Read Only
NNN
Compressor A3 Size See UNIT Data Table on TONS SIZE_A3 Read Only
Compressor B1 Size page 185 for appropriate TONS SIZE_B1 Read Only
data.
Compressor B2 Size TONS SIZE_B2 Read Only
Compressor B3 Size TONS SIZE_B3 Read Only
N
See UNIT Data Table on
Fan Sequence Number page 185 for appropriate FAN_TYPE Read Only
data.
Compressor A1 Digital? Yes CPA1TYPE Configuration
NN
Range:
0 to 10 (38AP025-030)
Maximum A1 Unload Time 0 to 8 (38AP040-130) sec MAXULTME Configuration
Default:
10 (38AP025-030)
8 (38AP040-130)
Allow Digital Low Load No/Yes DIG_XTND Configuration
Default: No

206
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
ALARMDEF/ALARMS01 (Alarm Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
NNNNNNNN
Alarm Routing Control Range: ALRM_CNT Read/Write
00000000 to 11111111
Default: 00000000
N
Equipment Priority Range: 0 to 7 EQP_TYPE Read/Write
Default: 4
NNN
Comm Failure Retry Time Range: 1 to 240 min RETRY_TM Read/Write
Default: 10
NNN
Range: 1 to 254
Re-Alarm Time 255 (Disabled) min RE-ALARM Read/Write
Default: 30
8 alphanumeric characters
Alarm System Name Default: SPLIT ALRM_NAM Read/Write

BRODEFS/BROCASTS (Broadcast Definition)

NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME ACCESS
CCN Time/Date Broadcast No/Yes CCNBC Read/Write
Default: No
No/Yes
CCN OAT Broadcast OATBC Read/Write
Default: No
No/Yes
Global Schedule Broadcst GSBC Read/Write
Default: No
No/Yes
CCN Broadcast Ack'er Default: No CCNBCACK Read/Write
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS START:
NN
Month Range: 1 to 12 STARTM Read/Write
Default: 4
N
Week Range: 1 to 5 STARTW Read/Write
Default: 1
N
Day Range: 1 to 7 STARTD Read/Write
Default: 7
NN
Minutes to Add Range: 0 to 90 min MINADD Read/Write
Default: 60
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS STOP:
NN
Month Range: 1 to 12 STOPM Read/Write
Default: 10
N
Week Range: 1 to 5 STOPW Read/Write
Default: 5
N
Day Range: 1 to 7 STOPD Read/Write
Default: 7
NN
Minutes to Subtract Range: 0 to 90 min MINSUB Read/Write
Default: 60

HOLIDAY/HOLDY01S to HOLDY30S (Holiday Definition)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
NN
Holiday Start Month Range: 1 to 12 HOL-MON Read/Write
Default: 0
NN
Start Day Range: 1 to 31 HOL-DAY Read/Write
Default: 0
NN
Duration (days) Range: 0 to 99 HOL-LEN Read/Write
Default: 0
NOTE: Only HOLDY01S is shown. HOLDY02S to HOLDY30S are identical in structure.

207
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Service Table
SERVICE
NETWORK
DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME
ACCESS
COMPRESSOR ENABLE
Enable Compressor A1 ENABLEA1 Read/Write
Enable Compressor A2 ENABLEA2 Read/Write
Default: Depends on Unit
Enable Compressor A3 Model. If Compressor Size ENABLEA3 Read/Write
Enable Compressor B1 is greater than 0, value is ENABLEB1 Read/Write
Enable.
Enable Compressor B2 ENABLEB2 Read/Write
Enable Compressor B3 ENABLEB3 Read/Write
Disable/Enable
Reverse Rotation Enable REVR_VER Read/Write
Default: Enable
Disable/Enable
Two Comp Ckt Oil Mgmt Default: Enable TCOM_EBL Read/Write

Setpoint Table
SETPOINT

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME NETWORK

ACCESS
COOLING
NNN.n
Cooling Setpoint 1 Range: 40.0 to 80.0 (4.4 to 26.7) °F (°C) CSP1 Read/Write
Default: 60.0 (15.6)
NNN.n
Cooling Setpoint 2 Range: 40.0 to 80.0 (4.4 to 26.7) °F (°C) CSP2 Read/Write
Default: 55.0 (12.8)
NNN.n
Space T Cool Setpoint Range: 65.0 to 80.0 (18.3 to 26.7) °F (°C) SPT_SP Read/Write
Default: 78.0 (25.6)
Space Temperature Offset NN.n °F (°C) SPTO Read Only
Space T SP Plus Offset NNN.n °F (°C) SPSP_PO Read Only
Percent Cap. Requested NNN % PERCAP Read Only
NN.n
Lo Cool On Setpoint Range: –1.0 to 2.0 (–0.6 to 1.1) F (C) DMDLCON Read/Write
Default: 1.0 (0.6)
NN.n
HI Cool On Setpoint Range: 0.5 to 20.0 (0.3 to 11.1) F (C) DMDHCON Read/Write
NN.n
Lo Cool Off Setpoint Range: 0.5 to 2.0 (0.3 to 1.1) F (C) DMDLCOFF Read/Write
Default: 0.5 (0.3)
RAMP LOADING
N.n
Cooling Ramp Loading Range: 0.2 to 2.0 CRAMP Read/Write
Default: 1.0
NNN.n
Head Setpoint ON Default: 115.0 (46.1) °F (°C) HSP_ON Read/Write

Head Setpoint OFF NNN.n °F (°C) HSP_OFF Read/Write

Default: 72.0 (22.2)
NNN.n
Fan On Set Point °F (°C) FANONSP Read Only
Default: 105.0 (40.5)
NNN.n
Fan Off Set Point Default: 55.0 (12.8) °F (°C) FANOFFSP Read Only

Fan Stage Delta NNN.n F (C) FSTGDLTA Read/Write

Default: 15.0 (8.3)
NNN
Fan Delta Active Time sec FANDLTTM Read/Write
Default: 60
NNN.n
OAT Lockout Temperature Range: –20.0 to 80 (–28.9 to 26.7) °F (°C) OATLOCK Read/Write
Default: 30.0 (–1.1)

208
 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

Time Schedule Tables

OCCPC01S

a38-7335

209
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION
The following section is used to configure the UPC Open con-
troller which is used when the BACnet* communication 9 0
option is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the

1
7 8

2 34
10's
main control box per unit components arrangement diagrams.

6
5
TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The
user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is 9 0

1
unique on the BACnet network. Perform the following proce-

7 8

2 34
1's
dure to assign an address:

6
5

1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter-

minal connector from the controller's power terminals la- Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches
beled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address
each time power is applied to it. BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC
2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con- Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address.
troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens dig- This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BAC-
it of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones net system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The
digit. Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by
adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.
As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25, The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101,
point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on but it can be changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView device.
the Ones (1's) switch to 5. By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device In-
stance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of
1610120.

BT485
TERMINATOR

BACNET
CONNECTION POWER LED
(BAS PORT)

Tx1 LED
Rx1 LED

Tx2 LED
Rx2 LED BACNET
BAUD RATE
8
67 9 DIP SWITCHES
01

EIA-485
45

23
JUMPERS ADDRESS
8
67 9 ROTARY
01
45

23 SWITCHES

RUN LED

ERROR LED

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

* Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerat-

ing, and Air-Conditioning Engineers).

210
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/
TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for
all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open con-
troller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this
protocol's communications.
If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull
the screw terminal connector from the controller's power termi-
nals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP
switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.
Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS
Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP
switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A and
Fig. C. Fig. C — UPC Open Controller DIP Switches
Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a dai-
for MS/TP sy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are
DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance,
Off Off Off Off On Off
twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length
is 2000 ft (610 m).
Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on
to EIA-485 and 2W. a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions
The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.
set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP. To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:
Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appro- 1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's
priate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600, BAS Port.
19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Table B and Fig. C.
2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and
Table B — Baud Selection Table grounds.
BAUD RATE DS2 DS1
3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s
screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.
9,600 Off Off
19,200 On Off NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network
38,400 Off On
segment.
76,800 On On 4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC
Open controller's power terminals if they are not current-
WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/ ly connected.
TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates 5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a
using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications module status report. To perform a module status report
at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps. using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold
the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

Fig. D — Network Wiring

211
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator alternatives. The Halar* specification has a higher temperature
on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. rating and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard† specifi-
NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with cation, and it is appropriate for use in applications where the
it. user is concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less
likely to crack in extremely low temperatures.
To order a BT485 terminator, contact your Carrier represen-
tative. NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum
signal integrity.
MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommen-
dations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL
temperature rating specifications list two acceptable

Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

SPECIFICATION RECOMMMENDATION
Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable
Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)
Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.
Color Code Black/White
Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal
Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire
SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.
Jacket Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.
Dc Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal
Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor
Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal
Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)
SmokeGard 167 F (75 C)
UL Temperature Rating
Halar -40 to 302 F (-40 to 150 C)
Voltage 300 vac, power limited
Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage NEC — National Electrical Code
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable O.D. — Outside Diameter
DC — Direct Current TC — Tinned Copper
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer UL — Underwriters Laboratories

*Registered trademark of Solvay Plastics

†Trademark of AlphaGary-Mexichem Corp.

212
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

CONNECT AIR CONTRACTORS

WIRE TYPE DESCRIPTION BELDEN RMCORP
INTERNATIONAL WIRE AND
CABLE
22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC
MS/TP specifications.
NETWORK
(RS-485) 24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —
for specifications.
RNET 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable
CMP — Communications Plenum Rated
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
TC — Tinned Copper

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROL- If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are
LER — The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad dis- required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations
play unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user inter- must be changed.
face to an Open controller. These items let the user access the The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-
controller network information. These are accessory items and dress and Bus number in the ComfortLink controller. These
do not come with the UPC Open controller. configurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee dis-
The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the play or accessory Navigator™ handheld device at the follow-
UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must ing items:
be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)
access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re-
quire an additional USB link cable for connection. Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)
See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instruc- The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-
tions on connecting and using the BACview6 device. dress and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These con-
figurations can be changed using the accessory BACview6 dis-
To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), contact your Car- play.
rier representative.
Navigation: BACview→CCN
CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S Home: Element Comm Stat
PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink Element: 1
control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) Bus: 0
number and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for
CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.

Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection

213
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC battery-backed real time clock keeps track of time in the event
Open controller defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the of a power failure.
Chiller Lead/Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier
technician must change the configuration to only one CCN IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open con-
Time Broadcaster on the CCN bus. troller when replacing the battery, or the date, time, and
TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or trend data will be lost.
addressing the UPC Open controller, contact your Carrier rep-
resentative. To determine when to replace the battery, measure the volt-
COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the age. If the voltage is below 2.9 volts, replace the battery. This
controller is communicating with the devices on the network. can be accomplished while the UPC Open controller is pow-
See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication ered.
traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the If the battery must be replaced, remove the battery from the
more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs controller, making note of the battery's polarity. Battery polari-
on UPC Open module. ty indication is on the UPC Open casing near the battery. Insert
TESTING AND REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BAT- the new battery, matching the battery's polarity with the polari-
TERY — The UPC Open controller’s 10-year lithium ty indicated on the UPC Open controller.
CR2032 battery retains the following data for a maximum of NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the control-
10,000 hours during power outages: control programs, editable ler is shown in Table G.
properties, schedules, and trends. The UPC Open controller’s Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN
point names.

Table E — LED Status Indicators

LED STATUS
Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on
POWER the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition
that caused the fault returns to normal.
RX Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
TX Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is an Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
RUN Lights based on controller status. See Table F.
ERROR Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication
RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS
2 flashes per second Off Normal
2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error
2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted
2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network
2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted
5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running
5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running
7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout
14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

214
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
Table G — Network Points List

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME READ/ UNITS DEFAULT RANGE BACNET BACNET
WRITE VALUE OBJECT ID OBJECT NAME
4-20 Cooling Demand COOL_MA R mA 0-20 AV:6 cool_ma_1
4-20 mA Demand Signal LMT_MA R mA 0-20 AV:36 lmt_ma_1
4-20 mA Reset Signal RST_MA R mA 0-20 AV:33 rst_ma_1
Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM R/W % 100 0-100 AV:2 dem_lim_1
Active Setpoint SP R °F -20-70 AV:4 sp_1
MSV Point for i-Vu / 0 = Normal
Alarm State BACnet based on R 1 = Alert MSV:1 alm_msv_1
CCN point ALM 2 = Alarm
0 = Stop
CCN Chiller CHIL_S_S R/W Start 1 = Start BV:4 chil_s_s_1
CCN Loadshed Signal DL_STAT R 0-2 AV:37 dl_stat_1
Circuit A Run Hours HR_CIRA R hr 0-9999 AV:59 hr_cira_1
Circuit A Starts CY_CIRA R 0-9999 AV:67 cy_cira_1
Circuit B Run Hours HR_CIRB R hr 0-9999 AV:63 hr_cirb_1
Circuit B Starts CY_CIRB R 0-9999 AV:71 cy_cirb_1
0 = No
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done CL_MAINT R/W No BV:54 cl_maint_1
1 = Yes
Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter SI_COIL R/W hr 8760 0-9999 AV:50 si_coil_1
Coil Service Countdown CL_CDOWN R hr 0-9999 AV:49 cl_cdown_1
Comp A1 Load Percent DIGITALP R % 0-100 AV:34 digitalp_1
Compr Return Gas Temp RGTA R °F 0-125 AV:20 rgta_1
Compr Return Gas Temp RGTB R °F 0-125 AV:28 rgtb_1
Compressor A1 Feedback K_A1_FBK R ON_OFF BV:16 k_a1_fbk_1
Compressor A1 Relay K_A1_RLY R ON_OFF BV:13 k_a1_rly_1
Compressor A1 Run Hours HR_A1 R hr 0-9999 AV:60 hr_a1_1
Compressor A1 Starts CY_A1 R 0-9999 AV:68 cy_a1_1
Compressor A2 Feedback K_A2_FBK R ON_OFF BV:17 k_a2_fbk_1
Compressor A2 Relay K_A2_RLY R ON_OFF BV:14 k_a2_rly_1
Compressor A2 Run Hours HR_A2 R hr 0-9999 AV:61 hr_a2_1
Compressor A2 Starts CY_A2 R 0-9999 AV:69 cy_a2_1
Compressor A3 Feedback K_A3_FBK R ON_OFF BV:18 k_a3_fbk_1
Compressor A3 Relay K_A3_RLY R ON_OFF BV:15 k_a3_rly_1
Compressor A3 Run Hours HR_A3 R hr 0-9999 AV:62 hr_a3_1
Compressor A3 Starts CY_A3 R 0-9999 AV:70 cy_a3_1
Compressor B1 Feedback K_B1_FBK R ON_OFF BV:22 k_b1_fbk_1
Compressor B1 Relay K_B1_RLY R ON_OFF BV:19 k_b1_rly_1
Compressor B1 Run Hours HR_B1 R hr 0-9999 AV:64 hr_b1_1
Compressor B1 Starts CY_B1 R 0-9999 AV:72 cy_b1_1
Compressor B2 Feedback K_B2_FBK R ON_OFF BV:23 k_b2_fbk_1
Compressor B2 Relay K_B2_RLY R ON_OFF BV:20 k_b2_rly_1
Compressor B2 Run Hours HR_B2 R hr 0-9999 AV:65 hr_b2_1
Compressor B2 Starts CY_B2 R 0-9999 AV:73 cy_b2_1
Compressor B3 Feedback K_B3_FBK R ON_OFF BV:24 k_b3_fbk_1
Compressor B3 Relay K_B3_RLY R ON_OFF BV:21 k_b3_rly_1
Compressor B3 Run Hours HR_B3 R hr 0-9999 AV:66 hr_b3_1
Compressor B3 Starts CY_B3 R 0-9999 AV:74 cy_b3_1
MSV Point for i-Vu /
BACnet based on 0 = Switch
Control Method R 0 1 = Occupancy MSV:5 control_msv_1
CCN point 2 = CCN
CONTROL
0 = Test
1 = Local Off
2 = CCN Off
3 = Clock Off
4 = Emergency
Control Mode STAT R Stop AV:8 stat
5 = Local On
6 = CCN On
7 = Clock On
8 = IDF Off
9 = SPT SATS
Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W °F -20-70 AV:5 ctrl_pnt_1
LEGEND
R — Read
W — Write

215
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
Table G — Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT READ/ UNITS DEFAULT RANGE BACNET BACNET
NAME WRITE VALUE OBJECT ID OBJECT NAME
Cooling Demand Level R 0-3 AV:9006 cool_demand_level_1
Cooling Ramp Loading CRAMP R/W °F 1.0 0.2-2.0 AV:56 cramp_1
0 = No Reset
MSV Point for i-Vu 1 = 4-20 mA Input
/ BACnet based
Cooling Reset Type on CCN point R 0 2 = Outdoor Air Temp MSV:7 crst_typ1_msv_1
3 = Return Temperature
CRST_TYP 4 = Space Temperature
Cooling Setpoint 1 CSP1 R/W °F 60.0 -20-70 AV:53 csp1_1
Cooling Setpoint 2 CSP2 R/W °F 55.0 -20-70 AV:54 csp2_1
Demand Level 1 R/W 0-100 AV:80 dmv_lvl_1_perct
Demand Level 2 R/W 0-100 AV:81 dmv_lvl_2_perct
Demand Level 3 R/W 0-100 AV:82 dmv_lvl_3_perct
MSV Point for i-Vu 0 = None
Demand Limit Select / BACnet based R 0 1 = Ext. Sw. Input MSV:8 dmd_ctrl_msv_1
on CCN point 2 = 4-20 mA Input
DMD_CTRL 3 = CCN Loadshed
Demand Limit Switch 1 DMD_SW1 R ON_OFF BV:25 dmd_sw1_1
Demand Limit Switch 2 DMD_SW2 R ON_OFF BV:26 dmd_sw2_1
Demand/Sound Limited MODE_15 R ON_OFF BV:41 mode_15_1
Discharge Gas Temp DIGCMPDT R °F -40-245 AV:7 digcmpdt_1
Discharge Pressure DP_A R psig 0-999 AV:13 dp_a_1
Discharge Pressure DP_B R psig 0-999 AV:23 dp_b_1
Element Communications R 0 = Comm Normal BV:58 comm_lost_alm
Alarm 1 = Comm Alarm (BALM)
Element Comm Status R 0 = No Comm BV:2999 element_stat_1
1 = Normal
0 = Enable
Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W 0 BV:6 emstop_1
1 = Emstop
Fan 1 Relay FAN_1 R ON_OFF BV:60 fan_1_1
Fan 2 Relay FAN_2 R ON_OFF BV:61 fan_2_1
Fan 3 Relay FAN_3 R ON_OFF BV:62 fan_3_1
Fan 4 Relay FAN_4 R ON_OFF BV:63 fan_4_1
Fan 5 Relay FAN_5 R ON_OFF BV:64 fan_5_1
Fan Delta Active Time FANDLTTM R/W sec 0-999 AV:10 fandlttm_1
Fan Stage Circuit A FANSTGEA R sec 0-999 AV:35 fanstgea_1
Fan Stage Circuit B FANSTGEB R sec 0-999 AV:15 fanstgeb_1
Head Set Point OFF HSP_OFF R/W °F 72 0-150 AV:16 hsp_off_1
Head Set Point ON HSP_ON R/W °F 110 0-150 AV:18 hsp_on_1
Hi Cool On Set Point DMDHCON R/W °F 3 0.5-20 AV:25 dmdhcon_1
High SCT Circuit A MODE_21 R ON_OFF BV:47 mode_21_1
High SCT Circuit B MODE_22 R ON_OFF BV:48 mode_22_1
High Temperature Cooling MODE_18 R ON_OFF BV:44 mode_18_1
Indoor Fan Status-CIRA IDFA_FS R ON_OFF BV:2 idfa_fs_1
Indoor Fan Status-CIRB IDFB_FS R ON_OFF BV:3 idfb_fs_1
1 = Automatic
Lead/Lag Circuit Select LEAD_TYP R/W 1 2 = Circuit A Leads AV:43 lead_typ_1
3 = Circuit B Leads
Liquid Line Solenoid A LLSV_A R ON_OFF BV:8 llsv_a_1
Liquid Line Solenoid B LLSV_B R ON_OFF BV:9 llsv_b_1
Lo Cool Off Set Point DMDLCOFF R/W °F 0.5 0.5-2 AV:30 dmdlcoff_1
Lo Cool On Set Point DMDLCON R/W °F 1 -1-2 AV:31 dmdlcon_1
Loading Sequence Select SEQ_TYPE R/W 1 1-2 AV:77 seq_type_1
Low Sound Mode MODE_25 R ON_OFF BV:51 mode_25_1
Low Temperature Cooling MODE_17 R ON_OFF BV:43 mode_17_1
LEGEND
R — Read
W — Write

216
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
Table G — Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION POINT NAME READ/ UNITS DEFAULT RANGE BACNET BACNET
WRITE VALUE OBJECT ID OBJECT NAME
1 = VAV
2 = Invalid
3 = Tstat Multi
MSV Point for i-Vu / 4 = Tstat 2 Stg
BACnet based on
Machine Control Type CCN point R 4 5 = SPT Multi MSV:3 ctrltype_msv_1
6 = Invalid
CTRLTYPE 7 = PCT Cap
8 = Dual Tsat
9 = VAV Setpoint
Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hr 0-9999 AV:57 mr_mach_1
Machine Starts CY_MACH R 0-9999 AV:58 cy_mach_1
Minimum Comp. On Time MODE_23 R ON_OFF BV:49 mode_23_1
Minimum Load Valve Relay MLV_RLY R ON_OFF BV:79 mlv_rly_1
Minimum OFF time active MODE_10 R ON_OFF BV:38 mode_10_1
Minutes Left for Start MIN_LEFT R min 00:00-15:00 AV:32 min_left_1
Minutes Off Time DELAY R/W min 0 0-15 AV:42 delay_1
Occupied OCC R YES_NO BV:2008 occ_status_1
Outside Air Temperature OAT R/W °F -40-245 AV:1003 oa_temp
Override Modes in Effect MODE R YES_NO BV:5 mode_1
Percent Available Cap. CAPA_A R % 0-100 AV:12 capa_a_1
Percent Available Cap. CAPB_A R % 0-100 AV:22 capb_a_1
Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % 0-100 AV:3 cap_t_1
Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % 0-100 AV:11 capa_t_1
Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R % 0-100 AV:21 capb_t_1
Ramp Load Limited MODE_5 R ON_OFF BV:33 mode_5_1
Requested Stage STAGE R 0-99 AV:9 stage_1
Return Air Temperature RETURN_T R °F 0-125 AV:1010 ra_temp_1
Saturated Condensing Tmp SCTA R °F -40-245 AV:40 scta_1
Saturated Condensing Tmp SCTB R °F -40-245 AV:39 sctb_1
Saturated Suction Temp SSTA R °F -40-245 AV:17 ssta_1
Saturated Suction Temp SSTB R °F -40-245 AV:26 sstb_1
SCT Delta for Compressor A1 A1SCTDT R/W °F 0-99 AV:41 a1sctdt_1
SCT Delta for Compressor A2 A2SCTDT R/W °F 0-99 AV:46 a2sctdt_1
SCT Delta for Compressor B1 B1SCTDT R/W °F 0-99 AV:47 b1sctdt_1
SCT Delta for Compressor B2 B2SCTDT R/W °F 0-99 AV:48 b2sctdt_1
Slow Change Override MODE_9 R ON_OFF BV:37 mode_9_1
Space T Cool Set Point SPT_SP R/W °F 78.0 0-999 AV:51 spt_sp_1
Space T SP Plus Offset SPSP_PO R/W °F 0-999 AV:76 spsp_po_1
0 = Cool Off
Space Temp Control Mode SPTMODE R 1 = Lo Cool AV:52 sptmode_1
2 = Hi Cool
3 = Cool On
Space Temperature SPT R/W °F 0-999 AV:2007 space_temp
Space Temperature Offset SPTO R/W °F 0-99 AV:55 spto_1
Space Temperature Offset
SPTOSENS R/W ENA_DIS BV:10 sptosens_1
Enable
Space Temperature Offset
Range SPTO_RNG R/W °F -20-99 AV:75 spto_rng_1
Space Temperature Sensor SPTSENS R ENA_DIS BV:11 sptsens_1
Suction Pressure SP_A R psig 0-999 AV:14 sp_a_1
Suction Pressure SP_B R psig 0-999 AV:24 sp_b_1
Suction Superheat SH_A R °F -40-245 AV:44 sh_a_1
Temperature
Suction Superheat
SH_B R °F -40-245 AV:45 sh_b_1
Temperature
Supply Air Set Point SAT_SP R °F 0-125 AV:78 sat_sp_1
Supply Air Temperature SUPPLY_T R °F -40-245 AV:1008 sa_temp_1
System Demand Limiting R Inactive_Active BV:83 dem_lmt_act_1
LEGEND
R — Read
W — Write

217
 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
Table G — Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION POINT NAME READ/ UNITS DEFAULT RANGE BACNET BACNET
WRITE VALUE OBJECT ID OBJECT NAME
Temperature Reset MODE_14 R ON_OFF BV:40 mode_14_1
Time Guard Active MODE_TG R ON_OFF BV:67 mode_tg_1
Timed Override in effect MODE_6 R ON_OFF BV:34 mode_6_1
User Defined Analog 1 R/W AV:2901 user_analog_1_1
User Defined Analog 2 R/W AV:2902 user_analog_2_1
User Defined Analog 3 R/W AV:2903 user_analog_3_1
User Defined Analog 4 R/W AV:2904 user_analog_4_1
User Defined Analog 5 R/W AV:2905 user_analog_5_1
User Defined Binary 1 R/W ON_OFF BV:2911 user_binary_1_1
User Defined Binary 2 R/W ON_OFF BV:2912 user_binary_2_1
User Defined Binary 3 R/W ON_OFF BV:2913 user_binary_3_1
User Defined Binary 4 R/W ON_OFF BV:2914 user_binary_4_1
User Defined Binary 5 R/W ON_OFF BV:2915 user_binary_5_1
Var Head Press Output VHPA_ACT R % 0-100 AV:19 vhpa_act_1
Circuit A
Var Head Press Output
VHPB_ACT R % 0-100 AV:83 vhpb_act_1
Circuit B
Y1 Thermostat Input Y1 R ON_OFF BV:27 y1_1
Y2 Thermostat Input Y2 R ON_OFF BV:28 y2_1
Y3 Thermostat Input Y3 R ON_OFF BV:29 y3_1
Y4 Thermostat Input Y4 R ON_OFF BV:30 y4_1
LEGEND
R — Read
W — Write

218
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS

NOTE: Discharge check valve located

inside each compressor.

a38-7339

Fig. G — 38APD025-030 Piping and Instrumentation

219
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (cont)

a38-7340

NOTE: Discharge check valve located

inside each compressor.

Fig. H — 38APD040-060 Piping and Instrumentation

220
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (cont)

a38-7341

NOTE: Discharge check valve located

inside each compressor.

Fig. I — 38APD070,080 Piping and Instrumentation

221
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (cont)

a38-7342

NOTE: Discharge check valve located

inside each compressor.

Fig. J — 38APD090-130 Piping and Instrumentation

222
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (cont)

a38-7343
NOTE: Discharge check valve located
inside each compressor.

Fig. K — 38APS025-030 Piping and Instrumentation

NOTE: Discharge check valve located

a30-7344
inside each compressor.

Fig. L — 38APS040-050 Piping and Instrumentation

223
APPENDIX D — PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (cont)

a38-7345
NOTE: Discharge check valve located
inside each compressor.

Fig. M — 38APS065 Piping and Instrumentation

224
 APPENDIX E — CONTROL METHODS WITH INPUTS FOR CONTROL MODE COMPARISON

ENABLE- SPT
INDOOR FAN
CTRL DESCRIPTION OFF- OCCUPANCY CHIL_S_S EMSTOP STATUS SATISFIED ALARM STAT
REMOTE SCHEDULE VALUE VALUE (C.TYP=3
SWITCH SWITCH OR 5)
Enable Closed No No 5 (ON LOCAL)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
Enable N/A N/A Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Off N/A N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
0 Switch Control
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Remote-
Open N/A N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed No No 5 (ON LOCAL)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
Remote-
N/A N/A Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Closed
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed No No 7 (ON TIME)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
Occupied N/A Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 3 (OFF TIME)
Unoccupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Occupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Off
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Unoccupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
2 Occupancy
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Occupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Remote - EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Open Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Unoccupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed No No 7 (ON TIME)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
Occupied N/A Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Remote- Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Closed EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 3 (OFF TIME)
Unoccupied N/A Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)

225
APPENDIX E — CONTROL METHODS WITH INPUTS FOR CONTROL MODE COMPARISON (cont)

ENABLE- INDOOR SPT

CTRL DESCRIPTION OFF- OCCUPANCY CHIL_S_S EMSTOP FAN SATISFIED ALARM STAT
REMOTE SCHEDULE VALUE VALUE STATUS (C.TYP=3
SWITCH SWITCH OR 5)
Enable Closed No No 6 (ON CCN)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
N/A Start Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 2 (OFF CCN)
N/A Stop Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Off N/A Start/Stop Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
3 CCN
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 1 (OFF LOCAL)
Remote-
Open N/A Start/Stop Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed No No 6 (ON CCN)
Enable Closed Yes No 9 (SPT SATISFIED)
N/A Start Enable Open Yes/No No 8 (IDFS NOT ON)
Remote- Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Closed EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
Enable Closed/Open Yes/No No 2 (OFF CCN)
N/A Stop Enable Closed/Open Yes/No Yes 4 (OFF EMRGCY)
EMSTOP Closed/Open Yes/No Yes/No 4 (OFF EMRGCY)

226
 INDEX
Alarm relay, 40 Control wiring schematics Motormaster V option/accessory
Alarm routing, 111 38APD025-060, 16 Configuring, 126
Alarms and alerts, 162 38APD070-130, 18 Fan staging, use in, 125
Codes, 163 38APS025-050, 15 Fault codes, 152,154
Details, 166 38APS065, 17 Password, 128
History, 162 Crankcase heaters Program parameters, 127
Resetting, 162 Mounting, 146 Troubleshooting, 152
Auxiliary board (AUX) Wiring, 146 Troubleshooting parameters, 153
Described, 24 Current sensing board (CSB) Motor overload protection,
Schematic, 25 Described, 26 compressor, 139
BACnet communication option, 210 Input connections, 27 Copeland with TF code, 139
BAS port, configuring, 211 Deadband multiplier, 115 Copeland with TW or TE, 139
Device instance address, 210 Demand limit, 115 CoreSense module mounting, 141
Points list, 215 2-stage switch controlled, 115 Kriwan, 139
Capacity control, 64 4 to 20 mA controlled, 116 Navigator display
C.TYP=1 (VAV), 64 CCN loadshed, 117 Backlight brightness, 22
C.TYP=3 (TSTAT MULTI), 67 CCN controlled, 117 Cleaning, 161
C.TYP=4 (TSTAT 2 STG), 69 Demand limited mode (MD15), 135 Contrast adjustment, 22
C.TYP=5 (SPT MULTI), 71 Digital compressor option, 117 Described, 21
C.TYP=7 (PCT CAP), 75 Digital oil recover mode (D.OIL), 135 OAT below lockout temp mode
C.TYP=8 (DUAL TSTAT), 105 Discharge Temperature thermistor (L.OUT), 135
C.TYP=9 (VAV SETPOINT), 107 (DTT), 31 Occupancy schedule
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN), 22 Mounting, 39 CCN global, 63
Tables, 195-209 Door hinges, lubricating, 161 Holidays, 61
Wiring, 22 Emergency On/Off switch, 26 Local schedule, 61
Compressors Enable/Off/Remote Control switch, 26 Setting, 61
Adjusting oil charge, 57 Energy management module (EMM) Timed override, 63
Checking oil level, 57 Described, 26 Oil
Digital, 117 Schematic, 26 Adjusting charge (start-up), 57
Enabling and disabling, 138 Fan staging, 117 Checking level (start-up), 57
Functional check, 144 Fan status switch (FS1, FS2), 26 Charging (service), 147
Locations, 137 Filter drier service, 152 Quantity per compressor, 147
Motor overload protection, 139 Ground fault interrupter-convenience Operating modes
Motor protection, 138 outlet (GFI-CO), testing, 161 Defined, 135
Operating envelope, 138 Head pressure control, 117 D.OIL, 135
Service, 137 High pressure switch (HPS) L.OUT, 135
Staging, 112 Described, 28 MD05, 135
Compressor expansion module (CXB) Mounting, 40 MD06, 135
Described, 24 Replacing, 152 MD09, 135
Schematic, 25 High saturated condensing MD10, 135
Compressor staging, 112 temperature (SCT) modes MD14, 135
Circuit loading, 112 (MD21, MD22), 135 MD15, 135
Lead/lag determination, 112 High temperature cooling mode MD17, 135
Loading sequence, 112 (MD18), 135 MD18, 135
Condenser fan motors Language, changing display, 22 MD21, MD22, 135
Protection, 150 LEDs, 23 MD23, 135
Replacing, 149 Liquid line solenoid valves MD25, 135
Condenser fan service, 150 Described, 40 MDTG, 135
AeroAcoustic (low sound), 150 Connections, 40 Outdoor air temperature (OAT)
Lubrication, 161 Low ambient lockout, 128 sensor, 31
Metal (Value Sound), 150 Low temperature cooling mode Mounting, 38AP025-060, 39
Control boards, ComfortLink (MD17), 135 Mounting, 38APS065,
Green LED (main base board), 23 Lubrication 38APD070-130 39
Red LED (main base board), 23 Condenser fan blades, 161 Passwords
Yellow LED (main base board), 23 Condenser fan motor bearings, 161 Changing, 22
Control components Door hinges, 161 Entering, 22
Sizes 025-030, 5 Main base board (MBB) Piping and instrumentation diagrams
Sizes 040-060, 6 Described, 23 38APD025-030, 219
Size 065, 7 Schematic, 24 38APD040-060, 220
Sizes 070-130, 8 Maintenance, 161 38APD070,080 221
Control methods (start/stop) Schedule, 161 38APD090-130, 222
Capacity control, 64 MCHX maintenance, 161 38APS025-030, 223
CCN control, 64 Measurement units, changing, 22 38APS040-050, 223
Comparison, with inputs, 225 Minimum comp ontime mode 38APS065, 224
Enable-Off-Remote, 60 (MD23), 135 Power wiring schematics
Occupancy schedule, 61 Minimum load control, 128 38APD040-060 11
Setting, 60 Minimum off time active mode 38APD070-100 13
Control module service, 149 (MD10), 135 38APD115,130 14
Communication loss, 149 Minutes off time, 128 38APS,APD025-030 9
Control module replacement, 149 Moisture/liquid indicator, 152 38APS040,050 10
38APS065, 12
Field, 20

227
Pressure transducers Thermistors
Color, 154 Connections, AUX, 155
Described, 28 Connections, MBB, 155
Discharge pressure, mounting, 40 Described, 28
Locations, 33-38 Designations (MBB), 23
Replacing, 155 Discharge temperature (DTT), 31
Suction pressure, mounting, 40 Outdoor air temperature (OAT), 31
Troubleshooting, 154 Replacing, 156
Wiring, typical, 155 Return air temperature (RAT), 28
Pre-start-up, 40 Return gas temperature (RGT), 31
Ramp loading, 128 Space temperature (SPT), 31
Ramp load limited mode (MD05), 135 Supply air temperature (SAT), 30
Refrigerant Temperature vs. resistance/voltage
Adjusting charge, 41 drop (5K), 157, 158
Preliminary charge, 41 Temperature vs. resistance/voltage
Refrigeration circuit drop (10K), 159, 160
Charging, 41 Temperature vs. resistance (86K), 160
Leak testing, 161 Troubleshooting, 156
Return air temperature (RAT) Thermostats
thermistor, 28 Input, 32
Return gas temperature (RGT) Time, day, date
thermistor, 31 Broadcast, 59
Mounting, 40 Daylight savings time, 59
Safety, 2,3 Setting, 59
Scrolling marquee display Time guard active mode (MDTG), 135
Described, 21 Timed override in effect mode
Display tables, 176-194 (MD06), 135
Menu structure, 176 Troubleshooting, 162
Sensor locations Alarms and alerts, 162
38APD025,027,030, 34 Alarm and alert codes, 163
38APD040,050,060, 35 Alarm and alert details, 166
38APD070,080 Circuit A, 36 Alarm history, 162
38APD070 Circuit B, 36 Resetting alarms, 162
38APD090,100 Circuit A, 37 UPC Open controller
38APD080,090,100 Circuit B, 37 Addressing, 210
38APD115,130 Circuit A, 38 Battery, testing and replacing, 214
38APD115,130 Circuit B, 38 Configuring, 213
38APS025,027,030, 33 LEDs, 214
38APS040,050, 34 Local access, 213
38APS065, 35 Wiring, 211
CCN, 32 Wiring, Carrier Comfort Network
OAT, 39 (CCN), 23
Service, 136 Wiring schematics, control
Service test, 136 38APD025-060, 16
Sizes, unit, 3 38APD070-130, 18
Slow change override mode 38APS025-050, 15
(MD09), 135 38APS065, 17
Space temperature thermistor (SPT), 31 Wiring schematics, power
Start-up, 41 38APD040-060 11
Checklist, CL-1 to CL-14 38APD070-100 13
Supply air temperature (SAT) 38APD115,130 14
thermistor, 30 38APS,APD025-030 9
Switches 38APS040,050 10
Emergency On/Off, 26 38APS065, 12
Enable/Off/Remote Control, 26 Field, 20
Fan Status Switch (FS1, FS2), 26
High pressure (HPS), 28
Inputs (MBB), 24
Locations, 28
System check (pre-start-up), 40
Temperature relief devices, 155
Temperature reset, 129
4 to 20 mA temperature reset, 133
Outside air termperature reset, 131
Space temperature reset, 129
Temperature reset mode (MD14), 135

© Carrier Corporation 2015

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53380010-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38AP-2T Rev. A Pg 228 9-19 Replaces: 38AP-1T
 START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 38AP SPLIT SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT
(Remove and use for Job File)

I. Project Information

JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________

CITY __________________________________________ PROVINCE/STATE _______ ZIP______________

INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________

SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________

START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________

DESIGN INFORMATION

SYSTEM INFORMATION
EVAPORATOR COIL
CAPACITY OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY AIR RETURN AIR SIZE
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
(SQ FT)

ROWS FINS PER INCH COIL CIRCUITING ROW/FACE SPLIT CFM

CONTROL INFORMATION

CONSTANT VOLUME OR VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROL TYPE (1-9)

(CONFIGURATIONOPT2C.TYP)

PIPING INFORMATION (Be sure to include units of measure)

SUCTION LINE TOTAL CONDENSER EQUAL, DOUBLE SUCTION

LIQUID LINE DIAMETER INTERCONNECTING ABOVE, OR BELOW
DIAMETER PIPIE LENGTH EVAPORATOR RISER USED? (Y/N)

REDUCED RISER REDUCED RISER REDUCED RISER

RISER A DIAMETER RISER B DIAMETER
USED? (Y/N) DIAMETER LENGTH

CONDENSING UNIT:

MARK FOR: _______________________________

UNIT MODEL ______________________________

SERIAL _________________________________

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53380010-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38AP-2T Rev. A Pg CL-1 9-19 Replaces: 38AP-1T
 AIR-HANDLING UNIT(S):

MARK FOR: _______________________________ _______________________________________

MANUFACTURER __________________________ _______________________________________

UNIT MODEL ______________________________ _______________________________________

SERIAL _________________________________ ________________________________________

II. PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT CHECK

A. CONDENSING UNIT
1. IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE?  YES  NO
DESCRIPTION _______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
WILL THIS DAMAGE PREVENT START-UP?  YES  NO
2. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.  YES  NO
3. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE.  YES  NO
4. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY.  YES  NO
5. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.  YES  NO
6. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED  YES  NO
PROPERLY.
7. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT.  YES  NO
8. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT.  YES  NO
9. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR  YES  NO
CROSSED WIRES.
10. RETURN GAS THERMISTOR(S) IS/ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS.  YES  NO
11. MOTORMASTER(S) IS/ARE CONNECTED TO PROPER FANS, IF  YES
 N/A  NO
EQUIPPED.
ARE WIND BAFFLES INSTALLED?  YES  NO
12. RETURN AND SUPPLY AIR THERMISTORS (RAT AND SAT) OR
COMMUNICATION PROVISIONS MADE FOR CONTROL TYPES  N/A  YES  NO
(CONFIGURATIONOPT2C.TYP) 1, 3, 5 OR 9.
13. SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SPT) OR COMMUNICATION
PROVISIONS MADE FOR CONTROL TYPE  N/A  YES  NO
(CONFIGURATIONOPT2C.TYP) 5.
14. LONG LINE OPTION KIT (LONG LINE CHECK VALVE) REQUIRED.  YES  NO
15. LONG LINE OPTION KIT (LONG LINE CHECK VALVE) INSTALLED
PROPERLY, AT THE CONDENSING UNIT AND WITH FLOW IN THE  N/A  YES  NO
CORRECT DIRECTION.
16. ALL SERVICE VALVES OPEN.  YES  NO
17. ALL PIPING IS PROPERLY CONNECTED.  YES  NO
18. CRANKCASE HEATERS ARE TIGHT.  YES  NO
19. CRANKCASE HEATERS ARE OPERATIONAL AND HAVE BEEN ENERGIZED
FOR 24 HOURS TO REMOVE ANY LIQUID REFRIGERANT FROM THE  YES  NO
COMPRESSOR.

CL-2
 B. AIR-HANDLING UNIT
1. ALL SERVICE VALVES OPEN.  YES  NO
2. ALL PIPING IS PROPERLY CONNECTED.  YES  NO
3. ONLY BLEED PORT TXVS ARE INSTALLED.  YES  NO

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B
TXV MFR PART NUMBER TXV MFR PART NUMBER

4. TXVS ARE PROPERLY INSTALLED, EQUALIZER LINES PROPERLY  YES  NO

LOCATED, BULBS PROPERLY LOCATED AND INSULATED.
5. LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE(S) ARE NEAR THE EVAPORATOR  YES
 N/A  NO
AND INSTALLED WITH PROPER FLOW DIRECTION, IF REQUIRED.
6. LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE MANUAL LIFT STEMS DISENGAGED,  YES
 N/A  NO
IF EQUIPPED.
7. FILTER DRIERS AND SIGHT GLASSES ARE INSTALLED NEAR  YES  NO
THE TXV(S).
8. EVAPORATOR FANS ARE TURNING IN THE PROPER DIRECTION.  YES  NO
9. THE FAN AND MOTOR PULLEYS OF THE INDOOR FAN HAVE  YES  NO
BEEN CHECKED FOR PROPER ALIGNMENT.
10. FAN BELTS HAVE THE PROPER TENSION.  YES  NO
11. EVAPORATOR FAN STATUS SWITCH(ES) INSTALLED.  YES  NO
12. EVAPORATOR FAN STATUS SWITCH(ES) OPERATIONAL.  N/A  YES  NO
13. WATER HAS BEEN PLACED IN THE DRAIN PAN TO CONFIRM PROPER  YES  NO
DRAINAGE.
14. AIR FILTERS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED.  YES  NO
15. VERIFY PROPER EVAPORATOR CFM.  YES  NO

C. REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
1. ALL SERVICE VALVES OPEN.  YES  NO
2. ALL PIPING HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR LEAKS WITH A LEAK DETECTOR.  YES  NO
3. LOCATE, REPAIR, AND REPORT ANY LEAKS. _______________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
4. THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN CHARGED WITH THE APPROPRIATE INITIAL  YES  NO
REFRIGERANT CHARGE.

CIRCUIT A PRELIMINARY REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT B PRELIMINARY REFRIGERANT

CHARGE CALCULATION CHARGE CALCULATION

BASE UNIT, WITH 25 ft (7.6 m) BASE UNIT, WITH 25 ft (7.6 m)

INTERCONNECTING PIPING INTERCONNECTING PIPING

EVAPORATOR COIL EVAPORATOR COIL

ADDITIONAL PIPING CHARGE, MORE THAN 25 ft ADDITIONAL PIPING CHARGE, MORE THAN
(7.6 m) INTERCONNECTING PIPING 25 ft (7.6 m) INTERCONNECTING PIPING

TOTAL PRELIMINARY CHARGE  lb TOTAL PRELIMINARY CHARGE  lb

 kg  kg

CL-3
C. REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT (cont)
5. ADDITIONAL OIL ADDED TO THE CIRCUITS, IF REQUIRED.  N/A  YES  NO
CIRCUIT A ________________________________________  oz  ml
CIRCUIT B ________________________________________  oz  ml
6. OIL IS VISIBLE IN THE COMPRESSOR SIGHTGLASSES,
AT LEAST 1/8 TO 3/8 FULL, AFTER CRANKCASE HAS BEEN ENERGIZED  YES  NO
FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS

7. RECORD OIL LEVELS BELOW. COMPRESSORS MUST BE OFF.

COMP A1 COMP A2 COMP A3

COMP B1 COMP B2 COMP B3

a38-7404

PROJECT INFORMATION AND PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT CHECK PERFORMED BY:

_________________________________________________________________________________________

COMPANY ________________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS ________________________________________________________________________________

CITY, STATE/PROVINCE:

___________________________________________________ DATE _______________________________

CL-4
III. SYSTEM START-UP (to be completed by the start-up technician)
A. PRE-START CHECK
1. ALL SERVICE VALVES OPEN.  YES  NO
2. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT.  YES  NO
3. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS
 YES  NO
10 TO 14 ft-lbs (13.5 TO 18.9 N-m)
4. LOCATE, REPAIR, AND REPORT ANY LEAKS. _______________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
5. SUPPLY VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE.  YES  NO
6. CONTROL TRANSFORMER(S) PRIMARY CONNECTION SET
 YES  NO
FOR PROPER VOLTAGE.
7. CONTROL TRANSFORMER (TRAN1) SECONDARY VOLTAGE ________________ vac
CONTROL TRANSFORMER (TRAN2) SECONDARY VOLTAGE ________________ vac
8. CHECK VOLTAGE PHASE IMBALANCE:
AB: ______ V AC: ______ V BC: ______ V
AVERAGE VOLTAGE (AB + AC + BC)/3: ______ V
MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE: ______ V
VOLTAGE IMBALANCE: MAXIMUM DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE x 100 ______ %
9. VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%.  YES  NO
DO NOT START UNIT IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%.
CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE.
10. EVAPORATOR FAN SWITCH(ES) OPERATIONAL, IF INSTALLED.  N/A  YES  NO
11. PROPER CONDENSER FAN ROTATION CONFIRMED.  YES  NO
12. PROPER EVAPORATOR FAN ROTATION CONFIRMED.  YES  NO
13. RECORD SOFTWARE VERSION INFORMATION.
 YES  NO
PRESS [ENTER] AND [ESCAPE] TO OBTAIN SOFTWARE VERSIONS.

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

MBB CESR131466— __________ — ____________

AUX CESR131333— __________ — ____________

Run StatusVERS CXB CESR131173— __________ — ____________

EMM CESR131174— __________ — ____________

MARQ CESR131171— __________ — ____________

NAVI CESR130227— __________ — ____________

14. TIME AND DATE SET PROPERLY.  YES  NO

CL-5
 B. START AND OPERATE THE SYSTEM. Complete the following:
1. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST.  YES  NO
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE.  YES  NO
3. TRIM REFRIGERANT PER CHARGING CHART.  YES  NO

CIRCUIT A FINAL REFRIGERANT CHARGE CIRCUIT B FINAL REFRIGERANT CHARGE

PRELIMINARY CHARGE PRELIMINARY CHARGE

TRIM CHARGE TRIM CHARGE

TOTAL CHARGE  lb TOTAL CHARGE  lb

 kg  kg

4. RECORD COMPRESSOR CURRENT AT FULL LOAD.

COMPRESSOR L1 L2 L3

COMPRESSOR A1

COMPRESSOR A2

COMPRESSOR A3

COMPRESSOR B1

COMPRESSOR B2

COMPRESSOR B3

5. RECORD CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT.

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR L1 L2 L3

FAN MOTOR 1

FAN MOTOR 2

FAN MOTOR 3

FAN MOTOR 4

FAN MOTOR 5

FAN MOTOR 6

FAN MOTOR 7

FAN MOTOR 8

CL-6
 B. START AND OPERATE THE SYSTEM (cont):

6. RECORD CONFIGURATION MODE SETTINGS.

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

TEST Test Display LEDs

METR Metric Display

DISP
LANG Language Selection

PAS.E Password Enable

PASS Service Password

UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE Unit Size

NCKT Number of Refrig Ckts

SZ.A1 Compressor A1 Size

SZ.A2 Compressor A2 Size

SZ.A3 Compressor A3 Size

UNIT
SZ.B1 Compressor B1 Size

SZ.B2 Compressor B2 Size

SZ.B3 Compressor B3 Size

FAN.S Fan Sequence Number

A1.TY Compressor A1 Digital?

MAX.T Maximum A1 Unload Time

CCN NETWORK CONFIGS

CCNA CCN Address

CCN
CCNB CCN Bus Number

BAUD CCN Baud Rate

CL-7
 6. RECORD CONFIGURATION MODE SETTINGS (cont)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

MLV.S Minimum Load Valve Select

CSB.E CSB Boards Enable

SPT.S Space Temp Sensor

OPT1 SP.O.S Space Temp Offset Enable

SP.O.R Space Temp Offset Range

RAT.T RAT Thermistor Type

SAT.T SAT Thermistor Type

EMM EMM Module Installed

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

C.TYP Machine Control Type

CTRL Control Method

OPT2
LOAD Loading Sequence Select

LLCS Lead/Lag Circuit Select

DELY Minutes Off Time

MOTORMASTER

MMR.S Motormaster Select

P.GAN Head Pressure P Gain

M.MST
I.GAN Head Pressure I Gain

D.GAN Head Pressure D Gain

MIN.S Minimum Fan Speed

CL-8
 6. RECORD CONFIGURATION MODE SETTINGS (cont)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE

RESET COOL TEMP

CRST Cooling Reset Type

MA.DG 4-20 — Degrees Reset

RM.NO Remote - No Reset Temp

RM.F Remote - Full Reset Temp

RM.DG Remote - Degrees Reset

RT.NO Return - No Reset Temp

RT.F Return - Full reset Temp

RSET
RT.DG Return - Degrees Reset

DMDC Demand Limit Select

DM20 Demand Limit at 20 mA

SHNM Loadshed Group Number

SHDL Loadshed Demand Delta

SHTM Maximum Loadshed Time

DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1

DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

RL.S Ramp Load Select

SLCT CRMP Cooling Ramp Loading

SCHD Schedule Number

Z.GN Deadband Multiplier

CL-9
 6. RECORD CONFIGURATION MODE SETTINGS (cont)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE

SERVICE CONFIGURATION

EN.A1 Enable Compressor A1

EN.A2 Enable Compressor A2

EN.A3 Enable Compressor A3

SERV EN.B1 Enable Compressor B1

EN.B2 Enable Compressor B2

EN.B3 Enable Compressor B3

REV.R Reverse Rotation Enable

TCOM Two Comp Ckt Oil Mgmt

BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

T.D.BC CCN Time/Date Broadcast

BCST OAT.B CCN OAT Broadcast

G.S.BC Global Schedule Broadcst

BC.AK CCN Broadcast Ack'er

CL-10
 7. RECORD SETPOINTS MODE SETTINGS

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE

COOLING SET POINTS

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

CSP.2 Cooling Setpoint 2

SPS.P Space T Cool Setpoint

SPT.O Space Temperature Offset

COOL ST.P.O Space T SP Plus Offset

P.CAP Percent Cap. Requested

L.C.ON Lo Cool On Setpoint

H.C.ON Hi Cool On Setpoint

L.C.OF Lo Cool Off Setpoint

OAT.L OAT Lockout Temperature

HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS

H.SP Head Setpoint On

H.SP.F Head Setpoint Off

HEAD F.ON Fan On Set Point

F.OFF Fan Off Set Point

F.DLT Fan Stage Delta

F.TME Fan Delta Active Time

CL-11
 8. RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES WHEN STABLE OPERATION HAS BEEN
CONFIRMED.

UNIT DATA

CONTROL POINT (Run StatusVIEWCTPT)

TOTAL CAPACITY (Run StatusVIEWCAP)

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE (TemperatureUNITRAT)*

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE (TemperatureUNITSAT)*

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (TemperatureUNITOAT)

SPACE TEMPERATURE (TemperatureUNITSPT)

CIRCUIT A DATA

SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP (TemperatureCIR.ASCT.A)

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP (TemperatureCIR.ASST.A)

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE (TemperatureCIR.ARGT.A)

DISCHARGE GAS TEMPERATURE (TemperatureCIR.AD.GAS)*

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP (TemperatureCIR.ASH.A)

DISCHARGE PRESSURE (PressurePRC.ADP.A)

SUCTION PRESSURE (PressurePRC.ASP.A)

LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE AT SERVICE VALVE*

LIQUID LINE PRESSURE AT SERVICE VALVE

CIRCUIT B DATA

SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP (TemperatureCIR.BSCT.B)

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP (TemperatureCIR.BSST.B)

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE (TemperatureCIR.BRGT.B)

DISCHARGE GAS TEMPERATURE*

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP (TemperatureCIR.BSH.B)

DISCHARGE PRESSURE (PressurePRC.BDP.B)

SUCTION PRESSURE (PressurePRC.BSP.B)

LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE AT SERVICE VALVE*

LIQUID LINE PRESSURE AT SERVICE VALVE

READINGS IN:  °F  °C  psi  kPa

* Taken with a digital thermometer if sensors are unavailable.

CL-12
9. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL.  YES  NO
INSTRUCTION TIME _____ HOURS
10. AFTER 20 MINUTES OF OPERATION, OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT IN
 YES  NO
SIGHTGLASS.
11. RECORD OIL LEVELS BELOW. COMPRESSORS MUST BE OFF.

COMP A1 COMP A2 COMP A3

COMP B1 COMP B2 COMP B3

a38-7404

CL-13
 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMMENTS:

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

SIGNATURES:

START-UP TECHNICIAN: CUSTOMER REPRESENTATIVE:

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

________________________________________ ___________________________________________

COMPANY ______________________________ COMPANY _________________________________

DATE ___________________________________ ADDRESS _________________________________

__________________________________________

CITY, STATE/PROVINCE:

__________________________________________

DATE _____________________________________

© Carrier Corporation 2015

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53380010-01 Printed in U.S.A. 38AP-2T Rev. A Pg CL-14 9-19 Replaces: 38AP-1T